lv1_news_U1_U4_200605_en.FH10 Thu May 18 13:19:21 2006 Seite 3
low-voltageCONTROLS AND DISTRIBUTION
CatalogLV1News•April2006
SIRIUS
SENTRON
SIVACON
Related catalogs Contents
Low-Voltage Controls and
Distribution
SIRIUS · SENTRON · SIVACON
Order No.
Catalog
E86060-K1002-A101-A5-7600
Technical Information
E86060-T1002-A101-A5-7600
LV 1
LV 1 T
Systems · Controls: Contactors and contactor assem-
blies, solid-state switching devices · Protection equip-
ment · Load feeders, motor starters and soft starters ·
Monitoring and control devices · Detecting devices ·
Commanding and signaling devices · Transformers ·
Power supplies · ALPHA FIX terminal blocks · Planning
and configuration with SIRIUS · SIVACON busway and
cubicle systems · SENTRON switching and protection
devices for power distribution: Air circuit-breakers,
molded case circuit-breakers, switch disconnectors ·
Planning, design and management with SIMARIS ·
BETA modular installation devices
Industrial Communication
Industrial Communication
for Automation and Drives
Order No.:
E86060-K6710-A101-B4-7600
IK PI Industrial Ethernet to IEEE 802.3 · PROFINET ·
Industrial Mobile Communicaton · PROFIBUS to
IEC 61158/EN 50170 · SIMATIC ET 200 distributed I/Os ·
AS-Interface to EN 50295/IEC 61158 · Remote operation
with SINAUT ST7 · Routers · ECOFAST system
SICUBE
System Cubicles and Cubicle
Air-Conditioning
Order No.
E86060-K1920-A101-A3-7600
LV 50 System Cubicles · Cubicle Modifications · Cubicle
Expansion · Accessories · Special Cubicles · CubicleSo-
lutions in Practice · Cubicle Air-Conditioning· Special
Colors
SIDAC
Reactors and Filters
Order No.:
E86060-K2803-A101-A3-7600
LV 60 Commutating reactors for converters · Mains reactors for
frequency converters · Iron-core output reactors ·
Ferrite output reactors · Iron-core smoothing reactors ·
Smoothing air-core reactors · Filter reactors · Application-
specific reactors · Radio interference suppression filters ·
dv/dt filters · Sinewave filters
SIVACON 8PS
Busway systems
CD, BD01, BD2 to 1250 A
Order No.:
E86060-K1870-A101-A2-7600
LV 70 Busway systems, Overview · CD system (25 A to 40 A) ·
BD01 system (40 A to 160 A) · BD2 system (160 A to
1250 A)
Automation & Drives
The A&D Offline Mall
Order No.:
E86060-D4001-A110-C4-7600
DVD:
E86060-D4001-A510-C4-7600
CA 01 All Automation and Drives products,
including those in the catalogs listed above.
A&D Mall
Internet:
http://www.siemens.com/
automation/mall
All Automation and Drives products,
including those in the catalogs listed above.
Catalog PDF
Internet:
http://www.automation.
siemens.com/cd
All catalogs for Low-Voltage Controls can be
downloaded as pdf files.
Registered trademarks Technical Assistance
All product designations may be registered trademarks
or product names of Siemens AG or other supplying
companies. Third parties using these trademarks or
product names for their own purposes may infringe
upon the rights of the trademark owners.
Further information about low-voltage controls is
available on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
Expert technical assistance
for Low-Voltage Controls and
Electrical Installations.
Tel.: +49 (9 11) 8 95-59 00
Fax: +49 (9 11) 8 95-59 07
E-Mail: technical-assistance
@siemens.com
0/1Siemens LV 1 · 2006
The corresponding sections in
Catalog LV 1 · 2006 and in the
Technical Information LV 1 T · 2006
are replaced by this news edition
Contact your local Siemens
representative for further information
© Siemens AG 2006
The products and
systems listed in this
catalog are distributed/
manufactured using a
certified quality
management system
which complies with
EN ISO 9001
(Certificate Register
Nos. can be found in
the appendix).
The certificates are
recognized in all
IQ Net countries.
1 Introduction
Funktionen
11 Supply
Power supplies
2 Systems
12 Connecting with
ALPHA
ALPHA FIX terminal blocks
3 Controls
Contactors and
contactor assemblies
13 Engineering
Software
Planning and configuration
with SIRIUS
4 Solid-state switching devices
14 Distributing with
SIVACON
SIVACON power
distribution boards, busway
and cubicle systems
5 Protecting
Protection equipment
15 Switching and
Protecting with
SENTRON
Air circuit-breakers
6 Starting
Load feeders, motor
starters and soft starters
16 Molded case circuit-breakers
7 Monitoring
and Control
Monitoring and
control devices
17 Switch disconnectors
8 Detection
Detecting devices
18 Engineering
Software
Planning, design and
management with
SIMARIS
9 Commanding and
Signaling
Commanding and
signaling devices
19 Protecting with
BETA
BETA modular
installation devices
10 Supply
Transformers
20 Appendix
Low-Voltage
Controls
SIRIUS · SENTRON ·
SIVACON
Catalog
LV 1 News · 04/2006
s
1 Introduction
Welcome to Automation and Drives
TIA - Innovations for more productivity
TIP - Power distribution and management from one source
Low-voltage controls and distribution - The basis for progressive
solutions
SIRIUS industrial controls
Low-voltage power distribution
Supply
11 Power Supplies
4AV non-stabilized power supplies
6EP stabilized power supplies
SITOP power
LOGO! Power
SIRIUSIndustrialControls
Systems
2 Systems
AS-Interface
ECOFAST system
SIRIUS Safety Integrated
PROFIBUS
SIRIUS Modular System
ConnectingwithALPHA
12 ALPHA FIX Terminal Blocks
Terminals with insulation displacement connection
Standard terminals, spring-loaded
Terminals with screw connection
Switching
3 Controls -
Contactors and contactor assemblies
3RT, 3TF contactors for switching motors
3RA13, 3RA14 contactor assemblies
3RT, 3RH, 3TB, 3TC, 3TH, 3TK contactors for special applications
3RH, 3TH contactor relays · 3RT coupling relays
3TX7, 3RS18 coupling relays
LZX plug-in relays · 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors
EngineeringSoftware
13 Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS
ES motor starters
ECOFAST ES
SIMOCODE ES
Soft Starter ES
4 Controls -
Solid-State Switching Devices
3RF20 solid-state relays
3RF21 solid-state relays
3RF23 solid-state contactors
3RF29 function modules
Low-VoltagePowerDistribution
DistributingwithSIVACON
14 SIVACON Power Distribution Boards,
Busway and Cubicle Systems
SIVACON power distribution boards and motor control centers
8PS busbar trunking systems · SICUBE 8MC, 8MF system
cubicles and cubicle air-conditioning · SIKUS series of
switchgear cubicles · ALPHA 630-DIN floor-mounted
distribution boards · 8HP molded-plastic distribution systems
Components for 8US, 8UC, 4NC distribution systems
Protecting
5 Protection Equipment
3RV motor starter protectors
3RB2 solid-state overload relays
3RU1 thermal overload relays
SwitchingandProtectingwithSENTRON
15 SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices
for Power Distribution
3WL air circuit-breakers
Starting
6 Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters
3RW44 soft starters
3RA fuseless load feeders
3RA71 load feeders with safety integrated
AS-Interface motor starters and soft starters
ET 200S, ET 200pro, ET 200X motor starters
ET 200S Safety motor starters Solutions local/PROFIsafe
ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters
3RE encapsulated starters
16 SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices
for Power Distribution
3VL, 3VF2 molded case circuit-breakers
MonitoringandControl
7 Monitoring and Control Devices
SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control devices
LOGO! Logic Modules · 3RP, 7PV timing relays
3UG monitoring relays for electrical and additional measurements
3RS10, 3RS11, temperature monitoring relays
3RN1 thermistor motor protection
3TK28 safety relays
3RS17 interface converters
17 SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices
for Power Distribution
3KA, 3LD switch disconnectors
3KL, 3NJ6 switch disconnectors with fuses
3NP, 3NJ4, 3NJ5 fuse switch disconnectors
Detection
8 Detecting Devices
3SE2, 3SE3, position switches
3SE2 hinge switches
3SE6 magnetically operated switches
EngineeringSoftware
18 Planning, Design and Management
with SIMARIS
SIMARIS design
Switch ES Power
SIMARIS manager
CommandingandSignaling
9 Commanding and Signaling Devices
3SB2, 3SB3, 3SF5 pushbutton units and indicator lights
3SB3 two-hand operation consoles
3SE7, 3SF2 cable-operated switches
3SE2, 3SE3 foot switches
8WD4 signaling columns
8WD5 integrated signal lamps
ProtectingwithBETA
19 BETA Modular Installation Devices
Fuse and fuse systems
SR60 busbar system
Miniature circuit-breakers
Residual current operated circuit-breakers
Lightning and surge arresters
Power supply devices
Measuring devices
Supply
10 Transformers
Single-phase transformers
Three-phase transformers
20 Appendix
Glossary · Training · Ordering notes · Further
documentation · Standards and approvals ·
Quality management · Siemens contacts·
External partners · Online services · Customer support
Software licenses · Subject index
Order number index · Fax order
Conditions of sale and delivery
Niederspannungs-Schalttechnik
4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
Delivery times (DT)
} Preferred type
A 2 working days
B 1 week
C 3 weeks
D 6 week
X on request
Preferred types are available immediately from
stock, i.e. are dispatched within 24 hours.
Normal quantities of the products are usually deliv-
red within the specified time following receipt of
your order at our branch.
In exceptional cases, the actual delivery period
may differ from that specified.
The delivery periods apply up to the ramp at Siemens AG (products ready for
dispatch). The transport times depend on the destination and type of shipping.
The standard transport time for Germany is 1 day.
The delivery times specified here represent the state of 02/2006. They are per-
manently optimized. Up-to-date information can be found at
www.siemens.com/automation/mall.
Price units (PU)
The price unit defines the number of units, sets or
meters to which the specified price and weight
apply.
Packaging sizes (PS)
The packaging size defines the number, e.g. of
units, sets or meters, for outer packaging.
Only the quantity defined by the packaging size or
a multiple thereof can be ordered!
For multi-unit packaging and recyclable packaging, see Appendix.
Price groups (PG)
Each product is assigned to a price group.
The defined weight in kg refers to the price unit
(PU).
Dimensions
All dimensions in mm.
Explanations
Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
AS-Interface
Introduction
AS-Interface Specification
2/2 - Overview
2/3 - Benefits
Routers
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
2/4 - Overview
2/4 - Benefits
2/5 - Application
2/6 - Selection and ordering data
2/6 - Accessories
Slaves
Digital I/O modules according to
Specification 3.0
2/7 - Overview
2/7 - Selection and ordering data
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/8 - Overview
2/9 - Selection and ordering data
2/9 - Accessories
Analog I/O modules IP67 – K60
2/11 - Overview
2/11 - Benefits
2/12 - Selection and ordering data
2/13 - Accessories
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
2/14 - Design
2/14 - Function
2/15 - Technical specifications
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/16 - Design
2/19 - Technical specifications
2/23 - Dimensional drawings
2/24 - Schematics
Analog I/O modules IP67 – K60
2/25 - Function
2/26 - Technical specifications
2/26 - Schematics
Systems
Catalog
Technical information
AS-Interface
Introduction
AS-Interface Specification
2/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Overview
Technology development of the AS-Interface
System limits of the AS-Interface Specification
Expansions of the AS-Interface Specification 2.1
• The AS-Interface Specification 2.1 enables the number of net-
work stations to be doubled from 31 to 62.The 31 addresses
which are possible in an AS-Interface network can be split by
means of the so-called extended addressing function.
• If this option is used for each of the 31 slaves, the maximum
number of stations in an AS-Interface network is then 62. The
so-called A/B slaves can have a maximum of four inputs and
three outputs. The extended addressing function can be used
only for digital slaves, not for analog slaves or safety-oriented
slaves (ASIsafe).
• Another function of the AS-Interface Specification V2.1 is the
integrated analog value transfer function. In this case "inte-
grated" means that no special function blocks are required for
accessing the analog values. It is just as easy to access the
analog values as the digital values. The integrated analog
value transfer function can be used with analog slaves which
support the profiles 7.3 and 7.4.
Expansions of the AS-Interface Specification 3.0
• The AS-Interface Specification 3.0 enables the connection of
up to 1000 digital inputs and outputs (profile S-7.A.A: 8DI/8DO
as A/B slave).
• New profiles make it possible to use the extended addressing
function for analog slaves as well.
• Analog value transfer is accelerated by "Fast Analog Profiles".
• Variable use of analog modules: optional parameterization of
the resolution (12/14 bit) and one or two channels.
• Asynchronous serial protocol 100 baud or 50 baud bidirec-
tional.
ASi Spec. V2.0
ASi Spec. V2.1
1994 1998 2001 2005/2006
ASIsafe
ASi Spec. V3.0
5 ms bus cycle time
NSA0_00453a
31 Slaves•
•
62 Slaves (10 ms)•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Speed/Flexibility
Analog profiles
Diagnostics peripherals
4DI/4DO in A/B technology
8DI/8DO in A/B technology
Additional analog profiles
Transmission of serial data
Safety monitor
Safe input slaves
AS-Interface Specification Maximum number of slaves Number of digital inputs Number of digital outputs
digital analog ASIsafe
Version 2.0 31 31 31 31 × 4 = 124 31 × 4 = 124
Version 2.1 62 31 31 62 × 4 = 248 62 × 3 = 186
Version 3.0 62 62 31 62 × 8 = 496 62 × 8 = 496
AS-Interface
Introduction
AS-Interface Specification
2/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
AS-Interface master
To be able to operate A/B slaves on an AS-Interface network you
must also use master modules which comply with at least
Specification 2.1.
A/B technology is supported by the masters of the SIMATIC S7
and the DP/AS-Interface links from Siemens. Only standard
slaves and A slaves (= A/B slave with an A address) can be
operated on masters which do not support Specification 2.1.
The subaddress of A/B slaves is set to "A" in the as-delivered
state.
The new masters according to Specification 3.0 support all new
slave profiles and also display full download compatibility.
The AS-Interface Specification applicable for the particular slave
is specified in the section Selection and Ordering Data.
The exact slave profile is shown in the section
Technical Specifications.
Communication cycle
Standard slaves are queried in each cycle (max. cycle time:
5 ms). If only one A or B slave is installed at an address, this
slave will be queried in each cycle (max. cycle time: 5 ms). If an
A/B slave pair is installed at an address, the A slave will be que-
ried in one cycle and the B slave in the next cycle (max. cycle
time: 10 ms). If only standard and/or A slaves are installed in a
network, the cycle time is identical to the standard masters
(max. cycle time: 5 ms).
Whether an AS-Interface slave is a standard slave or an A/B
slave is noted in the section Selection and Ordering Data in the
column Slave Type and can be deduced from the section
Technical Specifications of the slave in question.
All slave types can be mixed and used in the same AS-Interface
network.
■Benefits
• Reduction of master and power supply costs thanks to a
higher number of slaves and I/Os per AS-Interface line.
• Improved decentralization in plants with numerous, widely
spread signals.
• Further expansion of existing AS-Interface systems is
possible.
AS-Interface Specification Available master
Version 2.1 S7-200 (CP 243-2), S7-300 (CP 343-2, 343-2P), DP/ASi Link 20E
Version 3.0 DP/AS-i Link Advanced
AS-Interface Specification Maximum cycle time Slave profile
Version 2.0 5 ms S-X.0, S-X.1, S-X.F
Version 2.1 5 ms with 31 slaves
10 ms with 62 Slaves
S-X.A, S-7.3, S-7.4, S-7.F
Version 3.0 as for Version 2.1, and profile-specific 10 ms for
inputs/outputs (e.g. 20 ms for 4DI/4DO and 40 ms
for 8DI/8DO)
S-7.5.5; S-7.A.5, S-B.A.5; S-7.A.7, S-7.A.8; S-7.A.9,
S-7.A.A, S-6.0
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
2/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Overview
• Compact router between PROFIBUS (DP Slave) and
AS-Interface
• Single and double AS-Interface master (according to
AS-Interface Specification V3.0) for connection of
62 AS-Interface slaves each and integrated analog value
transfer
• Integrated ground fault monitoring for the AS-Interface cable
• User-friendly local diagnostics and start-up by means of a full
graphic display and control keys or through a web interface
with a standard browser
• Optimum TIA integration through STEP 7, integration in non-
Siemens engineering tools using PROFIBUS type file (GSD)
• Vertical integration (standard web interface) through Industrial
Ethernet
• Supply from AS-Interface cable; hence no additional power
supply required
• Module exchange without a PG using C-PLUG
■Benefits
• Short start-up times through simple configuration at the press
of a button and testing of the AS-Interface line using the
display or web interface
• Reduction of downtimes and servicing times in the event of a
slave failure thanks to user-friendly diagnostics using the
display or web interface and through simple module
exchange with the help of the C-PLUG exchange medium
• Reduction of installation costs because the supply comes
completely from the AS-Interface cable, making an additional
power supply superfluous
• Reduced amount of engineering work thanks to user-friendly
configuration of Siemens slaves using the slave catalog in
HW-Config (STEP 7)
• Costs saved by the double AS-Interface master when large
volumes of project data are involved
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
2/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Application
The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is a PROFIBUS DPV1 slave
(according to EN 50 170) and an AS-Interface master (based on
AS-Interface Specification V3.0 according to EN 50 295).
It enables transparent data access to AS-Interface from
PROFIBUS DP.
PROFIBUS DP masters can exchange I/O data with AS-Interface
in cyclic mode; DP masters with acyclic services can perform
AS-Interface master calls in addition. As such, the DP/AS-i LINK
Advanced is particularly well suited for a decentral construction
and for connection of a lower-level AS-Interface network.
For applications with typical volumes of project data it is
sufficient to use the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in its version as an
AS-Interface single master.
For applications with large volumes of project data
the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in its version as an AS-Interface
double master is used. In this case, twice the volume of project
data can be used on two AS-Interface lines running indepen-
dently of each other.
Integration of AS-Interface on PROFIBUS through DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as single/double master
DP/AS-i
LINK
Advanced
ET 200pro
ET 200S
G_IK10_XX_40018
LINK
Advanced
Power
supply
unit
LOGO! Safety
monitor
Safe slave with
EMERGENCY-STOP
PG e.g.
with CP 5611 A2
S7-300
e.g. with CP 342-5
PC with
SOFTNET-DP
Power
supply
unit
Slave Safety monitor
Safe slave with
EMERGENCY-STOP
Laser
scanner
S7-400
with CP 443-5 Extended
Operating &
Monitoring
When using DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as
double master
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
2/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Selection and ordering data
■Accessories
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
Router between PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface; master
profiles M3 and M4, extended AS-Interface Specification
V3.0; degree of protection IP20
• Single master with display A 6GK1 415-2BA10 1 1 unit 543 0.380
• Double master with display A 6GK1 415-2BA20 1 1 unit 543 0.380
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
C-PLUG
Exchange medium for the simple exchange of devices in
the event of a fault; for accommodating configuration and
application data; can be used in SIMATIC NET products
with a C-PLUG slot
} 6GK1 900-0AB00 1 1 unit 543 0.200
IE FC RJ45 Plug 90
RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet, with
robust metal enclosure and integrated cutting and
clamping contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet
FC installation cables; with 90° cable feeder; for ET 200S
• 1 pack = 1 unit } 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0 1 1 PK 543 0.030
• 1 pack = 10 units } 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0 1 1 PK 543 0.300
• 1 pack = 50 units } 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0 1 1 PK 543 1.500
Bus connector RS 485
with angled cable feeder (35°)
screw terminals,
max. transfer rate 12 Mbit/s
• Without PG interface } 6ES7 972-0BA60-0XA0 1 1 unit 250 0.045
SIMATIC NET
Manual Collection
B 6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0 1 1 unit 540 0.017
Electronic manuals for communication systems,
protocols, products;
on CD-ROM;
German/English
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules according to Specification 3.0
2/7Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Overview
The new AS-Interface Specification 3.0 adds a number of com-
pletely new features to AS-Interface bus system. The extended
address mode (A/B addresses) enables the connection of up to
62 slaves on one AS-Interface network. With the extended
address mode according to Specification 3.0, four outputs are
now possible for the first time even with A/B slaves (instead of
only three outputs possible up to now with Specification 2.1).
Hence with full expansion of an AS-Interface network, there are
now 248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one
AS-Interface system.
Modules with four inputs and four outputs as A/B slaves
according to Specification 3.0 are available
• for field use in degree of protection IP67 (compact modules
K20 and K60)
• and for the control cabinet (SlimLine Module S45) in degree of
protection IP20.
Please note that these modules can be used only with a new
master according to AS-Interface Specification 3.0 (e.g. the new
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced) and that the cycle times for the outputs
can extend to max. 20 ms.
■Selection and ordering data
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
3RK2 400-1DQ00-0AA3
Digital I/O modules, IP67 – K60
• PNP transistor
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Type Current
carrying
capacity of
outputs
Slave
type
Pin
assign-
ment
Connec-
tion
technique
4 inputs/
4 out-
puts
2 A A/B
(Spec.
3.0)
Y-II M12 } 3RK2 400-1DQ00-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.212
3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
• PNP transistor
• Start of delivery: 3rd quarter 2006
Type Current
carrying
capacity of
outputs
Slave
type
Pin
assign-
ment
Connec-
tion
technique
4 inputs/
4 out-
puts
1 A A/B
(Spec.
3.0)
Stan-
dard
M8 A 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.110
3RK2 400-1CE01-0AA2
S45 SlimLine modules
• Inputs: PNP transistor
Type Connec-
tion termi-
nals
Slave
type
Inputs Outputs
4 inputs/
4 out-
puts
Screw A/B
(Spec.
3.0)
2- and
3-wire
PNP tran-
sistor
2 A
} 3RK2 400-1CE01-0AA2 1 1 unit 121 0.289
Spring-
loaded
connection
B 3RK2 400-1CG01-0AA2 1 1 unit 121 0.241
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/8 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Overview
The K20 series of compact modules supplements the
AS-Interface compact modules with a particularly narrow
version measuring just 20 mm wide. Thanks to their extremely
compact size the modules are particularly well suited for the use
of handling machines in production systems where modules
need to be arranged in most confined space. Another field of
application is robotics. The K20 modules are connected to the
AS-Interface with a round cable with M12 cable box instead of
with the AS-Interface flat cable. The AS-Interface bus cable and
the 24 V DC auxiliary power supply are routed in this case in a
shared round cable. This enables a mounting arrangement that
saves a great deal of space. Use on moving machinery is also
possible without difficulty thanks to the flexibility of the round
cable. The K20 modules are also ideal for such applications as
their non-encapsulated design makes them particularly light in
weight.
In applications with tow chains, many users rely on placing the
AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable. With the K20 modules,
direct connection to the round cable is possible in this case.
No adapter is required from the flat to the round cable.
The K20 series of compact modules includes both standard
AS-Interface modules as well as an ASIsafe version for connec-
tion of safety-oriented sensors such as Emergency Stop push-
buttons or door safety monitors. All standard AS-Interface
K20 modules support the extended address module (A/B
addresses) accorfding to AS-Interface Specification 2.1, with
which 62 stations can be connected to one AS-Interface net-
work. The K20 module with four inputs and four outputs works in
the extended address mode according to AS-Interface
Specification 3.0, thus enabling for the first time four outputs with
one A/B slave and hence 248 inputs plus 248 outputs with full
expansion of the AS-Interface network.
For particularly space-saving dimensions the sensors and actu-
ators are connected using M8 plug-in connectors. Alternatively
there is also an M12 socket with a Y connector.
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/9Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Selection and ordering data
■Accessories
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
Type Current
carrying
capacity
of
outputs
Slave
type
Pin
assign-
ment
Con-
nection
tech-
nique
Start of
delivery
4 inputs -- A/B Stan-
dard
M8 A 3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075
Y M12 A 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075
2 out-
puts/
2 inputs
1 Stan-
dard
M8 A 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075
Y M12 A 3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075
4 out-
puts/
4 inputs
1 A/B
(Spec.
3.0)
Stan-
dard
M8 3rd
quarter
2006
A 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.110
2 safe
inputs
-- Stan-
dard
Y-II M12 A 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
3RK1 901-1KA00
3RK1 901-1PN00
AS-Interface sealing caps
• For free M12 sockets } 3RK1 901-1KA00 1 10 units 121 0.100
• For free M8 sockets A 3RK1 901-1PN00 1 10 units 121 0.100
3RK1 901-1NN00
AS-Interface standard distributor,
for AS-Interface flat cable
• Current carrying capacity up to 7 A
• Delivery includes special mounting plate for wall and
standard rail mounting
• Seals (3RK1 902-0AR00) are required only if a cable
is to be terminated in the distributor and must be
ordered separately
} 3RK1 901-1NN00 1 1 unit 121 0.086
3RK1 901-1NN10
AS-Interface compact distributor,
for AS-Interface flat cable
Current carrying capacity up to 6 A
A 3RK1 901-1NN10 1 1 unit 121 0.040
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/10 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
Note: For plug connectors and cables see
• Catalog FS 10 / chapter Proximity Switches / Accessories /
Plug Connectors or
• Internet (www.siemens.com/as-interface)
3RX9 801-0AA00
3RK1 901-1NR11
3RG7 838-1DG
3RK1 901-1NR21
3RK1 901-1NR00
AS-Interface M12 branch
for flat cable to Cable length
AS-i M12 socket -- } 3RX9 801-0AA00 1 1 unit 121 0.029
M12 cable box 1 m A 3RK1 901-1NR11 1 1 unit 121 0.070
2 m A 3RK1 901-1NR12 1 1 unit 121 0.100
AS-i / Uaux M12 socket -- A 3RG7 838-1DG 1 1 unit 575 0.200
M12 cable box 1 m A 3RK1 901-1NR21 1 1 unit 121 0.070
2 m A 3RK1 901-1NR22 1 1 unit 121 0.100
Quadruple M12
socket
Supplied with
coupling module
-- A 3RK1 901-1NR00 1 1 unit 121 0.186
3RK1 901-1TR00
M12-T distributor
• IP68
• 1 x M12 connector
• 2 x M12 box
C 3RK1 901-1TR00 1 1 unit 121 0.038
6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0
M12 Y-shaped coupler plugs
for connection of two sensors to one M12 socket
with Y connector
A 6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0 1 1 unit 250 0.046
3RK1 901-3RA00
Addressing cable with jack plugs to M12
• For addressing K20 modules
• Required only for 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit
• If the latest version of the 3RK1 904-2AB01
addressing unit is used, the addressing is
performed with a standard 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
M12 cable
C 3RK1 901-3RA00 1 1 unit 121 0.064
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
AS-Interface
Slaves
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
2/11Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Overview
AS-Interface analog modules from the K60 compact series
detect or issue analog signals locally. These modules are linked
to the higher level controller through an AS-Interface master
according to Specification 2.1 or Specification 3.0.
The analog modules are divided into five groups:
• Input module for sensors with current signal
• Input module for sensors with voltage signal
• Input module for sensors with thermal resistor
• Output module for current actuators
• Output module for voltage actuators
The input modules according to Profile 7.3/7.4 are available with
two or four input channels. It is possible in addition to convert the
two-channel module to using only one input channel, thus
enabling very short times before the analog value is available.
The conversion is effected by means of a jumper plug at
socket 3.The transmission times achieved with analog modules
according to Profile 7.A.9 are half shorter than those achieved
with Profile 7.3/7.4. Operation is adjustable in this case, e.g. it is
possible to choose with the ID1 Code whether the module is op-
erated with one or two channels.
The output modules are configured as two-channel modules as
standard.
The input and output channels are electrically isolated from the
AS-Interface network. If sensors with a higher power require-
ment are to be connected, more power can be supplied through
the auxiliary voltage as an alternative to the internal supply.
In the manual the modules are presented in great detail along
with their technical specifications and in-depth notes on opera-
tion. Sample function blocks round off the manual.
■Benefits
• Analog modules are just as easy to integrate in AS-Interface
as digital modules
• Analog values can be easily detected and issued locally
• Preprocessing of the analog value transmission in the master
enables rapid evaluation of the analog values
• Up to four values can be detected using one analog module
• Extremely fast transmission and conversion of analog values
is possible by the new possibility of changing over to single-
channel operation
Specification 3.0 now provides the following benefits in addition:
• A/B technology is now also available with analog modules
• On average the transmission times are shorter by half (only
three or four cycles depending on the resolution selected); the
total processing times can be found in the manual
• Operation is variably adjustable: 12 or 14-bit resolution, one or
two channels can be selected with the ID1 Code
• Handling of the analog value processing with masters
Specification 3.0, the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, has been
further simplified
AS-Interface
Slaves
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
2/12 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Selection and ordering data
You can find more information on the Internet at:
http://mall.ad.siemens.com
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
3RK1 207-1BQ44-0AA3
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60, Analog Profile 7.3
• Slave type: Standard
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Inputs Type Measuring range
1 or 2 inputs
(switch-selectable by
means of a jumper
plug at socket 3)
Current 4 ... 20 mA or
± 20 mA
(selectable)
A 3RK1 207-1BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.187
Voltage ± 10 V or
1 ... 5 V
(selectable)
A 3RK1 207-2BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.188
Thermal
resistance
Pt 100 or
Ni 100 or
0 ... 600 Ω
(selectable)
A 3RK1 207-3BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.183
4 inputs Current 4 ... 20 mA or
± 20 mA
(selectable)
A 3RK1 207-1BQ44-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.190
Voltage ± 10 V or
1 ... 5 V
(selectable)
C 3RK1 207-2BQ44-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.190
Thermal
resistance
Pt 100 or
Ni 100 or
0 ... 600 Ω
(selectable)
A 3RK1 207-3BQ44-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.190
Outputs Type Output range
2 outputs Current
for 2-wire
actuators
4 ... 20 mA or
± 20 mA or
0 ... 20 mA
(selectable)
A 3RK1 107-1BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.200
Voltage
for 2-wire
actuators
± 10 V or
0 ... 10 V or
1 ... 5 V
(selectable)
A 3RK1 107-2BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.200
3RK2 207-2BQ50-0AA3
Analog I/O module, IP67 – K60,
Analog Profile 7.A.9
• Slave type: A/B (Specification 3.0)
• Modules supplied without mounting plate
Inputs Type Measuring range
1 or 2 inputs (variably
adjustable)
Current 4 ... 20 mA or
± 20 mA
(selectable)
A 3RK2 207-1BQ50-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.187
Voltage ± 10 V or
1 ... 5 V
(selectable)
A 3RK2 207-2BQ50-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.187
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
AS-Interface
Slaves
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
2/13Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Accessories
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Manual, German
available only as a download from the Internet:
http://www.siemens.de/automation/manuals
3RK1 901-0CA00
K60 mounting plates
• Wall mounting } 3RK1 901-0CA00 1 1 unit 121 0.065
• Standard rail mounting } 3RK1 901-0CB01 1 1 unit 121 0.095
3RK1 901-1KA00
M12 sealing caps } 3RK1 901-1KA00 100 10 units 121 0.100
3RK1 902-0AR00
Sealing sets
• For K60 mounting plate and distribution board
• Cannot be used for K45 mounting plate
• One set contains one straight and one shaped seal
B 3RK1 902-0AR00 100 5 units 121 0.100
3RK1 901-1AA00
Jumper plugs
for changing over the 2-channel
input modules
A 3RK1 901-1AA00 1 1 unit 121 0.012
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
2/14 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Design
• Solid plastic enclosure in degree of protection IP20 for
standard rail mounting
• Compact design
- Display in the front panel for detailed indication of the
operating state and functional readiness of all connected
and activated AS-Interface slaves
- 6 buttons for starting up and testing the AS-Interface line
directly on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
- LED indication of the operating state of PROFIBUS DP and
AS-Interface
- Integrated Ethernet port (RJ45 socket) for user-friendly
start-up, diagnostics and testing of the DP/AS-i LINK
Advanced through a web interface using a standard browser
- Supply voltage from the AS-Interface shaped cable or
alternatively through the 24 V DC supply
- Small mounting depth thanks to recessed plug mounting
• Simple mounting on standard rail
• Operation without fans and batteries
• Quick exchange of devices in the event of a fault when using
the optional C-PLUG exchange medium (not included in the
scope of supply)
■Function
The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced provides a PROFIBUS
DP master with the possibilities of cyclic access to the I/O data
of all the slaves of a lower-level AS-Interface segment.
According to the extended AS-Interface Specification (V3.0) it is
possible to connect a maximum of 62 slaves, each with 4 inputs
and 4 outputs and analog slaves, per AS-Interface line.
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced occupies in the master as standard
32 bytes of input data and 32 bytes of output data in which the
I/O data of the connected AS-Interface slaves are stored. The
size of the input/output buffer can be compressed so that only
the actually required I/O memory space is occupied in the
system of the DP master. The integrated evaluation of analog
signals is just as easy as access to digital values; there is no
need to call any communication modules.
PROFIBUS DP V1 masters are able in addition to initiate
AS-Interface master calls (e.g. to write parameters, change
addresses or read diagnostics values) through the acyclic
PROFIBUS services.
Using an operating display in AS-i Link it is possible to fully
commission the lower-level AS-Interface line.
The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is equipped with an additional
Ethernet port which enables use of the integrated web server
and further increases the previously described user-friendliness
of the operating display. Free firmware updates are also
possible.
The optional C-PLUG supports module exchange without a PG,
thus reducing downtimes to a minimum in the event of a fault.
Diagnostics
With LEDs, the display and control keys, web interface and
STEP 7 there is an extensive diagnostics offering that includes:
• Operating state of the link
• State of the link as a PROFIBUS DP slave
• Diagnostics of the AS-Interface network
• Message frame statistics
• Standard diagnostics pages for fast diagnostics access using
a standard browser
Configuration
The configuration of the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be defined
either by means of STEP 7/NCM PC or simply by adopting the
ACTUAL configuration on the display.
Alternatively the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be integrated
through the PROFIBUS type file (GSD) in the engineering tool:
• COM PROFIBUS
• Older STEP 7/NCM PC versions
• Non-Siemens engineering tools
With STEP 7 configuring, the AS-Interface configuration can be
uploaded in STEP 7 V5.4 and higher. The user-friendly configu-
ration of AS-Interface slaves from Siemens is also possible here
in HW-Config (slave catalog).
AS-Interface
Routers
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
2/15Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Technical specifications
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
Transmission rates per
AS-Interface line
• AS-Interface bus cycle time 5 ms with 31 slaves;
10 ms with 62 slaves
• PROFIBUS transmission rate max. 12 Mbit/s
• Ethemet transmission rate 10/100Mbit/s, autosensing
Interfaces
• AS-Interface connection 1 x 4-pole clamping contacts
(plug-in)
- for single master 1 x 4-pole clamping contacts
(plug-in)
- for double master
(2 AS-i lines)
2 x 4-pole clamping contacts
(plug-in)
• Connection to PROFIBUS 9-pole Sub D socket
• Communication to Ethernet RJ45 socket
• Optional:
24 V DC supply voltage
3-pole clamping contacts
(plug-in)
Display 128 x 64 pixel with background
lighting
Keys Membrane keypad (6 keys)
Supply voltage
• From the AS-Interface shaped cable
(line 1)
acc. to AS-Interface
Specification EN 50295
• Optional: 24 V DC 24 V DC, protective ground
conductor
Current consumption
• From the AS-Interface shaped cable max. 200 mA
Load capacity
• 5 V DC at the PROFIBUS connection max. 70 mA
• Power loss 7,5 W
Degree of protection IP20
Permissible ambient conditions
• Operating temperature
- Horizontal mounting 0 °C to +60 °C
- Vertical mounting 0 °C to +45 °C
• Transport and storage temperature -30 °C to +70 °C
• Relative humidity Max. 95 % at +25 °C
• Operating altitude 3000 m above sea level
Structural design
• Installation on standard mounting rail
• Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 90 x 132 x 88.5
• Weight approx. 380 g
Supported AS-Interface
master profiles
M1, M2, M3, M4
(acc. to Complete AS-Interface Spec-
ification V3.0)
Configuring the AS-Interface using pushbuttons on the front panel,
with STEP 7 V5.4 or higher,
through web interface
DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/16 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Design
Installation
Mounting the K20 modules: on the front (see left) or on the side (see right)
The K20 modules are mounted with two screws. A mounting
plate is not required. In addition to mounting in the front it is
possible to mount the modules on the side in a space-saving
and protected position, e.g. on mounting rails.
Addressing
Addressing the K20 modules
Addressing the K20 modules is performed using the same
socket as for the bus connection. For the addressing the module
is connected to the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit using a
standard M12 cable (2 or 3-pole), e.g. 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5.
If the older version of the 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit is
used, a special addressing cable (3RK1 901-3RA00) is required
for connection to the addressing unit. After the addressing
operation the addressing cable is removed again and the
module connected to the bus line. No 4 or 5-pole connecting
cable may be used for the addressing.
All standard K20 modules (not ASIsafe versions) support the
extended address mode and can be addressed with an A or B
address. Up to 62 slaves can thus be operated on one
AS-Interface network. The version with four inputs and four out-
puts (3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3) works according to the new
AS-Interface Specification 3.0. Through Specification 3.0 it is
possible for even A/B slaves to have four outputs (instead of only
three possible up to now with Specification 2.1). Please note that
this module can be used only with a new master according to
AS-Interface Specification 3.0 (e.g. the new DP/AS-i LINK
Advanced) and that the cycle times for the outputs can extend
to max. 20 ms.
Connection
AS-Interface M12 feeders and distribution boards, closed
AS-Interface M12 feeders and distribution boards, open
NSA0_00443
3RK1 904-2AB01
AS-Interface: 1 ... 31 (1A ... 31B)
AS-Interface
Pin
ASi-
3 3RK2 200- ...
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AA6
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB0
3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5
3RK2 400- ...
1 ASi+ ASi+
2 not conn. AUX-
4 not conn. AUX+
3 ASi- ASi-
ASi-
3
ASi+
14
ASi+
1
3 2
4 1
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/17Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
For simple connection of the K20 modules to the AS-Interface
flat cable there is a new series of AS-Interface distribution
boards and M12 feeders:
AS-Interface distribution boards
Like the AS-Interface 3RK1 901-1NN00 standard distribution
board, the new AS-Interface 3RK1 901-1NN10 compact
distribution board enables distribution of the AS-Interface flat
cable to several lines. The compact distribution board can be
used for a current carrying capacity of up to 6 A. It is character-
ized by particularly simple handling:
• insert the cable,
• swing closed and
• screw down with only one captive screw.
No additional seals are required for the compact distribution
board. The AS-Interface flat cable must always be passed
through the compact distribution board, i.e. it must never be
terminated inside the compact distribution board. For higher
currents and for cases where one of the two flat cables is to be
terminated inside the distribution board, the standard distribu-
tion board must be used.
AS-Interface M12 feeders
AS-Interface M12 feeders are available in the same design as
the compact distribution boards. They are required for transfer-
ring from the AS-Interface flat cable to a round cable. The
spectrum covers AS-Interface M12 feeders with different cable
lengths (1 and 2 m) and differentiates between M12 feeders for
AS-i/Uaux for connection of I/O modules and AS-Interface
without Uaux for connection of modules with inputs. These
AS-Interface M12 feeders are just as easy to handle as the
AS-Interface compact distributor. The flat cable must
always be passed through the M12 distribution board, i.e. it must
never be terminated inside the M12 distribution board. For the
event that the AS-Interface flat cable is to be terminated in the
M12 feeder, the standard M12 feeder (3RX9 801-0AA00) or the
quadruple M12 (feeder 3RK1 901-1NR00) are available.
The different possibilities of connecting the K20 modules to the
AS-Interface bus line and the 24 V DC auxiliary voltage are
presented in the following table:
To connect the feeder and the K20 module over a cable length
> 2 m it is also possible to use freely configurable cables with an
M12 cable box and an open cable end, which are fitted with an
M12 plug (straight version: 3RX8 000-0CD45, 3RX8 000-0CE45
angle plug ) and connected to the feeder.
This cable is available in two versions:
• 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable box
• 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable box
To connect more than one K20 modules to one spur line, the spur
line can be split again using a T distributor (3RK1 901-1TR00).
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
AS-i without Uaux AS-i / Uaux
4DI, M8
3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3
2DI/2DO, M8
3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3
4DI, M12
3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3
2DI/2DO, M12
3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3
2FDI, M12
3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3
4DI/4DO, M8
3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3
K20 module
• plus M12 feeder with integrally extruded cable
M12 feeder:
3RK1 901-1NR11 (1 m) or
3RK1 901-1NR12 (2 m)
M12 feeder:
3RK1 901-1NR21 (1 m) or
3RK1 901-1NR22 (2 m)
K20 module
• plus M12 feeder with socket
• plus separate M12 cable
M12 feeder:
3RX9 801-0AA00
M12 feeder:
3RG7 838-1DG
M12 cable:
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)
M12 cable:
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)
K20 module
• plus quadruple M12 feeder
• plus separate M12 cable
M12 feeder:
3RK1 901-1NR00
M12 feeder:
3RK1 901-1NR00
M12 cable:
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)
M12 cable:
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m)
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m)
NSA0_00445
NSA0_00446
NSA0_00447
NSA0_00448
NSA0_00449
NSA0_00450
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/18 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
Options for connection of the K20 modules to other AS-Interface modules
Please note the following boundary conditions:
• The configuration guidelines for AS-Interface generally apply.
For all M12 connecting cables the maximum permissible
current is limited to 4 A. The cross-section of these cables
amounts to just 0.34 mm². For connection of the K20 modules
the previously mentioned M12 connecting cables can be used
for the spur lines. The voltage drop caused by the ohmic re-
sistance (approx. 0.11 Ω/m) must be taken into account.
• For round cable connections with joint routing of AS-i and Uaux
in one line the following maximum lengths apply:
- Yes, spur line from feeder to module: maximum 5 m
- Sum of all round cable pieces in one AS-Interface network:
maximum 20 m
Mounting examples for K20 modules
NSA0_00444a
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0
3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5
3RG9 001-0AD00
3RK1 901-1NR11
3RK1 901-1NR12
3RK1 901-1NR21
3RK1 901-1NR22
3RX9 801-0AA00
3RK1 901-1TR00
l 5 m<
l 5 m<
l 1,5 m<
l 1,5 m<
NSA0_00451
Connection using 4-fold M12 feeder
(3RK1 901-1NR00)
(AS-i/ )
for I/O modules
Uaux
Connection using M12 feeder
(3RK1 901-1NR2.)
(AS-i/ )
for I/O modules
Further distribution
using M12 T feeder
(3RK1 901-1TR00)
Connection using M12 feeder
(3RK1 901-1NR1.)
(AS-i without )
for modules with inputs
Uaux Uaux
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/19Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Technical specifications
Digital I/O module IP67 – K20
4 inputs 4 inputs 2 inputs/ 2 outputs
M8 M12 M8
3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3
Slave type A/B slave A/B slave A/B slave
Operational voltage acc. to
AS-Interface Specification in V
26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6
Total current input in mA ≤ 270 ≤ 270 ≤ 270
Input circuit PNP PNP PNP
Inputs
• Sensor supply using AS-Interface Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant
• Sensors 2- and 3-wire 2- and 3-wire 2- and 3-wire
• Voltage range in V 16.5... 30 16.5 ... 30 16.5 ... 30
• Current carrying capacity for all inputs
(Tu ≤ 40 °C) in mA
200 200 150
• Current carrying capacity for all inputs
(Tu ≤ 55 °C) in mA
150 150 70
• Switching level High in V ≥ 10 ≥ 10 ≥ 10
• Input current Low/High in mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6
• Socket assignment of inputs
- PIN 1 Sensor supply L+ Sensor supply L+ Sensor supply L+
- PIN 2 -- Data input 2 --
- PIN 3 Sensor supply L- Sensor supply L- Sensor supply L-
- PIN 4 Data input Data input 1 Data input
- PIN 5 -- Not assigned --
Outputs
• Type of output -- -- Solid-state
• Current carrying capacity in A per
output DC 12 /13 typical
-- -- 1
• Maximum aggregate current per
module in A
-- -- 1
• Socket assignment of outputs -- -- 3 = "-"
4 = output
• Short-circuit protection -- -- Built-in
• Induction protection -- -- Built-in
• External power supply 24 V DC -- -- Shared round cable connection with
AS-Interface connection through M12
female connector
• Watchdog -- -- Built-in
I/O configuration 0 0 B
ID/ID2 code A/0 A/2 A/0
Assignment of data bits
• Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1 (D0)
PIN2 = IN2 (D1)
PIN4 = IN3(D2)
• Socket 2 PIN4 = IN2 (D1) PIN4 = IN3 (D2)
PIN2 = IN4 (D3)
PIN4 = IN4 (D3)
• Socket 3 PIN4 = IN3(D2) n/a PIN4 = OUT1(D0)
• Socket 4 PIN4 = IN4 (D3) n/a PIN4 = OUT2 (D1)
• Socket 5 n/a n/a n/a
• Socket 6 n/a n/a n/a
• Socket 7 n/a n/a n/a
• Socket 8 n/a n/a n/a
AS-Interface certificate Yes Yes Yes
Approvals submitted for UL/CSA approval submitted for UL/CSA approval submitted for UL/CSA approval
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/20 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
Digital I/O module IP67 – K20
4 inputs 4 inputs 2 inputs/ 2 outputs
M8 M12 M8
3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3
Degree of protection IP65/67 IP65/67 IP65/67
Ground terminal n/a n/a n/a
Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70
Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85
Number of I/O sockets 4 2 4
Status displays
• Display of I/Os Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED
• Display of Uaux Not required Not required Green LED
• Display of AS-Interface/diagnostics Green/red LED Green/red LED Green/red LED
Note -- -- An external additional supply (AUX
POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required
for the supply of the output circuits.
The additional supply must comply
with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection
class III.
Digital I/O module IP67 – K20
2 inputs/ 2 outputs 4 inputs/ 4 outputs 2 inputs, safe
M12 M8 M12
3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3
Slave type A/B slave A/B Slave (Specification 3.0) Standard slave
Operational voltage acc. to
AS-Interface Specification in V
26,5 ... 31,6 26,5 ... 31,6 26,5 ... 31,6
Total current input in mA ≤ 270 ≤ 270 ≤ 45
Input circuit PNP PNP for mechanical switching contacts
Inputs
• Sensor supply using AS-Interface Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant not applicable
• Sensors 2- and 3-wire 2- and 3-wire Mechanical switching contact
• Voltage range in V 16,5 ... 30 16,5 ... 30 not applicable
• Current carrying capacity for all inputs
(Tu ≤ 40 °C) in mA
150 200 not applicable
• Current carrying capacity for all inputs
(Tu ≤ 55 °C) in mA
70 150 not applicable
• Switching level High in V ≥ 10 ≥ 10 not applicable
• Input current Low/High in mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 -- / Ipeak ≥ 5
• Socket assignment of inputs PIN 1 = sensor supply L+
PIN 2 = data input II
PIN 3 = sensor supply L-
PIN 4 = data input I
PIN 5 = not assigned
PIN 1 = sensor supply L+
PIN 3 = sensor supply L-
PIN 4 = data input
PIN 1/2 = F-IN1
PIN 3/4 = F-IN2
PIN 5 = not assigned
Outputs
• Type of output Solid-state Solid-state --
• Current carrying capacity in A per
output DC 12 /13 typical
1 1 --
• Maximum aggregate current per
module in A
1 2 at T = 40 °C --
• Socket assignment of outputs 2 = output 2
3 = "-"
4 = output 1
3 = "-"
4 = output
--
• Short-circuit protection Built-in Built-in --
• Induction protection Built-in Built-in --
• External power supply 24 V DC Shared round cable connection with
AS-Interface connection through M12
female connector
Shared round cable connection with
AS-Interface connection through M12
female connector
--
• Watchdog Built-in Built-in --
I/O configuration B 7 0
ID/ID2 code A/2 A/7 B/0
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/21Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
Digital I/O module IP67 – K20
2 inputs/ 2 outputs 4 inputs/ 4 outputs 2 inputs, safe
M12 M8 M12
3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3
Assignment of data bits
• Socket 1 PIN4 = IN3 (D2)
PIN2 = IN4 (D3)
PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN 1/2 = F-IN1
PIN 3/4 = F-IN2
PIN 5 = not assigned
• Socket 2 PIN4 = OUT1 (D0)
PIN2 = OUT2 (D1)
PIN4 = IN2 (D1) PIN 1/2 = F-IN2
PIN 3/4 = not assigned
PIN 5 = not assigned
• Socket 3 n/a PIN4 = IN3(D2) n/a
• Socket 4 n/a PIN4 = IN4 (D3) n/a
• Socket 5 n/a PIN4 = OUT1(D0) n/a
• Socket 6 n/a PIN4 = OUT2 (D1) n/a
• Socket 7 n/a PIN4 = OUT3 (D2) n/a
• Socket 8 n/a PIN4 = OUT4 (D3) n/a
AS-Interface certificate Yes Under application Yes
Approvals submitted for UL/CSA approval submitted for UL/CSA approval submitted for UL/CSA approval
Degree of protection IP65/67 IP65/67 IP65/67
Ground terminal n/a n/a n/a
Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70
Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85
Number of I/O sockets 4 8 4
Status displays
• Display of I/Os Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED
• Display of Uaux Green LED Green LED Not required
• Display of AS-Interface/diagnostics Green/red LED Green/red LED Green/red LED
Note 1 An external additional supply (AUX
POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required
for the supply of the output circuits.
The additional supply must comply
with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection
class III.
An external additional supply (AUX
POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required
for the supply of the output circuits.
The additional supply must comply
with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection
class III.
Note 2 A master acc. to AS-Interface
Specification 3.0 is required for this
module
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/22 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
AS-Interface M12 feeder
AS-i flat cable AS-i / Uaux flat cable
to M12 cable box to M12 cable box to quadruple M12 socket
1 m 2 m 1 m 2 m --
3RK1 901-1NR11 3RK1 901-1NR12 3RK1 901-1NR21 3RK1 901-1NR22 3RK1 901-1NR00
Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 DC
Total current carrying
capacity in A
6 4
Socket assignment 1 = AS-i "+"
2 = not assigned
3 = AS-i "–"
4 = not assigned
1 = AS-i "+"
2 = Uaux "-"
3 = AS-i "–"
4 = Uaux "+"
Degree of protection IP67 / IP68 / IP69K IP67
Ambient temperature
in °C
–25 ... +85
Storage temperature
in °C
–40 ... +85
Note Flat cable can be termi-
nated inside the feeder
Connection through FKE coupling
module (included in the
scope of supply)
M12-T distributor
3RK1 901–1TR00
Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 DC
Current carrying capacity
total in A
4 at T = 40 °C
Connection M12
Degree of protection IP68
Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +85
Storage temperature in °C -25 ... +85
Number of M12 sockets 1 × M12 connector / 2 × M12 box
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/23Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Dimensional drawings
K20 module, four inputs, M8 (3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3)
K20 module, two inputs / two outputs,
M8 (3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3)
K20 module, four inputs, M12 (3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3)
K20 module, two inputs / two outputs,
M12 (3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3)
K20 module, two safe inputs, M12 (3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3)
K20 module, four inputs / four outputs, M8 (3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3)
AS-Interface standard distributor, for AS-Interface flat cable
(3RK1 901-1NN00)
AS-Interface compact distributor, for AS-Interface flat cable
(3RK1 901-1NN10)
AS-Interface M12 feeder, AS-i / Uaux, M12 cable box, 1 m cable length
(3RK1 901-1NR21)
M12-T distributor (3RK1 901-1TR00)
20 20
38
45
NSA0_00437a
100
108
Ø 4,6
20 20
38
45
NSA0_00438a
100
108
Ø 4,6
20 20
38
45
155
164
NSA0_00439a
Ø 4,6
31
NSA00308
45
667
80
21
33
ø5,2
ø5,2
ø5,1
NSA0_00452
2619
5
20
35
40
NSA0_00440
2619
5
20
351000
M12
40
M12x1
M12x1
M12x1
56
45
17
NSA0_00340
1
2
3
4
3
4
1
2
1 2 3 4
Male
cable
plug
Fem.
cable
plug
Cover ring
Wiring diagram
4-pole
AS-Interface
Slaves
Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20
2/24 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Schematics
Inputs
Terminal assignment for input, M8 socket, standard assignment
Terminal assignment for input, M12 socket, Y assignment
Terminal assignment for safe input, M12 socket, Y-II assignment
Outputs
Terminal assignment for output, M8 socket, standard assignment
Terminal assignment for out put, M12 socket, Y assignment
1
3 4
NSA0_00196a
Pin 1: Supply L+
Pin 4: Supply L–
Pin 4: Input signal
NSA0_00008d
1 2
4 3
5
Pin 1: Supply L+
Pin 2: Input signal 2
Pin 3: Supply L–
Pin 4: Input signal 1
Pin 5: Earth connection
1 3
4
2
NSA0_00442a
Socket Assignment / data sheets / function
1 Pin 1 and Pin 2: Influences the bits D0 and D1 = Channel 1
Pin 3 and Pin 4: Influences the bits D2 and D3 = Channel 2
Pin 5 not assigned
2 Pin 1 and Pin 2: Influences the bits D2 and D3 = Channel 2
Pin 3, Pin 4 and Pin 5 not assigned
Socket 1
Socket 2
1
3 4
NSA0_00441b
Pin 1: Supply L+
Pin 4: Supply L–
Pin 4: Input signal
1 2
4 3
5
NSA0_00009b
Pin 1:
Pin 2: Output signal 2
Pin 3: Supply L–
Pin 4: Output signal 1
Pin 5: Earth connection
AS-Interface
Slaves
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
2/25Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Function
Data transfer according to Analog Profile 7.3/7.4
With Analog Profile 7.3/7.4 at least seven AS-Interface cycles
must be passed through before transmission is completed. This
requires the use of a master according to Extended
Specification V2.1.
With input modules the complete analog value is then available
in the AS-Interface master. Preprocessing is thus performed in
the master.
With the next system function call the user program brings the
analog value as one value into the user program. Hence the
analog value is very quickly updated.
The analog value transmission allies in reverse order for the
output modules as well.
In total this results in the following maximum times before the
analog value with Profile 7.3/7.4 (with presetting: smoothing
function deactivated; line filter 50 Hz) is available:
Data transfer according to Analog Profile 7.A.9
With Analog Profile 7.A.9 only three or four AS-Interface cycles
are required for the transmission. This requires the use of a
master according to Extended Specification 3.0.
The maximum times before the analog value with Profile 7.A.9 is
available are presented in detail in the manual according to the
mode selected (resolution, number of channels,
A/B technology).
G_NSA0_XX_00181
Analog module
One User program
cycle with
system
function call Conversion
Analog valueCPU
Seven
AS-Interface
cycles
(max. 5 ms each)
Note: Values can be accesses with SFC58, SFC59
integrated standard function blocks
AS-Interface
Master
1 channel 2 channels 4 channels
Conversion and transmission time max. 95 ms max. 235 ms max. 435 ms
G_NSA0_XX_00436Analog module
One User program
cycle with
system
function call Conversion
Analog valueCPU
Seven
AS-Interface
cycles
(max. 5 ms each)
Note: Values can be accesses with SFC58, SFC59
integrated standard function blocks
AS-Interface
Master
AS-Interface
Slaves
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
2/26 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
■Technical specifications
■Schematics
Pin assignment for input module
Current input for 4-wire sensor
Current input for 2-wire sensor
Voltage input for 4-wire sensor
Thermal resistor for 4-wire sensor
Thermal resistor for 2-wire sensor
Thermal resistor for 3-wire sensor
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
Analog Profile 7.3 Analog Profile 7.A.9
Slave type Analog slave A/B analog slave (Spec. 3.0)
Profile 7.3 D/E 7.A.9
Number format S7 S7
Operational voltage acc. to AS-Interface Specification in V 26,5 ... 31,6 26,5 ... 31,6
Total current input of the module including connection of
sensors / actuators in mA
150 150
Current transfer with connection of two/four sensors in mA
(without Uaux infeed)
max. 46 / max. 46 max. 46
Additional supply of sensors through Uaux in V 24 up to 30 24 up to 30
Current transfer from Uaux with connection of two/four sensors in mA max. 500 / max. 500 max. 500
Current transfer with connection of two current / voltage actuators in mA max. 30 / max. 24 --
I/O configuration 7 7
ID Code 3 A
ID-2 Code D/E 9
Certification UL, CSA, shipbuilding UL, CSA, shipbuilding available soon
Degree of protection IP67 (with inserted cables) IP67 (with inserted cables)
Ambient temperature in °C -20 ... +60 -20 ... +60
Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85
Display of AUX PWR (Uaux) Green LED Green LED
Display of AS-i Green LED Green LED
Display of FAULT Red LED Red LED
Connection Using mounting plate for K60 compact
module
Using mounting plate for K60 compact
module
NSA0_00013b
1 2
4 3
5
Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V)
Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3: Supply M (ground)
Pin 4: IN-
Pin 5: Cable shield
/ FG (functional ground)
All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
NSA0_00014c
1 2
4 3
5
Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V)
Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3: Supply M (ground)
Pin 4: IN-
Pin 5: Cable shield /
FG (functional ground)
All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
Bridge from to M(3)
can be set intenally via
parameterisation
n–
NSA0_00017b
1 2
4 3
5
Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V)
Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3: Supply M (ground)
Pin 4: IN-
Pin 5: Cable shield /
FG (functional ground)
All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
NSA0_00018b
1 2
4 3
5 Pt 100
I
I
Pin 1:
Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3:
Pin 4: IN-
Pin 5: Cable shield
All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
const+
const–
NSA0_00015c
1 2
4 3
5 Pt 100
I
I
Pin 1:
Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3:
Pin 4: IN-
Pin 5: Cable shield
All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
const+
const–
NSA0_00019c
1 2
4 3
5 Pt 100
const+
const–
Pin 1:
Pin 2: IN+
Pin 3:
Pin 4: IN-
Pin 5: Cable shield
All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
AS-Interface
Slaves
Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60
2/27Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
Pin assignment for output module
Current output
Voltage output
Connection of the 2-channel input modules for
single-channel use
The 3RK1 901-1AA00 input bridge can also be used for this
purpose.
NSA0_00016a
1 2
4 3
5
Pin 5: Cable shield
All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
NSA0_00020a
1 2
4 3
5
Pin 5: Cable shield
All pin assignments are shown without
external sensor supply.
NSA0_00409
1 2
5
AS-Interface
Notes
2/28 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
2
Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4/2 Introduction
Solid-State Switching Devices
4/3 General data
Solid-State Relays
4/6 3RF22 solid-state relays,
3-phase, 45 mm
Solid-State Contactors
4/7 3RF24 solid-state contactors,
3-phase
3RF29 Function Modules
4/9 Power control regulators
Solid-State Switching Devices
4/10 General data
Solid-State Relays
4/11 3RF22 solid-state relays,
3-phase, 45 mm
Solid-State Contactors
4/16 3RF24 solid-state contactors,
3-phase
3RF29 Function Modules
4/24 General data
4/25 Power control regulators
Controls –
Solid-State
Switching Devices
Catalog
Technical Information
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Introduction
4/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
■Overview
3RF21 3RF20 3RF22 3RF23 3RF24 3RF29
Order No. Page
SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices
Solid-state relays
22.5 mm solid-state relays
45 mm solid-state relays
• Widths of 22.5 mm and 45 mm
• Compact and space-saving design
• "Zero-point switching" version
• Mounting onto existing heat sinks
3RF21,
3RF20
3RF22
Catalog LV 1
4/6
Solid-state contactors
Solid-state contactors • Complete units comprising a solid-state relay and an optimized heat sink,
"ready to use"
• Compact and space-saving design
• Versions for resistive loads "zero-point switching" and inductive loads
"instantaneous switching"
• Special designs "Low Noise" and "Short-Circuit Resistant"
3RF23
3RF24
Catalog LV 1
4/7
Function modules For extending the functionality of the 3RF21 solid-state relays and the 3RF23
solid-state contactors for many different applications:
Converter • For converting an analog input signal into an on/off ratio; can also be used
on 3RF22 and 3RF24 3-phase switching devices
3RF29 00-0EA18 Catalog LV 1
Load monitoring • For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads) 3RF29 20-0FA08,
3RF29 .0-0GA..
Catalog LV 1
Heating current monitoring • For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads) 3RF29 ..-0JA.. Catalog LV 1
Power control regulator • For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching device
depending on a setpoint value.
There is a choice of full-wave control and generalized phase control.
3RF29 .0-0KA.. 4/9
Power controller • For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching device
depending on a setpoint value.
Closed-loop control: Full wave control or generalized phase control.
3RF29 .0-0HA.. Catalog LV 1
Solid-State Switching Devices
General data
4/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■Overview
SIRIUS solid-state switching devices
• Solid-state relays
• Solid-state contactors
• Function modules
SIRIUS – for almost unending activity
Conventional electromechanical switching devices are often
overtaxed by the rise in the number of switching operations. A
high switching frequency results in frequent failure and short re-
placement
cycles. However, this does not have to be the case, because
with the latest generation of our SIRIUS solid-state switching de-
vices we provide you with solid-state relays and contactors with
a particularly long service life – for almost unending activity even
under the toughest conditions and under high mechanical load,
but also in noise-sensitive areas.
Proved time and again in service
SIRIUS solid-state switching devices have become firmly estab-
lished in industrial use. They are used above all in applications
where loads are switched frequently – mainly with resistive load
controllers, with the control of electrical heat or the control of
valves and motors in conveyor systems. In addition to its use in
areas with high switching frequencies, thanks to its silent
switching SIRIUS is also ideally suited to noise-sensitive areas
such as offices or hospitals.
The most reliable solution for any application
Compared with mechanical switching devices, our SIRIUS solid-
state switching devices stand out because of their considerably
longer service life. Thanks to the high product quality, their
switching is extremely precise, reliable and above all insuscep-
tible to faults. With its variable connection methods and a wide
spread of control voltages, the SIRIUS family is universally appli-
cable. Depending on the individual requirements of the applica-
tion, our modular switching devices can also be quite easily
expanded by the addition of standardized function modules.
Always on the sunny side with SIRIUS
Because SIRIUS offers even more:
• The space-saving and compact side-by-side mounting
ensures reliable operation up to an ambient temperature of
+60 °C.
• Thanks to fast configuration and the ease of installation and
start-up, you save not only time but also expenses.
Solid-State Switching Devices
General data
4/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
Type Solid-state relays Solid-state contactors Function modules
1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase Converter Load monitoring Heating
current
monitoring
Power
control
regulator
Circuit-
breaker22.5 mm 45 mm 45 mm Basic Extended
Usage
Simple use of exist-
ing solid-state relays
❑ ✓ ❑ ❑ ❑ -- -- -- -- -- --
Complete device
"Ready to use"
❑ ❑ ❑ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- --
Space-saving ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- --
Can be extended
with modular
function modules
✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- --
Frequent switching
and monitoring of
loads and solid-state
relays/solid-state
contactors
-- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Monitoring of up to
6 partial loads
-- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- ✓ -- --
Monitoring of more
than 6 partial loads
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- -- --
Control of the heat-
ing power through
an analog input
-- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- -- -- ✓ ✓
Power control -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓
Startup
Easy setting of
setpoints with
"Teach" button
-- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓
"Remote Teach"
input for setting
setpoints
-- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- --
Mounting
Mounting onto
mounting rails or
mounting plates
-- -- -- ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- --
Can be snapped
directly onto a
solid-state relay or
contactor
-- -- -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
For use with "Cool-
plate" heat sink
✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
Cable routing
Connection of load
circuit as for controls
✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Connection of load
circuit from above
-- ✓ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- --
✓ Function is available
❑ Function is possible
Solid-State Switching Devices
General data
4/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■Application
Solid-state relays
SIRIUS solid-state relays are suitable for surface mounting on
existing cooling surfaces. Installation is quick and easy,
involving just two screws. The special technology of the power
semiconductor ensures there is excellent thermal contact with
the heat sink. Depending on the nature of the heat sink, the
capacity reaches up to 88 A on resistive loads.
The solid-state relays are available in three different versions:
• 3RF21 single-phase solid-state relay with a width of 22.5 mm
• 3RF20 single-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm
• 3RF22 three-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm
The 3RF21 and 3RF22 solid-state relays can be expanded with
various function modules to adapt them to individual applica-
tions.
Solid-state contactors
The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized
heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined
rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depend-
ing on the version, current intensities of up to 88 A are achieved.
Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their parti-
cular advantages is their compact and space-saving design.
With their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped
onto a standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on carrier
plates with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be
used in circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety
extra-low voltage (SELV) in building engineering. For other appli-
cations, such as for extended personal safety, the heat sink can
be grounded through a screw terminal.
The solid-state contactors are available in two different versions:
• 3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors
• 3RF24 single-phase solid-state contactors
The 3RF20 and 3RF21 single-phase solid-state relays and the
3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors are described in
Catalog LV 1 · 2006.
■Design
3RF22 three-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm
With its compact design, which stays the same even at currents
of up to 55 A, the 3RF22 solid-state relay is the ultimate in space-
saving construction, at a width of 45 mm. Installation on cooling
surfaces is quick and easy, involving just two screws. The logical
connection arrangement, with the power infeed from above and
connection of the load from below, ensures tidy installation in the
control cabinet.
3RF24 three-phase solid-state contactors
The compact design enables small compact units with currents
up to 50 A. All special features of the solid-state relays for saving
time and space are effective here too.
■Function
Two-phase controlled version
In many three-phase applications there is no need of a three-
phase controller. Loads in a delta circuit or wye circuit, which
have no connection to the neutral conductor, can be safely
switched on and off using only two phases.
Nevertheless, the 3RF22 and 3RF24 three-phase solid-state
switching devices provide the possibility of connecting all three
phases to the switching device, with the middle phase looped
directly through the device. Thanks to the lower power loss
compared to a three-phase controlled device it is possible for
the mounted accessories to be more compact.
Three-phase controlled version
This version is used in three-phase applications which have to
switch all phases on and off for system reasons or in the case of
loads in a wye circuit with connection to the neutral conductor.
Version for resistive loads, "zero-point switching"
This standard version is often used for switching space heaters
on and off.
Solid-State Relays
3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm
4/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
■Selection and ordering data
Selecting solid-state relays
When selecting solid-state relays, in addition to information
about the power system, the load and the ambient conditions it
is also necessary to know details of the planned design. The
solid-state relays can only conform to their specific technical
specifications if they are mounted with appropriate care on an
adequately dimensioned heat sink. The following procedure is
recommended:
• Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage
• Select the relay design and choose a solid-state relay with
higher rated current than the load
• Determine the thermal resistance of the proposed heat sink
• Check the correct relay size with the aid of the diagrams.
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the
solid-state relay.
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller
depending on the connection method and cooling conditions.
2) Please note that the version with an M4 screw terminal can only be used
for a rated current of up to approx. 50 A and a conductor cross-section of
10 mm2
.
3) Please note that this version can only be used for a rated current of up to
approx. 20 A and a conductor cross-section of 2.5 mm2.
Type current1) Rated control supply
voltage
DT Screw terminal2) PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No. Price
per PUA V kg
Zero-point switching
Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V
3RF22 30-1AB45
Two-phase controlled
30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
55 B 3RF22 55-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
Three-phase controlled
30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
55 B 3RF22 55-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
Type current1)
Rated control supply
voltage
DT Spring-loaded terminals3)
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No. Price
per PUA V kg
Zero-point switching
Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V
3RF22 30-2AB45
Two-phase controlled
30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-2AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
55 B 3RF22 55-2AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
Three-phase controlled
30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-2AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
55 B 3RF22 55-2AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
Type current1)
Rated control supply
voltage
DT Ring terminal end connection PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No. Price
per PUA V kg
Zero-point switching
Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V
3RF22 30-3AB45
Two-phase controlled
30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-3AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
55 B 3RF22 55-3AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
Three-phase controlled
30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-3AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
55 B 3RF22 55-3AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/7Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■Selection and ordering data
Selecting solid-state contactors
The solid-state contactors are selected on the basis of details of
the power system, the load and the ambient conditions. As the
solid-state contactors are already equipped with an optimally
matched heat sink, the selection process is considerably
simpler than that for solid-state relays.
The following procedure is recommended:
• Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage
• Select a solid-state contactor with the same or higher rated
current than the load
• Check the correct contactor size with the aid of the rated
current diagram, taking account of the design conditions
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the
solid-state relay.
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller
depending on the connection method and cooling conditions.
Type current1)
Imax
Rated control supply
voltage
DT Screw terminal PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No. Price
per PUA V kg
Zero-point switching
Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V
Two-phase controlled
3RF24 20-1AB45
10.5 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 10-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.400
30 B 3RF24 30-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.540
40 B 3RF24 40-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.800
50 B 3RF24 50-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 1.100
10.5 230 V AC B 3RF24 10-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.400
30 B 3RF24 30-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.540
40 B 3RF24 40-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.800
50 B 3RF24 50-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 1.100
Three-phase controlled
3RF24 10-1AC45
10.5 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 10-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.540
30 B 3RF24 30-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.800
40 B 3RF24 40-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 1.100
50 B 3RF24 50-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 1.850
10.5 230 V AC B 3RF24 10-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.540
30 B 3RF24 30-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.800
40 B 3RF24 40-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 1.100
50 B 3RF24 50-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 1.850
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/8 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the
solid-state relay.
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller
depending on the connection method and cooling conditions.
Type current1)
Imax
Rated control supply
voltage
DT Spring-loaded terminals PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No. Price
per PUA V kg
Zero-point switching
Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V
3RF24 10-2AB45
Two-phase controlled
10 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 10-2AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-2AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.400
10 230 V AC B 3RF24 10-2AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-2AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.400
Three-phase controlled
10 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 10-2AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-2AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.540
10 230 V AC B 3RF24 10-2AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.320
20 B 3RF24 20-2AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.540
Type current1)
Imax
Rated control supply
voltage
DT Ring terminal end connection PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Order No. Price
per PUA V kg
Zero-point switching
Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V
3RF24 50-3AB45
Two-phase controlled
50 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 50-3AB45 1 1 unit 101 1.100
50 230 V AC B 3RF24 50-3AB55 1 1 unit 101 1.100
Three-phase controlled
50 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 50-3AC45 1 1 unit 101 1.850
50 230 V AC B 3RF24 50-3AC55 1 1 unit 101 1.850
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
3RF29 Function Modules
Power control regulators
4/9Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■Overview
Function modules for SIRIUS solid-state switching devices
A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of
functionality. With our function modules, these requirements can
be met really easily. The modules are mounted simply by
clicking them into place; straight away the necessary connec-
tions are made with the solid-state relay or contactor. The plug-in
connection to control the solid-state switching devices can
simply remain in use.
All three-phase solid-state switching devices in the version with
a control supply voltage of 4 to 30 V DC can be supplemented
with the 3RF29 00-0EA18 converter.
Details of the converter can be found in the Catalog LV1 · 2006.
Power control regulators for single-phase solid-state
devices
The following functions have been integrated:
• Power control regulator for adjusting the power of the con-
nected load. Here, the setpoint is set with a rotary knob on the
module as a percentage with reference to the 100 % power
stored as a setpoint.
• Inrush current limitation: With the aid of an adjustable
voltage ramp, the inrush current is limited by means of phase
control. This is useful above all with loads such as lamps or
infrared lamps which have an inrush transient current.
• Load circuit monitoring for detecting load failure, partial load
faults, alloyed power semiconductors, lack of voltage or a
break in the load circuit.
■Application
The power control regulator adjusts the current in the connected
load by means of a solid-state switching device depending on a
setpoint. The setpoint can be predefined externally as a 0 to
10 V signal or internally by means of a potentiometer. Depending
on the setting of the potentiometer (tR), the control is carried out
according to the principle of full-wave control or generalized
phase control.
Full-wave control
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required
setpoint by changing the on-to-off period. The period duration is
predefined at one second.
Generalized phase control
In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required
setpoint by changing the current flow angle. In order to observe
the limit values of the conducted interference voltage for indus-
trial networks, a choke rated at at least 200 µH must be included
in the load circuit.
Special versions 3RF29 04
The 3RF29 04 versions are not equipped with the partial load
monitoring function. The 3RF29 04-0KC0 version is pro-
grammed in addition for no current to flow in the solid-state
switching device during the teach routine.
■Selection and ordering data
Rated operational
current Ie
Rated operational
voltage Ue
DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
A V kg
Power control regulators
Rated control supply voltage 24 V AC/DC
4 110 … 230 A 3RF29 04-0KA13-0KC0 1 1 unit 101 0.175
4 A 3RF29 04-0KA13-0KT0 1 1 unit 101 0.175
20 A 3RF29 20-0KA13 1 1 unit 101 0.175
20 400 … 600 A 3RF29 20-0KA16 1 1 unit 101 0.175
50 A 3RF29 50-0KA16 1 1 unit 101 0.175
90 A 3RF29 90-0KA16 1 1 unit 101 0.175
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Switching Devices
General data
4/10 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
■Design
There is no typical design of a load feeder with solid-state relays
or solid-state contactors; instead, the great variety of connection
systems and control voltages offers universal application oppor-
tunities. SIRIUS solid-state relays and solid-state contactors can
be installed in fuseless or fused feeders, as required. There are
special versions with which it is even possible to achieve
short-circuit strength in a fuseless design.
■Function
Connection technique
All SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are characterized by
the great variety of connection methods. You can choose be-
tween the following connection techniques:
Screw terminal system
The screw connection system is the standard among industrial
controls. Open terminals and a plus-minus screw are just two
features of this technology. Two conductors of up to 6 mm² can
be connected in just one terminal. As a result, loads of up to 50 A
can be connected.
Spring-loaded connection system
This innovative technology manages without any screw connec-
tion. This means that very high vibration resistance is achieved.
Two conductors of up to 2.5 mm² can be connected to each
terminal. As a result, loads of up to 20 A can be dealt with.
Ring terminal end connection
The ring terminal end connection is equipped with an M5 screw.
Ring terminal ends of up to 25 mm² can be connected. In this
way it is possible to connect even high powers with current
intensities of up to 90 A safely. Finger-safety is provided in this
case too with a special cover.
Switching functions
In order to guarantee an optimized control method for different
loads, the functionality of our solid-state switching devices can
be adapted accordingly.
The "zero-point switching" method has proved to be ideal for
resistive loads, i.e. where the power semiconductor is activated
at zero voltage.
For inductive loads, on the other hand, for example in the case
of valves, it is better to go with "instantaneous switching". By
distributing the ON point over the entire sine curve of the mains
voltage, disturbances are reduced to a minimum.
Performance characteristics
The performance of the solid-state switching devices is substan-
tially determined by the type of power semiconductors used and
the internal design. In the case of the SIRIUS solid-state contac-
tors and solid-state relays, only thyristors are used in place of
less powerful Triacs.
Two of the most important features of thyristors are the blocking
voltage and the maximum load integral:
Blocking voltage
Thyristors with a high blocking voltage can also be operated
without difficulty in power systems with high interference
voltages. Separate protective measures, such as a protective
circuit with a varistor, are not necessary in most cases.
With SIRIUS solid-state switching devices, for example, thyris-
tors with 800 V blocking voltage are fitted for operation in power
systems up to 230 V. Thyristors with up to 1600 V are used for
power systems with higher voltages.
Maximum load integral
One of the purposes of specifying the maximum load integral
(I²t) is to determine the rating of the short-circuit protection. Only
a large power semiconductor with a correspondingly high I²t
value can be given appropriate protection against destruction
from a short-circuit by means of a protective device matched to
the application. However, SIRIUS solid-state switching devices
are also characterized by the optimum matching of the thyristors
(I²t value) with the rated currents. The rated currents specified on
the devices according to EN 60947-4-3 were confirmed by
extensive testing.
You can find more information on the Internet at:
http://www.siemens.com/siriussc
■Integration
Notes on integration in the load feeders
The SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are very easy to inte-
grate into the load feeders thanks to their industrial connection
technology and design.
Particular attention must however be paid to the circumstances
of the installation and ambient conditions, as the performance of
the solid-state switching devices is largely dependent on these.
Depending on the version, certain restrictions must be
observed. Detailed information, for example in relation to solid-
state contactors about the minimum spacing and to solid-state
relays about the choice of heat sink, is given in the product data
sheets and the technical specifications in the A&D Mall.
Despite the rugged power semiconductors that are used,
solid-state switching devices respond more sensitively to
short-circuits in the load feeder. Consequently, special precau-
tions have to be taken against destruction, depending on the
type of design.
Siemens generally recommends using SITOR solid-state protec-
tion fuses. These fuses also provide protection against destruc-
tion in the event of a short-circuit even when the solid-state
contactors and solid-state relays are fully utilized.
Alternatively, if there is lower loading, protection can also be
provided by standard fuses or miniature circuit-breakers. This
protection is achieved by overdimensioning the solid-state
switching devices accordingly. The technical specifications in
the A&D Mall and the product data sheets contain details both
about the solid-state fuse protection itself and about use of the
SIRIUS devices with conventional protection equipment.
The SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are suitable for inter-
ference-free operation in industrial power systems without
further measures. If they are used in public power systems, it
may be necessary for conducted interference to be reduced by
means of filters. This does not include the special solid-state
contactors of type 3RF23..-.CA.. "Low Noise". These comply with
the class B limit values up to a rated current of 16 A. If other
versions are used, and at currents of over 16 A, standard filters
can be used in order to comply with the limit values. The decisive
factors when it comes to selecting the filters are essentially the
current loading and the other parameters (operational voltage,
design type, etc.) in the load feeder.
Suitable filters can be ordered from EPCOS AG.
You can find more information on the Internet at:
http://www.epcos.com
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Relays
3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm
4/11Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■Overview
45 mm solid-state relays
The 3RF22 solid-state relays with a width of 45 mm provide
space advantages over solutions with single-phase versions.
The logical connection arrangement, with the power infeed from
above and connection of the load from below, ensures tidy
installation in the control cabinet.
Important features:
• LED indicators
• Variety of connection techniques
• Plug-in control connection
• Degree of protection IP20
• Zero-point switching,
• Two or three-phase controlled
■Technical specifications
1) These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in
residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the may be
required to introduce additional damping measures.
Type 3RF22 ..-1.... 3RF22 ..-2.... 3RF22 ..-3....
General data
Ambient temperature
• During operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60
• During storage °C -55 ... +80
Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; > 1000 ask Technical Assistance
Shock resistance acc. to
IEC 60068-2-27
g/ms 15/11
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 g 2
Degree of protection IP20
Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz
(main/control circuit to ground)
V rms 4000
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• Emitted interference
- Conducted interference voltage
acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
Class A for industrial applications1)
- Emitted, high-frequency interference
voltage acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
Class A for industrial applications
• Interference immunity
- Electrostatic discharge
acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
- Induced RF fields
acc. to IEC 61000-4-6
MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor – ground 2; conductor – conductor 1; behavior criterion 2
Connection technique Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring terminal end connection
Main contact connection
• Conductor cross-section
- Solid mm2
2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14) --
• Stripped length mm 10 10
• Terminal screw M4 -- M5
- Tightening torque,
∅ 5 ... 6 mm, PZ 2
Nm 2 ... 2.5 2.5 ... 2
lb.in 18 ... 22 18 ... 22
• Cable lug -- --
- acc. to DIN 46234 5-2.5 ... 5-25
- acc. to JIS C 2805 R 2-5 ... 14-5
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts
• Conductor cross-section,
with or without end sleeve
mm
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
20 ... 12
0.5 ... 2.5
20 ... 12
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
20 ... 12
• Stripped length mm 7 10 7
• Terminal screw M3 -- M3
- Tightening torque,
∅ 3.5 , PZ 1
Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 0.5 ... 0.6
lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 4.5 ... 5.3
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Relays
3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm
4/12 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
1) Imax provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay.
The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depend-
ing on the connection method and cooling conditions.
Type 3RF22 ..-.AB.5 3RF22 ..-.AC.5
Main circuit
Controlled phases Two-phase Three-phase
Rated operational voltage Ue V 48 ... 600 48 ... 600
• Operating range V 40 ... 660 40 ... 660
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60 ± 10 % 50/60 ± 10 %
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 6
Blocking voltage V 1200 1200
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1.000 1.000
Order No. Imax
1)
Ie acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Ie acc. to UL/CSA Power loss
at Imax
Minimum load
current
Max. leakage
currentat Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 50 °C
A K/W A K/W A K/W W A mA
Main circuit
3RF22 30-. AB.. 30 0.57 30 0.57 30 0.44 81 0.5 10
3RF22 55-1AB.. 55 0.18 50 0.27 50 0.19 151 0.5 10
3RF22 55-2AB.. 20 1.83 20 1.58
3RF22 55-3AB.. 50 0.27 50 0.19
3RF22 30-. AC.. 30 0.33 30 0.33 30 0.25 122 0.5 10
3RF22 55-1AC.. 55 0.09 50 0.15 50 0.1 226 0.5 10
3RF22 55-2AC.. 20 1.19 20 1.02
3RF22 55-3AC.. 88 0.15 83 0.1
Order No. Rated impulse withstand capacity Itsm I2
t value
A A2s
Main circuit
3RF22 30-....5 300 450
3RF22 55-....5 600 1800
Type 3RF22 ..-.AB4. 3RF22 ..-.AC4.
Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation DC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 4 ... 30 4 ... 30
Response voltage V 15 15
• For tripping current mA 2 2
Drop-out voltage V 1 1
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 1 + max. one half-wave
• OFF delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 1 + max. one half-wave
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Relays
3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm
4/13Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■Characteristic curves
Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta (two-phase controlled)
Type current 30 A (3RF22 30-.AB..)
Type current 55 A (3RF22 55-.AB..)
Ambient temperature in °CDevice current in A
ModulepowerlossinW
4 12 20 30 36 60
NSB0_01671
einA
0 10 20 30 40 50
ae
M
28
0,35 K/W
0,45 K/W
0,56 K/W
0,75 K/W
1 K/W
1,3 K/W
1,7 K/W
2,2 K/W
3 K/W
4 K/W
5 K/W
7 K/W
10 K/W
20
40
60
80
100
Rthha
Ambient temperature in °CDevice current in A
ModulepowerlossinW
NSB0_01672
600 10 20 30 40 50
ae
einA
M
0,13 K/W
0,18 K/W
0,25 K/W
0,37 K/W
0,55 K/W
0,8 K/W
1,2 K/W
2 K/W
3 K/W
4 K/W
5 K/W
7 K/W
10 K/W
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
5 15 25 35 45 55
Rthha
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Relays
3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm
4/14 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta (three-phase controlled)
Type current 30 A (3RF22 30-.AC..)
Type current 55 A (3RF22 55-.AC..)
Arrangement example
Given conditions: Ie = 55 A and Ta = 40 C.
The task is to find the thermal resistance Rthha and the heat sink
overtemperature dTha.
From the diagram on the left → PM = 227 W,
from the diagram on the right → Rthha = 0.09 K/W.
This results in:
dTha = Rthha × PM = 0.09 K/W × 227 W = 20.4 K.
At dTha = 20.4 K the heat sink must therefore have an
Rthha = 0.09 K/W.
Ambient temperature in °CDevice current in A
ModulepowerlossinW
60
NSB0_01673
einA
4 12 20 28 30 36
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
0 10 20 30 40 50
0,26 K/W
0,33 K/W
0,44 K/W
0,62 K/W
0,9 K/W
1,3 K/W
1,7 K/W
2,2 K/W
3 K/W
4 K/W
5 K/W
7 K/W
10 K/W
ae
M
Rthha
Ambient temperature in °CDevice current in A
ModulepowerlossinW
60
NSB0_01674
einA
5 15 25 35 45 55
0
50
100
150
200
250
0 10 20 30 40 50
Rthha
0,06 K/W
0,09 K/W
0,15 K/W
0,25 K/W
0,4 K/W
0,6 K/W
0,8 K/W
1,1 K/W
1,5 K/W
2 K/W
3 K/W
4 K/W
6 K/W
ae
M
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Relays
3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm
4/15Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■Dimensional drawings
Solid-state relays
■Schematics
95
47,5
69
77
69
13
26
30
31
47
29 2933
45
47
NSB0_01689
Screw terminal Spring-loaded terminals Ring terminal end connection
3RF22 ..-1.... 3RF22 ..-2.... 3RF22 ..-3....
Spring-loaded
terminals
Two-phase controlled
DC control supply voltage
Three-phase controlled
DC control supply voltage
A1 +
A2 -
1 L1 L23 5 L3
2 T1 T24 6 T3
NSB0_01694
A1 +
A2 -
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
2 T1 4 6T2 T3
NSB0_01696
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/16 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
■Overview
The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized
heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined
rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depend-
ing on the version, current intensities of up to 50 A are achieved.
Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their particu-
lar advantages is their compact and space-saving design. With
their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped onto a
standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on carrier plates
with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be used in
circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety
extra-low voltage (SELV) in building engineering. For other appli-
cations, such as for extended personal safety, the heat sink can
be grounded through a screw terminal.
Version for resistive loads, "zero-point switching"
This standard version is often used for switching space heaters
on and off.
■Technical specifications
1) These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in
residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the may be
required to introduce additional damping measures.
Order No. 3RF24 ..-1.... 3RF24 ..-2.... 3RF24 ..-3....
General data
Ambient temperature
• During operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60
• During storage °C -55 ... +80
Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; derating from 1000
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 g 2
Degree of protection IP20
Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz
(main/control circuit to ground)
V rms 4000
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• Emitted interference acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
- Conducted interference voltage Class A for industrial applications1)
- Emitted, high-frequency interference voltage Class A for industrial applications
• Interference immunity
- Electrostatic discharge
acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
- Induced RF fields
acc. to IEC 61000-4-6
MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor – ground 2; conductor – conductor 1; behavior criterion 2
Connection technique Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring terminal end connection
Main contact connection
• Conductor cross-section
- Solid mm2
2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10 2x (0.5 ... 1.5) --
- Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 2x (0.5 ... 2.5) --
- Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14) --
• Stripped length mm 10 10 --
• Terminal screw M4 -- M5
- Tightening torque NM 2 ... 2.5 2 ... 2.5
lb.in 18 ... 22 18 ... 22
• Cable lug -- --
- acc. to DIN 46234 5-2.5 ... 5-25
- acc. to JIS C 2805 R 2-5 ,,, 14-5
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts
• Conductor cross-section mm
AWG
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
AWG 20 ... 12
0.5 ... 2.5
AWG 20 ... 12
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0)
AWG 20 ... 12
• Stripped length mm 7 10 7
• Terminal screw M3 -- M3
- Tightening torque,
∅ 3.5 , PZ 1
NM 0.5 ... 0.6 0.5 ... 0.6
lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 4.5 ... 5.3
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/17Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
1) The type current provides information about the performance of the solid-
state contactor. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be
smaller depending on the connection method and start-up conditions.
For derating see the characteristic curves on page 4/18.
Type 3RF24 ..-.AB.5 3RF24 ..-.AC.5
Main circuit
Controlled phases Two-phase Three-phase
Rated operational voltage Ue V 48 ... 600 48 ... 600
• Operating range V 40 ... 660 40 ... 660
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60 ± 10 % 50/60 ± 10 %
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600 600
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 6
Blocking voltage V 1200 1200
Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1000 1000
Order No. Type current Rated operational current Ie Power loss at
IAC-51
Minimum load
current
Max. leakage
current
Rated impulse
withstand
current Itsm
I2
t value
IAC-51
at 40 °C
acc. to
IEC 60947-4-3
for 40°C
acc. to
UL/CSA
for 50 °C
A A A w A mA A A²s
Main circuit
3RF24 10-.AB.5 10.5 7.5 9.5 21 0.1 10 200 200
3RF24 20-.AB.5 20 15 18 39 0.5 10 500 1800
3RF24 30-.AB.5 30 22 26 61 0.5 10 1200 7200
3RF24 40-.AB.5 40 32 35 81 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF24 50-.AB.5 50 38 45 105 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF24 10-.AC.5 10.5 7 9 32 0.1 10 300 450
3RF24 20-.AC.5 20 15 18 67 0.5 10 600 1800
3RF24 30-.AC.5 30 22 26 93 0.5 10 1200 7200
3RF24 40-.AC.5 40 29 35 121 0.5 10 1150 6600
3RF24 50-.AC.5 50 38 45 160 0.5 10 1150 6600
Type 3RF24 ..-...4. 3RF24 ..-...5.
Control circuit
Method of operation DC operation AC operation
Rated control supply voltage Us V 4 ... 30 190 ... 230
Rated frequency
of the control supply voltage
Hz -- 50/60 ± 10%
Actuating voltage, max. V 30 253
• For actuating current mA 15 6
Response voltage V 4 180
• For tripping current mA > 3 > 2
Drop-out voltage V < 1 < 40
Operating times
• ON-delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 40 + max. one half-wave
• OFF delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 40 + max. one half-wave
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/18 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
■Characteristic curves
Derating curves, two-phase controlled
Type current 10.5 A (3RF24 10-.AB..)
Type current 20 A (3RF24 20-.AB..)
Type current 30 A (3RF24 30-.AB..)
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
2
6
12
16
20
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
NSB0_01675
einA
4
8
10
14
18
22
24
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
26
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
5
10
15
20
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
5
25
30
40
0 4 8 12 20 2416
NSB0_01676
einA
10
20
15
35
45
50
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
25
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
5
10
15
20
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
6
18
36
54
0 6 1812
NSB0_01677
einA
12
24
30
42
48
60
66
72
78
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
25
24
30
35
40
30 36
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/19Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
Type current 40 A (3RF24 40-.AB..)1)
Type current 50 A (3RF24 50-.AB..)1)
1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side
installation.
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
20
40
0 8 16 3224
NSB0_01678
einA
10
30
50
60
70
80
90
100
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
50
40 48
110
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
20
40
0 10 20 4030
NSB0_01679
einA
60
80
100
120
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
50
50
55
60
T h e r m a l l i m i t c u r r e n t f o r i n d i v i d u a l m o u n t i n g
T h e r m a l l i m i t c u r r e n t f o r s i d e - b y - s i d e m o u n t i n g
C u r r e n t a c c . t o I E C 9 4 7 - 4 - 3 f o r i n d i v i d u a l m o u n t i n g
C u r r e n t a c c . t o I E C 9 4 7 - 4 - 3 f o r s i d e - b y - s i d e m o u n t i n g
m a x
m a x
I E C
I E C
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/20 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
Derating curves, three-phase controlled
Type current 10.5 A (3RF24 10-.AC..)
Type current 20 A (3RF24 20-.AC..) 1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side
installation.
Type current 30 A (3RF24 30-.AC..)1)
1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side
installation.
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
einA
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
0
2
4
6
8
10
12
14
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
3
9
18
24
30
0 2 4 6 8 10 12
NSB0_01680
6
12
15
21
27
33
36
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
5
10
15
20
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
5
15
30
40
50
0 3 6 9 15 1812
NSB0_01681
einA
10
20
25
35
45
55
60
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
25
21 24
65
70
75
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
5
10
15
20
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
10
30
60
80
100
0 4 8 16 2012
NSB0_01682
einA
20
40
50
70
90
110
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
25
24
30
35
40
28 32 36
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/21Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
Type current 40 A (3RF24 40-.AC..)1)
Type current 50 A (3RF24 50-.AC..)1)
1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side
installation.
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
40
80
0 8 16 3224
NSB0_01683
einA
20
60
100
120
e
PMinW
Ta in °C
50
40 48
140
160
in A
Device currentAmbient temperature
Modulepowerloss
0
10
20
30
40
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
0
20
40
0 10 20 4030
NSB0_01684
einA
60
80
100
120
160
140
e in A
PMinW
Ta in °C
50
50
60 200
180
160
T h e r m a l l i m i t c u r r e n t f o r i n d i v i d u a l m o u n t i n g
T h e r m a l l i m i t c u r r e n t f o r s i d e - b y - s i d e m o u n t i n g
C u r r e n t a c c . t o I E C 9 4 7 - 4 - 3 f o r i n d i v i d u a l m o u n t i n g
C u r r e n t a c c . t o I E C 9 4 7 - 4 - 3 f o r s i d e - b y - s i d e m o u n t i n g
m a x
m a x
I E C
I E C
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/22 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
■Dimensional drawings
Type current 10.5 A
Type current 20 A; 30 A (2-phase controlled)
30
14,4 14,4 4,5Ø
45
73
25
88
105
5
5
104,5
69
47,5
14,5
77
90
100
95
NSB0_01690
Screw terminal
3RF24 10-1....
Spring-loaded terminals
3RF24 10-2....
Spring-loaded
terminals
69
14,5
47,5
90
100
NSB0_01691
77
99,5
112,5
30
14,4
33
14,4
4,5Ø
b
45
25
5
3RF2420-.AB..
3RF2420-.AC..
3RF2430-.AB..
b
A
67
89,5
77
View A View A
Spring-loaded terminals
3RF24 20-2....
Screw terminal
3RF24 .0-1....
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
Solid-State Contactors
3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase
4/23Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
Type current 30 A (3-phase controlled); 40 A, 50 A
■Schematics
69
14,5
47,5
e
a
4,5Ø
86
104,5
108
31,5
3RF2450-.AC..
3RF2430-.AC..
3RF2440-.AB..
3RF2440-.AC..
3RF2450-.AB..
a
180
100
100
b
157,5
113,5
157,5
d
146
100
146
e
160
85
80
121
14,4 14,4
45
d
b
NSB0_01692
69
View AA
View A
Ring terminal end connection
3RF24 50-3....
Screw terminal
3RF24 .0-1....
Two-phase controlled
DC control supply voltage
Three-phase controlled
DC control supply voltage
Two-phase controlled
AC control supply voltage
Three-phase controlled
AC control supply voltage
NSB0_01685
A1 +
A2 -
1 L1 L23 5 L3
PE
2 T1 T24 6 T3
NSB0_01687
A1 +
A2 -
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
PE
2 T1 4 6T2 T3
NSB0_01686
A1
A2
1 L1 L23 5 L3
PE
2 T1 T24 6 T3
NSB0_01688
A1
A2
1 L1 3 L2 5 L3
PE
2 T1 4 6T2 T3
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
3RF29 Function Modules
General data
4/24 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
■Overview
Function modules for SIRIUS SC solid-state switching
devices
A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of
functionality. With our function modules, these requirements can
be met really easily. The modules are mounted simply by click-
ing them into place; straight away the necessary connections
are made with the solid-state relay or contactor. The plug-in
connection to control the solid-state switching devices can
simply remain in use.
The following function modules are available:
• Converter
• Load monitoring
• Heating current monitoring
• Power control regulators
• Power controller
■Technical specifications
1) These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in
residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the user
may require to introduce additional damping measures.
Type 3RF29 ..-.K...
General data
Ambient temperature
• During operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60
• During storage °C -55 ... +80
Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; derating from 1000
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g 2
Degree of protection IP20
Insulation resistance between load and
control circuit
MΩ 1.5
Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
• Emitted interference
- Conducted interference voltage acc. to
IEC 60947-4-3
Class A for industrial applications1)
- Emitted, high-frequency interference voltage
acc. to IEC 60947-4-3
Class A for industrial applications
• Interference immunity
- Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2
(corresponds to degree of severity 3)
kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2
- Induced RF fields acc. to IEC 61000-4-6 MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1
- Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1
- Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor – ground 2; conductor – conductor 1; behavior criterion 2
Connection, auxiliary/control contacts, screw
terminal
• Conductor cross-section mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0), 1 x (AWG 20 ... 12)
• Stripped length mm 7
• Terminal screw M3
- Tightening torque Nm
lb.in
0.5 ... 0.6
4.5 ... 5.3
Converter, diameter of hole mm 17
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
3RF29 Function Modules
Power control regulators
4/25Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■ Overview
Power control regulators for SIRIUS solid-state switching
devices
The power control regulator is a function module for the autono-
mous power control regulation of complex heating systems and
inductive loads, for the operation of loads with temperature-
dependent resistors or long-term aging, and for simple indirect
temperature control.
The power control regulator can be used on the 3RF21 and
3RF23 instantaneous switching solid-state switching devices
(single-phase). If only the full-wave control mode is used, the
power control regulator can also be used on the zero-point-
switching solid-state relays and contactors.
■Application
The power control regulator sets the load current of the solid-
state switching device depending on a setpoint value as a
percentage. Changes in the mains voltage or in the load resis-
tance are not compensated in this case. The modulation, the
On/off ratio or the phase angle, remains unchanged in accor-
dance with the setpoint. The autonomous power control regula-
tion is performed between 0 and 100 % of the setpoint value
Full-wave control
If the left potentiometer tR is set to 0 s (= far left), the power
control regulator works according to the principle of full-wave
control. The power set, be it internal or external, is converted into
a pulse-width-modulated digital signal. The power control regu-
lator controls the On and Off time of the solid-state switching
device within a fixed period duration of 1 s so that the specified
power is applied to the load. The "ON" LED flashes in the same
rhythm as the solid-state switching device switches on and off.
Generalized phase control
If the left potentiometer tR is set to higher than 0 s, the power
control regulator works according to the principle of generalized
phase control. With generalized phase control, a choke rated at
at least 200 µH must be included in the load circuit in order to
observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage
for industrial networks.
■Design
Mounting
Easy snapping onto the 3RF21 solid-state relays or 3RF23 solid-
state contactors establishes the connections to the solid-state
switching devices. Because of the special design, the straight-
through transformer of the function module covers the lower
main power connection. The cable to the load is simply pushed
through and secured with the terminal screw.
■Function
Setpoint selection
The setpoint is selected either internally using the right-hand
potentiometer P with 0 ... 100 % on the module or externally
through the analog input 0 ... 10 V.
100 % corresponds in full-wave control to permanently On and
in generalized phase control to a conduction angle of 180° and
hence maximum power.
When the setpoint is selected internally the module is controlled
through the IN terminal. The terminal 10 then has no function.
Input characteristic curve
When the setpoint is selected externally (potentiometer P set far
left = 0 %) the module is controlled by applying the analog
voltage 0 ... 10 V. 0 ... 10 V corresponds to 0 ... 100 % power.
Conversion of the voltage is linear between 0.1 and 9.9 V. Below
0.1 V the switching device remains off; at voltages above 9.9 V
the power is always set to 100 %.
Inrush current limitation
The ramp time (tR) for a voltage ramp on switching on is set with
the left potentiometer for the purpose of inrush current limitation.
The set time refers to a power of 100 %. If, for example, a ramp
time of 10 s is set and the selected power is 60 %, then a power
of 60 % is reached after approx. 6 s.
Line and thyristor monitoring
The power control regulator recognizes supply failures and
thyristor faults. The faults are indicated by the LEDs on the mod-
ule and the fault output is activated.
> 9,9
0°
100
%
< 0,1 5,0 V
50
0
180°
90°
1000 50 %
NSB0_01693
Modulation
Conductionangle
External setpoint of analog voltage 0 ... 10 V
Internal setpoint of potentiometer P
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
3RF29 Function Modules
Power control regulators
4/26 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
■Technical specifications
Type 3RF29 ..-0KA.3 3RF29 ..-0KA.6
Main circuit
Rated operational voltage Ue V 110 ... 230 400 ... 600
• Tolerance % -15/+10
• Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600
Voltage detection
• Measuring/teach range V 93.5 ... 253 340 ... 660
Compensation of mains voltage fluctuation % 20 (only within the measuring range)
Type 3RF29 04-0KA.. 3RF29 20-0KA.. 3RF29 50-0KA.. 3RF29 90-0KA..
Current measurement
Rated operational current Ie A 4 20 50 90
Current measurement
• Teach range A 0.15 ... 4 0.65 ... 20 1.6 ... 50 2.9 ... 90
• Measuring range A 0 ... 4 0 ... 22 0 ... 55 0 ... 99
• Minimum partial load current A -- 0.65 1.6 2.9
Number of partial loads 1 ... 6
Type 3RF29 ..-0KA1. 3RF29 ..-0KA3.
Control circuit A1–A2
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 AC/DC AC 110
• Operating range V 20.5 ... 26.5 DC 18 ... 30 90 ... 121
Rated frequency of the control supply voltage Hz 50/60 ± 10% -- 50/60 ± 10%
Current consumption mA < 40 < 20
Control input IN
Rated control voltage Uc V 24 AC/DC AC 110
• For actuating current mA < 15 < 15
• Actuating voltage, max. mA AC 26.5 DC 30 121
Control supply voltage, min./max. V AC 20.5 ... 26.5 DC 18 ... 30 90 ... 121
Response voltage V AC 14 DC 15 79
• For tripping current mA > 2 > 2 > 2
Drop-out voltage V 5 5 15
Control input 0 ... 10 V
Input analog V 0 ... 10
• Permissible range V -1 ... 11
Input resistance kΩ 8
Period duration s 1
Auxiliary circuit 11–12
Switching voltage V 24 AC/DC AC 110
• Actuating current (utilization category) A 0.5 (DC-12) 0.5 (AC-12)
• Switching voltage, min./max. V 15 ... 30 90 ... 121
Continuous thermal current, max. Ith A 1 1
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
3RF29 Function Modules
Power control regulators
4/27Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
44
■Dimensional drawings
■Schematics
Terminal diagram
1) Internal connection.
2) Straight-through transformers.
3) Voltage detection not electrically isolated (3 MΩ per path).
Switching example
1) Internal connection to the solid-state relay/contactor.
2) Straight-through transformer.
3) Make PE/ground connection according to installation regulations.
4) Connection of L/N contact with:
- Load monitoring/power controller/control regulator 3RF29 ..-0.A.3
on neutral conductor N (e.g. 230 V),
- Load monitoring/power controller/control regulator 3RF29 ..-0.A.6
on a second phase (e.g. 400 V).
5) Voltage detection not electrically isolated (3 MΩ per path).
6) Grounding of connection L- is recommended.
7) A 200 µH choke must be used when operating with leading-edge phase in
order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage
according to Class A.
3RF29 ..-0KA.. 29,5
4 0
4 4
3 8 3 1 , 5
111,5
4 5
NSB0_01444
NSB0_01469a
IN/0 –
10 V+
11
12
L/N
1)
2)
NC
3)
comp.
<
3)
A1+
A2 –
A out –
A out +
D in
R1
L/N
NC
11
12
IN/0 –
10 V +
L – L +
A1
A1 +
A2 –
1)
2 T
PE
3)
1 L
L1
7)
2)
K1
F1
L +
PE
L –N
L3
3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V
DC 24 V
NSB0_01436c
L1
L2
4)
comp.
5)
5)
6)
A1 +
A2 –
Controls — Solid-State Switching Devices
3RF29 Function Modules
Notes
4/28 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
4
Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
3RW Soft Starters
General data
6/2 - Overview
3RW44 for High-Feature applications
6/3 - Overview
6/3 - Application
6/4 - Selection and ordering data
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44 for High-Feature applications
6/10 - Function
6/11 - Technical specifications
6/25 - Characteristic curves
6/26 - More information
Project planning aids
6/28 - Dimensional drawings
6/30 - Schematics
Load Feeders, Motor
Starters and Soft Starters
Catalog
Technical Information
3RW Soft Starters
General data
6/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
■Overview
The advantages of the SIRIUS soft starters at a glance:
• Soft starting and smooth ramp-down1)
• Stepless starting
• Reduction of current peaks
• Avoidance of mains voltage fluctuations during starting
• Reduced load on the power supply network
• Reduction of the mechanical load in the operating mechanism
• Considerable space savings and reduced wiring compared
with conventional starters
• Maintenance-free switching
• Very easy handling
• Fits perfectly in the SIRIUS modular system
✔ Function is available
-- Function not available.
1) Only soft starting available for 3RW31.
2) Not available for 3RW30 03.
3) Not possible in inside-delta circuit.
4) Trace function with Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart software.
5) For 3RW30 03 up to 230 V.
6) Calculate soft starter and motor with size allowance where required.
More information can be found on the Internet at
http://www.siemens.com/softstarter
SIRIUS 3RW30/31 SIRIUS 3RW40 SIRIUS 3RW44
Standard applications High-Feature applications
Rated current up to 40 °C A 3 ... 100 134 ... 432 29 ... 1214
Rated operational voltage V 200 ... 575 200 ... 600 200 ... 690
Motor rating at 400 V
• Inline circuit kW 1.1 ... 55 75 ... 250 15 ... 710
• Inside-delta circuit kW -- -- 22 ... 1200
Temperature range °C -25 ... +60 -25 ... +60 0 ... +60
Soft starting/ramp-down ✔1)
✔ ✔
Voltage ramp ✔ ✔ ✔
Starting/stopping voltage % 40 ... 100 40 ... 100 20 ... 100
Starting and ramp-down time s 0 ... 20 0 ... 20 1 ... 360
Torque control -- -- ✔
Starting/stopping torque % -- -- 20 ... 100
Torque limit % -- -- 20 ... 200
Ramp time s -- -- 1 ... 360
Integral bypass contact system ✔2)
✔ ✔
Intrinsic device protection -- ✔ ✔
Motor overload protection -- ✔ ✔
Thermistor motor protection -- -- ✔
Adjustable current limiting -- ✔ ✔
Inside-delta circuit -- -- ✔
Breakaway pulse -- -- ✔
Creep speed in both directions -- -- ✔
Pump ramp-down -- -- ✔6)
DC braking -- -- ✔3) 6)
Combined braking -- -- ✔3) 6)
Motor heating -- -- ✔
Communication -- -- with PROFIBUS DP (optional)
External display and operator module -- -- (optional)
Operating measured value display -- -- ✔
Error logbook -- -- ✔
Event list -- -- ✔
Slave pointer function -- -- ✔
Trace function -- -- ✔4)
Programmable control inputs and outputs -- -- ✔
Number of parameter sets 1 (2 with 3RW31) 1 3
Parameterization software
(Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart)
-- -- ✔
Power semiconductors (thyristors) 2 controlled phases 2 controlled phases 3 controlled phases
Spring-loaded terminals ✔ (only 3RW30 03) ✔ ✔
Screw terminals ✔ ✔ ✔
UL/CSA ✔5)
✔ ✔
CE marking ✔ ✔ ✔
Soft starting under heavy starting conditions -- -- ✔6)
Configuring support Win-Soft Starter, the electronic selection slider ruler, Technical Assistance ++49 911 895 5900
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
■Overview
In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters provide numerous functions for
higher-level requirements. They cover a rating range up to
710 kW (at 400 V) in the inline circuit and up to 1200 kW
(at 400 V) in the inside-delta circuit.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are characterized by a compact
design for space-saving and clearly arranged control cabinet
layouts. For optimized motor starting and stopping the innova-
tive SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are an attractive alternative with
considerable savings potential compared to applications with a
frequency converter. The new torque control and adjustable
current limiting enable the High-Feature soft starters to be used
in nearly every conceivable task. They guarantee the reliable
avoidance of sudden torque applications and current peaks
during motor starting and stopping. This creates savings poten-
tial when calculating the size of the switchgear and when servic-
ing the machinery installed. Be it for inline circuits or inside-delta
circuits – the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter offers savings especially
in terms of size and equipment costs.
Combinations of various starting, operating and ramp-down
possibilities ensure an optimum adaptation to the application-
specific requirements. Operating and commissioning can be
performed by means of the user-friendly keypad and a menu-
prompted, multi-line graphic display with background lighting.
The optimized motor ramp-up and ramp-down can be effected
by means of just a few settings with a previously selected
language. Four-key operation and plain-text displays for each
menu point guarantee full clarity at every moment of the
parameterization and operation.
Applicable standards
• IEC 60947-4-2
• UL/CSA
■Application
The SIRIUS 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are suitable for the
torque-controlled soft starting and smooth ramp-down as well as
braking of three-phase asynchronous motors.
Application areas, e. g.
• Pumps
• Ventilators
• Compressors
• Water transport
• Conveying systems and lifts
• Hydraulics
• Machine tools
• Mills
• Saws
• Breakers
• Mixers
• Centrifuges
• Industrial cooling and refrigerating systems
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
■Selection and ordering data
1) 3RW44 2 ., 3RW44 3 . and 3RW44 4 . soft starters with screw-type
terminals: delivery time class } (preferred type).
2) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means
of PLC possible.
Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current.
The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mecha-
nism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s or
similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices should
be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation
program. See Technical Specifications for information about
rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and operating
frequency.
3RW44 27-1BC44 3RW44 36-6BC44 3RW44 47-6BC44 3RW44 53-6BC44
Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage
Ue
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
Rated output of three-phase
induction motors for rated
operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg
Inline circuit, rated operational voltage 200 ... 460 V1)
29 5.5 15 -- -- -- 26 7.5 7.5 15 -- } 3RW44 22-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
36 7.5 18.5 -- -- -- 32 10 10 20 -- } 3RW44 23-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
47 11 22 -- -- -- 42 10 15 25 -- } 3RW44 24-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
57 15 30 -- -- -- 51 15 15 30 -- } 3RW44 25-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
77 18.5 37 -- -- -- 68 20 20 50 -- } 3RW44 26-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
93 22 45 -- -- -- 82 25 25 60 -- } 3RW44 27-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 3
• With screw terminals 1
113 30 55 -- -- -- 100 30 30 75 -- B 3RW44 34-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
134 37 75 -- -- -- 117 30 40 75 -- B 3RW44 35-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
162 45 90 -- -- -- 145 40 50 100 -- B 3RW44 36-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
203 55 110 -- -- -- 180 50 60 125 -- B 3RW44 43-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
250 75 132 -- -- -- 215 60 75 150 -- B 3RW44 44-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
313 90 160 -- -- -- 280 75 100 200 -- B 3RW44 45-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
356 110 200 -- -- -- 315 100 125 250 -- B 3RW44 46-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
432 132 250 -- -- -- 385 125 150 300 -- B 3RW44 47-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
551 160 315 -- -- -- 494 150 200 400 -- C 3RW44 53-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
615 200 355 -- -- -- 551 150 200 450 -- C 3RW44 54-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
693 200 400 -- -- -- 615 200 250 500 -- C 3RW44 55-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
780 250 450 -- -- -- 693 200 250 600 -- C 3RW44 56-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
880 250 500 -- -- -- 780 250 300 700 -- C 3RW44 57-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 2
• With screw terminals 6
Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us
2)
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) 3RW44 2 ., 3RW44 3 . and 3RW44 4 . soft starters with screw-type
terminals: delivery time class A.
2) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means
of PLC possible.
Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current.
The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mecha-
nism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s or
similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices should
be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation
program. See Technical Specifications for information about
rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and operating
frequency.
Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
Rated output of three-phase
induction motors for rated operational
voltage Ue
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
Rated output of three-phase
induction motors for rated
operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg
Inline circuit, rated operational voltage 400 ... 600 V1)
29 -- 15 18.5 -- -- 26 -- -- 15 20 A 3RW44 22-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
36 -- 18.5 22 -- -- 32 -- -- 20 25 A 3RW44 23-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
47 -- 22 30 -- -- 42 -- -- 25 30 A 3RW44 24-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
57 -- 30 37 -- -- 51 -- -- 30 40 A 3RW44 25-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
77 -- 37 45 -- -- 68 -- -- 50 50 A 3RW44 26-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
93 -- 45 55 -- -- 82 -- -- 60 75 A 3RW44 27-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 3
• With screw terminals 1
113 -- 55 75 -- -- 100 -- -- 75 75 B 3RW44 34-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
134 -- 75 90 -- -- 117 -- -- 75 100 B 3RW44 35-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
162 -- 90 110 -- -- 145 -- -- 100 125 B 3RW44 36-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
203 -- 110 132 -- -- 180 -- -- 125 150 B 3RW44 43-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
250 -- 132 160 -- -- 215 -- -- 150 200 B 3RW44 44-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
313 -- 160 200 -- -- 280 -- -- 200 250 B 3RW44 45-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
356 -- 200 250 -- -- 315 -- -- 250 300 B 3RW44 46-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
432 -- 250 315 -- -- 385 -- -- 300 400 B 3RW44 47-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
551 -- 315 355 -- -- 494 -- -- 400 500 C 3RW44 53-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
615 -- 355 400 -- -- 551 -- -- 450 600 C 3RW44 54-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
693 -- 400 500 -- -- 615 -- -- 500 700 C 3RW44 55-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
780 -- 450 560 -- -- 693 -- -- 600 750 C 3RW44 56-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
880 -- 500 630 -- -- 780 -- -- 700 850 C 3RW44 57-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 2
• With screw terminals 6
Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us
2)
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
1) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means
of PLC possible.
Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current.
The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mecha-
nism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s or
similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices should
be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation
program. See Technical Specifications for information about
rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and operating
frequency.
Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
Rated output of three-phase
induction motors for rated operational
voltage Ue
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
Rated output of three-phase
induction motors for rated
operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg
Inline circuit, rated operational voltage 400 ... 690 V
29 -- 15 18.5 30 -- 26 -- -- 15 20 B 3RW44 22-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900
36 -- 18.5 22 37 -- 32 -- -- 20 25 B 3RW44 23-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900
47 -- 22 30 45 -- 42 -- -- 25 30 B 3RW44 24-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900
57 -- 30 37 55 -- 51 -- -- 30 40 B 3RW44 25-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900
77 -- 37 45 75 -- 68 -- -- 50 50 B 3RW44 26-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900
93 -- 45 55 90 -- 82 -- -- 60 75 B 3RW44 27-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 3
• With screw terminals 1
113 -- 55 75 110 -- 100 -- -- 75 75 B 3RW44 34-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 7.900
134 -- 75 90 132 -- 117 -- -- 75 100 B 3RW44 35-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 7.900
162 -- 90 110 160 -- 145 -- -- 100 125 B 3RW44 36-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 7.900
203 -- 110 132 200 -- 180 -- -- 125 150 B 3RW44 43-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300
250 -- 132 160 250 -- 215 -- -- 150 200 B 3RW44 44-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300
313 -- 160 200 315 -- 280 -- -- 200 250 B 3RW44 45-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300
356 -- 200 250 355 -- 315 -- -- 250 300 B 3RW44 46-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300
432 -- 250 315 400 -- 385 -- -- 300 400 B 3RW44 47-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300
551 -- 315 355 560 -- 494 -- -- 400 500 C 3RW44 53-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000
615 -- 355 400 630 -- 551 -- -- 450 600 C 3RW44 54-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000
693 -- 400 500 710 -- 615 -- -- 500 700 C 3RW44 55-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000
780 -- 450 560 800 -- 693 -- -- 600 750 C 3RW44 56-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000
880 -- 500 630 900 -- 780 -- -- 700 850 C 3RW44 57-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 2
• With screw terminals 6
Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us
1)
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/7Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) In the selection table, the unit rated operational current Ie refers to the
three-phase motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta circuit.
The actual current of the unit is approx. 58 % of this value.
2) 3RW44 2 ., 3RW44 3 . and 3RW44 4 . soft starters with screw-type
terminals: delivery time class }(preferred type).
3) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means
of PLC possible.
Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current.
The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating
mechanism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for
20 s or similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices
should be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and
simulation program. See Technical Specifications for information
about rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and
operating frequency.
3RW44 27-1BC44 3RW44 36-6BC44 3RW44 47-6BC44 3RW44 53-6BC44
Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
1)
Rated output of three-phase induction
motors for rated operational voltage
Ue
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
Rated output of three-phase
induction motors for rated
operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg
Inside-delta circuits, rated operational voltage 200 ... 400 V2)
50 15 22 -- -- -- 45 10 15 -- -- B 3RW44 22-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
62 18.5 30 -- -- -- 55 15 20 -- -- B 3RW44 23-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
81 22 45 -- -- -- 73 20 25 -- -- B 3RW44 24-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
99 30 55 -- -- -- 88 25 30 -- -- B 3RW44 25-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
133 37 75 -- -- -- 118 30 40 -- -- B 3RW44 26-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
161 45 90 -- -- -- 142 40 50 -- -- B 3RW44 27-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 3
• With screw terminals 1
196 55 110 -- -- -- 173 50 60 -- -- B 3RW44 34-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
232 75 132 -- -- -- 203 60 75 -- -- B 3RW44 35-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
281 90 160 -- -- -- 251 75 100 -- -- B 3RW44 36-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900
352 110 200 -- -- -- 312 100 125 -- -- B 3RW44 43-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
433 132 250 -- -- -- 372 125 150 -- -- B 3RW44 44-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
542 160 315 -- -- -- 485 150 200 -- -- B 3RW44 45-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
617 200 355 -- -- -- 546 150 200 -- -- B 3RW44 46-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
748 250 400 -- -- -- 667 200 250 -- -- B 3RW44 47-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300
954 315 560 -- -- -- 856 300 350 -- -- C 3RW44 53-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1065 355 630 -- -- -- 954 350 400 -- -- C 3RW44 54-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1200 400 710 -- -- -- 1065 350 450 -- -- C 3RW44 55-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1351 450 800 -- -- -- 1200 450 500 -- -- C 3RW44 56-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1524 500 900 -- -- -- 1351 450 600 -- -- C 3RW44 57-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 2
• With screw terminals 6
Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us
3)
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/8 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
1) In the selection table, the unit rated operational current Ie refers to the
three-phase motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta circuit.
The actual current of the unit is approx. 58 % of this value.
2) 3RW44 2 ., 3RW44 3 . and 3RW44 4 . soft starters with screw-type
terminals: delivery time class A.
3) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means
of PLC possible.
Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current.
The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating
mechanism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for
20 s or similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices
should be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and
simulation program. See Technical Specifications for information
about rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and
operating frequency.
Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
1)
Rated output of three-phase
induction motors for rated opera-
tional voltage Ue
Rated
opera-
tional
current
Ie
Rated output of three-phase
induction motors for rated
operational voltage Ue
230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V
A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg
Inside-delta circuits, rated operational voltage 400 ... 600 V2)
50 -- 22 30 -- -- 45 -- -- 30 40 B 3RW44 22-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
62 -- 30 37 -- -- 55 -- -- 40 50 B 3RW44 23-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
81 -- 45 45 -- -- 73 -- -- 50 60 B 3RW44 24-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
99 -- 55 55 -- -- 88 -- -- 60 75 B 3RW44 25-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
133 -- 75 90 -- -- 118 -- -- 75 100 B 3RW44 26-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
161 -- 90 110 -- -- 142 -- -- 100 125 B 3RW44 27-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 3
• With screw terminals 1
196 -- 110 132 -- -- 173 -- -- 125 150 B 3RW44 34-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
232 -- 132 160 -- -- 203 -- -- 150 200 B 3RW44 35-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
281 -- 160 200 -- -- 251 -- -- 200 250 B 3RW44 36-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900
352 -- 200 250 -- -- 312 -- -- 250 300 B 3RW44 43-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
433 -- 250 315 -- -- 372 -- -- 300 350 B 3RW44 44-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
542 -- 315 355 -- -- 485 -- -- 400 500 B 3RW44 45-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
617 -- 355 450 -- -- 546 -- -- 450 600 B 3RW44 46-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
748 -- 400 500 -- -- 667 -- -- 600 750 B 3RW44 47-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300
954 -- 560 630 -- -- 856 -- -- 750 950 C 3RW44 53-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1065 -- 630 710 -- -- 954 -- -- 850 1050 C 3RW44 54-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1200 -- 710 800 -- -- 1065 -- -- 950 1200 C 3RW44 55-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1351 -- 800 900 -- -- 1200 -- -- 1050 1350 C 3RW44 56-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
1524 -- 900 1000 -- -- 1351 -- -- 1200 1500 C 3RW44 57-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000
Order No. supplement for connection methods
• With spring-loaded terminals 2
• With screw terminals 6
Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us
3)
• 115 V AC 3
• 230 V AC 4
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/9Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
Accessories
Spare parts
For
soft starters
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Type kg
Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart PC communication program
Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart
Parameterization and service software for
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters for parameterizing
through the system interface on the device
Executes on PC/PG under Windows 2000/XP,
without PC cable
Type of supply: CD, single license
} 1 1 unit 131 0.230
PC cables
For PC/PG communication with SIRIUS 3RW44
soft starters
through the system interface, for connecting to
the serial interface of the PC/PG
B 3UF7 940-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 131 0.150
Box terminal blocks for soft starters
Box terminal blocks
3RW44 2. Included in delivery
3RW44 3. • Up to 70 mm2 } 3RT19 55-4G 1 1 unit 101 0.237
• Up to 120 mm2
} 3RT19 56-4G 1 1 unit 101 0.270
3RW44 3. • Up to 240 mm2
} 3RT19 66-4G 1 1 unit 101 0.676
Covers for soft starters
Terminal covers for box terminals
Additional touch protection to be fitted at the box
terminals (2 units required per device)
3RW44 2. and
3RW44 3.
} 3RT19 56-4EA2 1 1 unit 101 0.028
3RW44 4. } 3RT19 66-4EA2 1 1 unit 101 0.038
Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar
connections
3RW44 2. and
3RW44 3.
} 3RT19 56-4EA1 1 1 unit 101 0.067
3RW44 4. } 3RT19 66-4EA1 1 1 unit 101 0.124
For
soft starters
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
Type kg
Fans
Fans
3RW44 2. and
3RW44 3.
115 V AC } 3RW49 36-8VX30 1 1 unit 131 0.300
230 V AC } 3RW49 36-8VX40 1 1 unit 131 0.300
3RW44 4. 115 V AC } 3RW49 47-8VX30 1 1 unit 131 0.500
230 V AC } 3RW49 47-8VX40 1 1 unit 131 0.500
3RW44 5. 115 V AC } 3RW49 57-8VX30 1 1 unit 131 0.800
230 V AC } 3RW49 57-8VX40 1 1 unit 131 0.800
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/10 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
■Function
Equipped with modern, ergonomic user prompting the
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be commissioned quickly and
easily using a keypad and a menu-prompted, multi-line display
with background lighting. Motor starting and deceleration are
optimized quickly, easily and safely with just a few settings in a
selectable language. Four-key operation and plain-text displays
for each menu point guarantee full clarity at every moment of the
parameterization and operation. Measurement values and oper-
ating values as well as warning messages and fault indications
are output continuously on the front panel during operation and
when control voltage is applied. An external display and opera-
tor module can be connected by means of a connecting cable
to the soft starter, thus enabling active indications and the like to
be read directly from the control cabinet door.
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are equipped with optimum
functionality. An integral bypass contact system reduces the
power loss of the soft starter during operation. This reliably
prevents heating of the switchgear environment. The
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters have internal intrinsic device
protection. This prevents thermal overloading of the power
section's thyristors, e.g. due to unacceptably high closing
operations.
Wiring work for installing an additional motor overload relay is no
longer needed as the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters perform this
function too. In addition they offer adjustable trip classes and a
thermistor motor protection function. As an option the thyristors
can also be protected by SITOR semi-conductor fuses from
short-circuiting. And even inrush current peaks are reliably
avoided thanks to adjustable current limiting.
As a further option the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be
upgraded with a PROFIBUS DP module. Thanks to their commu-
nication capability and their programmable control inputs and
relay outputs the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be very easily
and quickly integrated in higher-level controllers.
In addition a creep speed function is available for positioning
and setting jobs. With this function the motor can be controlled
in both directions of rotation with reduced torque and an adjust-
able, low speed.
On the other hand the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters offer a new,
combined DC braking function for the fast stopping of driving
loads.
Highlights
• Soft starting with breakaway pulse, torque control or voltage
ramp and adjustable torque or current limiting as well as any
combination of these, depending on load type
• Integrated bypass contact system to minimize dissipated
power
• Various setting options for the starting parameters such as
starting torque, starting voltage, ramp-up and ramp-down
time, and much more in three separate parameter sets
• Start-up detection
• Inside-delta circuit for savings in terms of size and equipment
costs
• Various ramp-down modes selectable: free ramp-down,
torque-controlled pump stopping, combined DC braking
• Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection
• Thermistor motor protection
• Keypad with a menu-controlled, multi-line, graphic display with
background lighting
• Interface for communication with the PC for more accurate
setting of the parameters as well as for control and monitoring
• Simple adaptation to the motor feeder
• Simple mounting and commissioning
• Display of operating states and fault signals
• Connection to PROFIBUS with optional PROFIBUS DP module
• External display and operator module
• System voltages from 200 to 690 V, 50 to 60 Hz
• Applicable up to 60 °C (derating from 40 °C)
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/11Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
■Technical specifications
Type 3RW44 ..-.BC3. 3RW44 ..-.BC4.
Terminal
Control electronics
Rated values
Rated control supply voltage A1/A2/PE V 115 AC 230 AC
• Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated control supply current STANDBY mA 30 20
Rated control supply current ON
• 3RW44 2. mA 300 170
• 3RW44 3. mA 500 250
• 3RW44 4. mA 750 400
• 3RW44 5. mA 450 200
Maximum current (pickup bypass)
• 3RW44 2. mA 1000 500
• 3RW44 3. mA 2500 1250
• 3RW44 4. mA 6000 3000
• 3RW44 5. mA 4500 2500
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60 50 ... 60
• Tolerance % ±10 ±10
Type 3RW44 ..
Terminal Factory presetting
Control electronics
Control inputs
Input 1 IN1 Start motor right parameter set 1
Input 2 IN2 No action
Input 3 IN3 No action
Input 4 IN4 Trip reset
Supply L+/L-
• Rated operational current mA Approx. 10 per input to DIN 19240
• Rated operational voltage L+ Internal voltage: 24 V DC from inter-
nal supply through terminal L+ to
IN1 ... IN4. Maximum load at L+
approx. 55 mA
L- External voltage: DC external voltage
(to DIN19240) through terminals
L- and IN1 ... IN4
(min. 12 V DC, max. 30 V DC)
Thermistor motor protection input
Input T1/T2 PTC type A or Thermoclick Deactivated
Relay outputs (floating auxiliary contacts)
Output 1 13/14 ON period
Output 2 23/24 No action
Output 3 33/34 No action
Output 4 95/96/98 Group fault
Switching capacity of the relay outputs
230 V/AC-15 A 3 at 240 V
24 V/DC-13 A 1 at 24 V
Protection against overvoltages Protection by means of Varistor through relay contact
Short-circuit protection 4 A gL/gG operational class;
6 A quick (fuse is not included in scope of supply)
Protective functions
Motor protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the motor
Trip class to IEC 60947-4-1 Class 5/10/15/20/30 10
Phase failure sensitivity % > 40
Overload warning yes
Reset and recovery Manual/Automatic Manual
Reset option after tripping Manual/Automatic Manual
Recovery time min. 1 ... 30 1
Device protection functions
Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the thyristors
Reset option after tripping Manual/Automatic Manual
Recovery time min. 0.5
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/12 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
Type 3RW44 ..
Factory presetting
Control times and parameters
Control times
Closing delay (with connected control voltage) ms < 50
Closing delay (automatic mode) ms < 4000
Recovery time (closing command in active ramp-down) ms < 100
Mains failure bridging time
Control supply voltage ms 100
Mains failure response time
Load current circuit ms 100
Reclosing lockout after overload trip
Motor protection trip min. 1 ... 30 1
Device protection trip s 30
Setting options for starting
Voltage ramp for starting voltage % 20 ... 100 30
Torque control for starting torque % 20 ... 100 50
Torque control for limit torque % 20 ... 200 150
Starting time s 0 ... 360 20
Maximum starting time s 1 ... 1000 Deactivated
Current limit value % 125 ... 550 450
Breakaway voltage % 40 ... 100 80
Breakaway time s 0 ... 2 Deactivated
Motor heat output % 0 ... 100 0
Creep mode Left/Right running
Speed factor as function of rated speed (n = nrated/factor) 3 ... 21 7
Creep torque (reference variable depends on the motor used but is
always smaller than the rated torque of the motor)
% 20 ... 100 50
Setting options for ramp-down
Torque control for stopping torque % 10 ... 100 10
Ramp-down time s 0 ... 360 10
Dynamic braking torque % 20 ... 100 50
DC braking torque % 20 ... 100 50
Operating indications
Test voltage
Test mains phases
Ready to start
Start active
Motor running
Ramp-down active
Warnings/error signals
Mains voltage missing
Leading-edge phase error
Phase failure
• L1
• L2
• L3
Missing load phase
• T1
• T2
• T3
Failure
• Contact element 1 (thyristor)
• Contact element 2 (thyristor)
• Contact element 3 (thyristor)
Flash memory faulty
Supply voltage
• Below 75 %
• Below 85 %
• Over 110 %
Current unbalance exceeded
Thermal motor model overload
Prewarning limit exceeded
• Motor heating
• Time-related trip reserve
Bypass elements defective
Mains voltage too high
Device not named
Wrong naming version
Current range exceeded
Motor blocking – shutdown
Current limit exceeded
Power section
• Overheated
• Overtemperature
Emergency active
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/13Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) Parameter motor left possible only in conjunction with creep mode.
Type 3RW44 ..
Factory presetting
Control times and parameters
Warnings/error signals (contd.)
Temperature sensor
• Overload
• Open-circuit
• Short-circuit
Ground fault
• Detected
• Shutdown
Connection abort in manual mode
Max. number of starts exceeded
Ie limit value overshoot/undershoot
Cooling time
• Motor active
• Switch block active
Heat sink sensor
• Open-circuit
• Short-circuit
Quick-stop function
Switch block faulty
Ie/class setting not permissible
Control inputs
Input 1 Motor right parameter set 1
Input 2 No action
Input 3 No action
Input 4 Trip reset
Parameterizing options for control inputs 1 ... 4 No action
Local manual mode
Emergency start
Creep speed
Quick-stop
Trip reset
Motor right parameter set 1
Motor left parameter set 11)
Motor right parameter set 2
Motor left parameter set 21)
Motor right parameter set 3
Motor left parameter set 31)
Relay outputs
Output 1 ON period
Output 2 No action
Output 3 No action
Output 4 Group fault
Parameterizing options for relay outputs 1 ... 3 No action
PAA output 1
PAA output 2
Input 1
Input 2
Input 3
Input 4
Ramp-up
Operation/Bypass
Ramp-down
ON period
Command motor on
Fan
DC braking contactor
Group warning
Group fault
Bus fault
Device error
Power on
Ready to start
Motor temperature sensors Deactivated Deactivated
Thermoclick
PTC type A
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/14 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM.
2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone
installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for
automatic mode.
3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting.
Type 3RW44 ..-.BC.4 3RW44 ..-.BC.5 3RW44 ..-.BC.6
Power electronics
Rated operational voltage for inline circuit V 200 ... 460 AC 400 ... 600 AC 400 ... 690 AC
Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated operational voltage for inside-delta circuit V 200 ... 400 AC 400 ... 600 AC 400 ... 600 AC
Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10
Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60
Tolerance % ±10
Continuous operation at 40 °C (% of Ie) % 115
Minimum load (% of set motor current IM) % 8
Maximum conductor length between soft starter and motor m 200
Permissible installation height m 4000 (derating from 1000); higher on request
Permissible mounting position
Permissible ambient temperature
Operation °C 0 ... +60; (derating from +40)
Storage °C -25 ... +80
Degree of protection IP00
NSB00649
22,5° 22,5°
90°90°
Type 3RW44 22 3RW44 23 3RW44 24 3RW44 25 3RW44 26 3RW44 27
Power electronics
Rated operational current Ie 29 36 47 57 77 93
Load rating with rated operational current Ie
• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting,
at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 29/26/23 36/32/29 47/42/37 57/51/45 77/68/59 93/82/72
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM
for the motor overload protection
A 5 7 9 11 15 18
Power loss
• In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 8 10 32 36 45 55
• During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 400 470 600 725 940 1160
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour
• Normal starting (Class 5)
- Rated motor current IM
1), starting time 5 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 41 34 41 41 41 41
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 10 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20
• Normal starting (Class 10)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 10 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20
- Rated motor current IM
1)3), starting time 20 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 10 6 10 10 8 8
• Normal starting (Class 15)
- Rated motor current IM
1), starting time 15 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 13 9 13 13 13 13
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 30 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 4 6 6 6 6
• For heavy starting (Class 20)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 20 s A 29 36 47 57 73 88
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 6 10 10 10 10
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 40 s A 29 36 47 57 73 88
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 4 2 4 5 1.8 0.8
• For very heavy starting (Class 30)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 30 s A 29 36 44 57 65 77
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 6 4 6 6 6 6
- Rated motor current IM
1)3), starting time 60 s A 29 36 44 57 65 77
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 1.8 0.8 3.3 1.5 2 1
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/15Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM.
2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone
installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for
automatic mode.
3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting.
Type 3RW44 34 3RW44 35 3RW44 36
Power electronics
Rated operational current Ie 113 134 162
Load rating with rated operational current Ie
• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting,
at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 113/100/88 134/117/100 162/145/125
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM
for the motor overload protection
A 22 26 32
Power loss
• In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 64 76 95
• During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 1350 1700 2460
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour
• Normal starting (Class 5)
- Rated motor current IM
1), starting time 5 s A 113 134 162
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 41 39 41
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 10 s A 113 134 162
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20
• Normal starting (Class 10)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 10 s A 113 134 162
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 20 s A 113 134 162
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 9 6 7
• Normal starting (Class 15)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 15 s A 113 134 162
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 13 9 12
- Rated motor current IM
1)3), starting time 30 s A 113 134 162
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 6 6 1
• For heavy starting (Class 20)
- Rated motor current IM
1), starting time 20 s A 106 125 147
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 9 9 10
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 40 s A 106 125 147
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 1.5 2 1
• For very heavy starting (Class 30)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 30 s A 91 110 120
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 6 6
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 60 s A 91 110 120
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 2 2 2
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/16 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM.
2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone
installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for
automatic mode.
3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting.
Type 3RW44 43 3RW44 44 3RW44 45 3RW44 46 3RW44 47
Power electronics
Rated operational current Ie 203 250 313 356 432
Load rating with rated operational current Ie
• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting,
at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 203/180/156 250/215/185 313/280/250 356/315/280 432/385/335
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM
for the motor overload protection
A 40 50 62 71 86
Power loss
• In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 89 110 145 174 232
• During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 3350 4000 4470 5350 5860
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour
• Normal starting (Class 5)
- Rated motor current IM
1), starting time 5 s A 203 250 313 356 432
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 41 41 41 41 39
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 10 s A 203 250 313 356 432
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 19 17 16
• Normal starting (Class 10)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 10 s A 203 250 313 356 432
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 19 17 16
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 20 s A 203 250 313 356 432
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 9 10 6 4 5
• Normal starting (Class 15)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 15 s A 203 240 313 325 402
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 13 13 10 13 11
- Rated motor current IM
1)3), starting time 30 s A 203 240 313 325 402
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 3 6 1 2 1
• For heavy starting (Class 20)
- Rated motor current IM
1), starting time 20 s A 195 215 275 285 356
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 10 10 10 10 10
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 40 s A 195 215 275 285 356
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 1 5 1 3 1
• For very heavy starting (Class 30)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 30 s A 162 180 220 240 285
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 6 6 6 6
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 60 s A 162 180 220 240 285
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 3 3 3 2 1
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/17Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM.
2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone
installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for
automatic mode.
3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting.
Type 3RW44 53 3RW44 54 3RW44 55 3RW44 56 3RW44 57
Power electronics
Rated operational current Ie 551 615 693 780 880
Load rating with rated operational current Ie
• Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting,
at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 551/494/438 615/551/489 693/615/551 780/693/615 880/780/693
Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM
for the motor overload protection
A 110 123 138 156 176
Power loss
• In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated
operational current (40 °C) approx. W 159 186 220 214 250
• During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 7020 8100 9500 11100 13100
Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour
• Normal starting (Class 5)
- Rated motor current IM
1), starting time 5 s A 551 615 693 780 880
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 41 41 37 33 22
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 10 s A 551 615 693 780 880
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 16 13 8
• Normal starting (Class 10)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 10 s A 551 615 693 780 880
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 16 13 8
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 20 s A 551 615 693 780 880
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 10 9 6 4 0.3
• Normal starting (Class 15)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 15 s A 551 615 666 723 780
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 13 13 11 9 8
- Rated motor current IM
1)3), starting time 30 s A 551 615 666 723 780
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 6 4 3 1 0.4
• For heavy starting (Class 20)
- Rated motor current IM
1), starting time 20 s A 551 591 633 670 710
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 10 10 7 8 8
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 40 s A 551 591 633 670 710
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 4 2 1 1 0.4
• For very heavy starting (Class 30)
- Rated motor current IM
1)
, starting time 30 s A 500 525 551 575 600
- Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 6 6 6 6
- Rated motor current IM
1)3)
, starting time 60 s A 500 525 551 575 600
- Starts per hour2)
1/h 2 1 1 1 1.5
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/18 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235 use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal
cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing.
2) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal
cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as
well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to
keep the phase clearance.
Type 3RW44 2. 3RW44 3., 3RW44 4. 3RW44 5.
Conductor cross-sections
Screw
terminals
Main conductors:
with box terminal 3RT19 55-4G (55 kW) 3RT19 66-4G
Front clamping
point connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240
• Stranded mm2
16 ... 70 95 ... 300
• Ribbon cable conductors
(number x width x thickness)
mm min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
min. 6 x 9 x 0.8
max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 3/0 ... 600 kcmil
Rear clamping point
connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
16 ... 70 120 ... 185
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2
16 ... 70 120 ... 185
• Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 240
• Ribbon cable conductors
(number x width x thickness)
mm min. 3 x 9 x 0.8,
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
min. 6 x 9 x 0.8
max. 20 x 24 x 0.5
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 250 ... 500 kcmil
Both clamping
points connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185
• Stranded mm2
max. 2 x 70 max. 2 x 70; max. 2 x 240
• Ribbon cable conductors
(number x width x thickness)
mm max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG max. 2 x 1/0 min. 2 x 2/0;
max. 2 x 500 kcmil
• Terminal screws M10 (hexagon socket, A/F4) M12 (hexagon socket, A/F5)
- Pickup torque 10 ... 12 20 ... 22
90 ... 110 180 ... 195
Screw
terminals
Main conductors:
with box terminal 3RT19 56-4G
Front or rear clamp-
ing point connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
16 ... 120
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120
• Stranded mm2
16 ... 120
• Ribbon cable conductors
(number x width x thickness)
mm min. 3 x 9 x 0.8
max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 250 kcmil
Both clamping
points connected
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
• Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2
max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120
• Stranded mm2 max. 2 x 120
• Ribbon cable conductors
(number x width x thickness)
mm max. 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG max. 2 x 3/0
Screw
terminals
Main conductors:
Without box terminal/rail connection
• Finely stranded with cable lug mm2
16 ... 951)
50 ... 2402)
50 ... 2402)
• Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 ... 1201) 70 ... 2402) 70 ... 2402)
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil 1/0 ... 500 kcmil
• Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17 25 60
• Terminal screws M8 x 25 (A/F13) M10 x 30 (A/F17) M12 x 40
- Pickup torque NM 10 ... 14 14 ... 24 20 ... 35
lb.in 89 ... 124 124 ... 210 177 ... 310
NSB00479NSB00480NSB00481NSB00479
NSB00480
NSB00481
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/19Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
Soft starters Type 3RW44 ..
Conductor cross-sections
Auxiliary conductors (1 or 2 conductors can be connected):
Screw terminals
• Solid mm2 2 x 0.5 ... 2.5
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
2 x 0.5 ... 1.5
• AWG cables
- Solid or stranded AWG 2 x 20 ... 14
- Finely stranded with end sleeve AWG 2 x 20 ... 16
• Terminal screws
- Pickup torque NM 0.7 ... 0.9
lb.in 7 ... 8
Spring-loaded terminals
• Solid mm2
2 x 0.25 ... 2.5
• Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x 0.25 ... 1.5
• AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x 24 ... 14
Standard Parameters
Electromagnetic compatibility acc. to EN 60947-4-2
EMC interference immunity
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 ±4 kV contact discharge, ±8 kV air discharge
Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 ... 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Degree of severity 3, 10 V/m
Conducted RF interference EN 61000-4-6 Frequency range: 150 kHz ... 80 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz
Interference 10 V
RF voltages and RF currents on conductors
Burst EN 61000-4-4 ±2 kV/5 kHz
Surge EN 61000-4-5 ±1 kV line to line
±2 kV line to ground
EMC interference emission
EMC interference field strength EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz
Radio interference voltage EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz
Is an RI suppression filter necessary?
Degree of noise suppression A (industrial applications) no
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/20 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
Fuse assignment
The coordination type to which the motor feeder with soft starter
is mounted depends on the application-specific requirements.
Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of motor starter pro-
tector and soft starter) is sufficient. If type 2 coordination is to be
fulfilled, semiconductor fuses must be fitted in the motor feeder.
1) The rated motor current must be considered when selecting the devices.
2) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the
Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders.
Inline circuit fuseless version
Soft starters Motor starter protectors/circuit-breakers1)
Rated current 440 V +10 % Rated current
G1 Q1
Type A Type A
Type of coordination 12): 3RW44 22 ... 3RW44 27: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW44 34 and 3RW44 35: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW44 36 ... 3RW44 57: Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3RV10 42-4HA10 50
3RW44 23 36 3RV10 42-4JA10 63
3RW44 24 47 3RV10 42-4KA10 75
3RW44 25 57 3RV10 42-4LA10 90
3RW44 26 77 3RV10 42-4MA10 100
3RW44 27 93 3RV10 42-4MA10 100
3RW44 34 113 3VL17 16-2DD36 160
3RW44 35 134 3VL17 16-2DD36 160
3RW44 36 162 3VL37 25-2DC36 250
3RW44 43 203 3VL47 31-3DC36 315
3RW44 44 250 3VL47 31-3DC36 315
3RW44 45 313 3VL47 40-3DC36 400
3RW44 46 356 3VL47 40-3DC36 400
3RW44 47 432 3VL57 50-3DC36 500
3RW44 53 551 3VL67 80-3DE36 800
3RW44 54 615 3VL67 80-3DE36 800
3RW44 55 693 3VL67 80-3DE36 800
3RW44 56 780 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000
3RW44 57 880 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000
G 1
NSB0_01016
M
3 ~
Q 1
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/21Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking
contactor is required.
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
must also be used (see table for type).
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we
recommend the function "DC braking".
2) Additional auxiliary relay K4:
LZX:RT4A4T30
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
LZX:RT4A4S15
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the
Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders.
Inline circuit fused version (line protection only)
Soft starters Line protections Line contactors
up to 400 V
Braking contactors1)2)
Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size (optional) (for typical circuit see page 6/32)
G1 F1 K1 K2 K3
Type A Type A Type Type Type
Type of coordination 13): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3NA3 820-6 50 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 --
3RW44 23 36 3NA3 822-6 63 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 --
3RW44 24 47 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 --
3RW44 25 57 3NA3 830-6 100 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 --
3RW44 26 77 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35
3RW44 27 93 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36
3RW44 34 113 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44
3RW44 35 134 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45
3RW44 36 162 3NA3 365-6 500 3 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45
3RW44 43 203 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54
3RW44 44 250 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55
3RW44 45 313 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 46 356 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 47 432 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64
3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7
3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7
3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7
3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7
3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7
F 1
NSB0_01477
M
3 ~
K 1
G 1
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/22 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking
contactor is required.
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
must also be used (see table for type).
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we
recommend the function "DC braking".
2) Additional auxiliary relay K4:
LZX:RT4A4T30
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
LZX:RT4A4S15
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the
Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders.
Inline circuit fused version with 3NE1 SITOR all-range fuse (semiconductor and line protection)
Soft starters All-range fuses Line contactors up
to 400 V
Braking contactors1)2)
Rated
current
Rated current Voltage Size (optional) (for typical circuit see page 6/32)
G1 F’1 K1 K2 K3
Type A Type A V Type Type Type
Type of coordination 23): Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 --
3RW44 23 36 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 --
3RW44 24 47 3NE1 021-2 100 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 --
3RW44 25 57 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 --
3RW44 26 77 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35
3RW44 27 93 3NE1 024-2 160 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36
3RW44 34 113 3NE1 225-2 200 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44
3RW44 35 134 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45
3RW44 36 162 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45
3RW44 43 203 3NE1 230-2 315 600 +10 % 1 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54
3RW44 44 250 3NE1 331-2 350 460 +10 % 2 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55
3RW44 45 313 3NE1 333-2 450 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 46 356 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56
3RW44 47 432 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +5 % 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64
3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7
3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7
3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7
3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7
3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7
NSB0_01478
M
3 ~
K 1
G 1
F ´ 1
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/23Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking
contactor is required.
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
must also be used (see table for type).
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we
recommend the function "DC braking".
2) Additional auxiliary relay K4:
LZX:RT4A4T30
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC),
LZX:RT4A4S15
(3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC).
3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the
Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders.
Inline circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR semiconductor fuse
(semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by circuit-breaker)
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)
Rated
current
Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size
G1 F3 F3 F3
Type A Type A Type A Type A
Type of coordination 23)
: Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW44 23 36 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 24 47 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 25 57 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 26 77 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 27 93 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 34 113 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 35 134 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 36 162 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 43 203 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 44 250 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 45 313 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 46 356 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 47 432 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
Soft starters Line contactors
up to 400 V
Braking contactors1)2)
Motor starter protectors/
circuit-breakers
Line protections
Rated
current
(optional) (for typical circuit see page 6/32) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size
G1 K1 Q1 F1
Type A Type Type A Type A
Type of coordination 23): 3RW44 22 ... 3RW44 27: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW44 34 and 3RW44 35: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW44 36 ... 3RW44 57: Iq = 65 kA
3RW44 22 29 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 -- 3RV10 42-4HA10 50 3NA3 820-6 50 00
3RW44 23 36 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 -- 3RV10 42-4JA10 63 3NA3 822-6 63 00
3RW44 24 47 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 -- 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW44 25 57 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 -- 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00
3RW44 26 77 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW44 27 93 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW44 34 113 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44 3VL17 16-2DD36 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 35 134 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45 3VL17 16-2DD36 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 36 162 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3VL37 25-2DC36 250 3NA3 365-6 500 3
3RW44 43 203 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW44 44 250 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3
3RW44 45 313 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 46 356 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 47 432 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64 3VL57 50-3DC36 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 53 551 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 54 615 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 55 693 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 56 780 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 57 880 2 x
3TF69 44-0CM7
2 x
3TF69 44-0CM7
2 x
3TF69 44-0CM7
3VL77 10-3AB36 1000 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
F 3
NSB0_01019a
G 1
Q 1
M
3 ~
F 1
NSB0_01479a
M
3 ~
K 1
G 1
F 3
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/24 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
1) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the
Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders.
Inside-delta circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR fuses
(semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by circuit-breaker)
Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses (cylinder)
Rated
current
Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size
G1 F3 F3 F3
Type A Type A Type A Type A
Type of coordination 21)
3RW44 22 50 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58
3RW44 23 62 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 24 81 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58
3RW44 25 99 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 26 133 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0
3RW44 27 161 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 34 196 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 35 232 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2
3RW44 36 281 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 43 352 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 44 433 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2
3RW44 45 542 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 46 617 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2
3RW44 47 748 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2
3RW44 53 954 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 54 1065 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 55 1200 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2
3RW44 56 1351 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
3RW44 57 1524 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 3 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2
Soft starters Line contactors
up to 400 V
Motor starter protectors/
cirduit-breakers
Line protections
Rated
current
(optional) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size
G1 K1 Q1 F1
Type A Type Type A Type A
Type of coordination 21)
3RW44 22 50 3RT10 36-1AP04 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00
3RW44 23 62 3RT10 44-1AP04 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00
3RW44 24 81 3RT10 46-1AP04 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1
3RW44 25 99 3RT10 54-1AP36 3VL27 16-2DC36 160 3NA3 136-6 160 1
3RW44 26 133 3RT10 55-6AP36 3VL27 16-2DC36 160 3NA3 240-6 200 2
3RW44 27 161 3RT10 56-6AP36 3VL37 20-2DC36 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2
3RW44 34 196 3RT10 64-6AP36 3VL37 25-2DC36 250 3NA3 360-6 400 3
3RW44 35 232 3RT10 65-6AP36 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 3NA3 360-6 400 3
3RW44 36 281 3RT10 66-6AP36 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 360-6 2 x 400 3
3RW44 43 352 3RT10 75-6AP36 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 44 433 3RT10 76-6AP36 3VL57 50-3DC36 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3
3RW44 45 542 3TF68 44-0CM7 3WL12 08 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 46 617 3TF68 44-0CM7 3WL12 08 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 47 748 3TF69 3WL12 10 1000 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 53 954 2 x 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL77 10 1000 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 54 1065 2 x 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL77 12 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 55 1200 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3
3RW44 56 1351 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 372 3 x 630 3
3RW44 57 1524 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 372 3 x 630 3
F 3
NSB0_01596
G 1
Q 1
M
3 ~
F 1
NSB0_01597
M
3 ~
K 1
G 1
F 3
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/25Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
■Characteristic curves
Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW44
(with symmetry)
e
2 4 6 101
Class 10 Class 15 Class 20
100
101
102
103
2
4
6
2
4
6
2
4
6
Class 5 Class 30
NSB0_01500
[s]
x
Trippingtime
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/26 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
■More information
Application examples for normal starting (Class 10)
Application examples for heavy starting (Class 20)
Application examples for very heavy starting (Class 30)
Note:
These tables present sample setting values and device sizes.
They are intended only for the purposes of information and are
not binding. The setting values depend on the application in
question and must be optimized during commissioning.
The soft starter dimensions should be checked where necessary
with the Win-Soft Starter software or with the help of
Technical Assistance.
Normal starting Class 10 (up to 20 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used
Application Conveyor belts Roller conveyors Compressors Small ventilators Pumps Hydraulic pumps
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Starting voltage % 70 60 50 30 30 30
- Starting time s 10 10 10 10 10 10
- Current limit value Deactivated Deactivated 4 x IM 4 x IM Deactivated Deactivated
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 60 50 40 20 10 10
- End torque 150 150 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 10 10 10 10 10 10
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Smooth
ramp-down
Smooth
ramp-down
Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Pump ramp-down Free ramp-down
Heavy starting Class 20 (up to 40 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter has to be selected one rating class higher than the motor used
Application Stirrers Centrifuges Milling machines
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Starting voltage % 30 30 30
- Starting time s 30 30 30
- Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 30 30 30
- End torque 150 150 150
- Starting time 30 30 30
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down or DC braking
Very heavy starting Class 30 (up to 60 s with 350 % In motor),
The soft starter has to be selected two rating classes higher than the motor used
Application Large ventilators Mills Breakers Circular saw/bandsaws
Starting parameters
• Voltage ramp and current
limiting
- Starting voltage % 30 50 50 30
- Starting time s 60 60 60 60
- Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM
• Torque ramp
- Starting torque 20 50 50 20
- End torque 150 150 150 150
- Starting time 60 60 60 60
• Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) 80 %, 300 ms 80 %, 300 ms Deactivated (0 ms)
Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down
3RW Soft Starters
3RW44
for High-Feature applications
6/27Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
Circuit concept
The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be operated in two different
types of circuit.
• Inline circuit
The controls for isolating and protecting the motor are simply
connected in series with the soft starter. The motor is
connected to the soft starter with three leads.
• Inside-delta circuit
The wiring is similar to that of wye-delta starters. The phases of
the soft starter are connected in series with the individual motor
windings. The soft starter then only has to carry the phase
current, amounting to about 58 % of the rated motor current
(conductor current).
Comparison of the types of circuit
Inline circuit:
Rated current Ie corresponds to the rated motor current In,
3 leads to the motor
Inside-delta circuit:
Rated current Ie corresponds to approx. 58 % of the rated motor
current In,
6 leads to the motor (as with wye-delta starters)
Which circuit?
Using the inline circuit involves the lowest wiring complexity.
If the soft starter to motor connections are long, this contact
sequence is preferable.
With the inside-delta circuit there is double the wiring complexity
but a smaller size of device can be used at the same rating.
Thanks to the possibility of switching between the inline circuit
and inside-delta circuit, the most favorable solution can always
be chosen.
The braking function is possible only in the inline circuit.
Configuration
The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal
starting. In case of heavy starting or increased starting
frequency, a larger device must be selected.
For long starting times it is recommended to have a PTC ther-
mistor detector in the motor. This also applies for the ramp-down
modes smooth ramp-down, pump ramp-down and DC braking,
because during the ramp-down time in these modes, an addi-
tional current loading applies in contrast to free ramp-down.
In the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the
motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e.g. no reactive-
power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static
systems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC
(Power Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during
starting and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is important to
prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the
soft starter.
All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and controls)
should be dimensioned for direct starting, following the local
short-circuit conditions. Fuses, switching devices and overload
relays must be ordered separately.
The harmonic component load for starting currents must be
taken into consideration for the selection of motor starter
protectors (selection of release).
Serial PC interface RS 232 and parameterizing and operating
software Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart
The solid-state 3RW44 soft starters have a PC interface for
communicating with the Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart software
and an operating and monitoring module.
Manual for SIRIUS 3RW44
Besides containing all important information on planning, com-
missioning and servicing, the manual also contains suggested
circuits and the technical specifications for all devices.
Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program
With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft
starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains
properties, motor and load data, and special application
requirements.
The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated,
lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft
starters superfluous.
You can order the CD-ROM under the following order number:
Order No.: E20001-D1020-P302-V2-7400.
More information can be found on the Internet at
http://www.siemens.com/softstarter
SIRIUS soft starter training course (SD-SIRIUSO)
Siemens offers a 2-day training course on the SIRIUS solid-state
soft starters to keep customers and own personnel up-to-date on
configuring, commissioning and servicing issues.
Please direct enquiries and applications to:
Training Center
I&S IS E&C TC
Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 65
D-91052 Erlangen
Telephone: ++49 9131 729262
Telefax: ++49 9131 728172
sibrain@erl9.siemens.de
http://www.siemens.com/sitrain
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 2 4L 1
L 2
L 3
N
P E
N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 2 5L 1
L 2
L 3
N
P E
W 2 W 1 T 3 L 3
V 1
V 2
L 2
T 2
U 2
U 1
T 1
L 1
3RW Soft Starters
Project planning aids
6/28 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
■Dimensional drawings
3RW44 2., 3RW44 3. and 3RW44 4. for High-Feature applications
l
e
f
b
p
k
i
o
h
g
m
a
c nd
N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 9 3
q
Type/Dimension
(mm)
a b c d e f g h I k l m n o p q
3RW44 2. 180 170 37 11 167 100 240 270 180 148 7,5 153 7 184 6,6 M6, 10 Nm
3RW44 3. 180 170 37 17 167 100 240 270 180 148 7,5 153 7 198 9 M6, 10 Nm
3RW44 4. 210 210 48 25 190 140 269 298 205 166 16 166 9 230 11 M8, 15 Nm
3RW Soft Starters
Project planning aids
6/29Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
3RW44 5. for High-Feature applications
147
173
195
118
NSB0_01653
261
290
249
162
152
623
105
253
16,5
76
44
470
510
15,5
20
Ø14 40
638,5
590
3RW Soft Starters
Project planning aids
6/30 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
■Schematics
1) Permissible values for main and control voltage,
see Technical Specifications.
3RW44 connection examples for main and control circuits
Main circuit Control circuit
Possibility 1a: Possibility 1:
Inline circuit with circuit-breaker and SITOR fuse
(semiconductor protection only)
Control by pushbutton
Main circuit
Possibility 1b: Possibility 1c:
Inline circuit with full-range
protection (line and
semiconductor protection)
Inline circuit with line and
SITOR fuse
(semiconductor protection only)
Q1
L3
L2
L1
G1
F3
T1 T2 T3
M1
NSB0_01490a
L1 L2 L3
V1U1 W1
M
PE 3~
3/N/PE 400 V AC, 50 Hz
(optional
semiconductor
protection fuse)
13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
96 +
T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1
A2
N
PE
PE
G1
F2
NSB0_01494a
StartS2
ResetS3
Stop
S1
L1
On period
Group
error
Noaction
Noaction
No
action
PTC type A
or
Thermoclick
No
action
1/N/PE 230 V AC , 50 Hz
Motoronright
PS1
1)
G 1
L 1 L 2 L 3
T 1 T 2 T 3
M 1
NSB0_01491
F 1 '
V 1U 1 W 1
M
P E 3 ~
L 3
L 2
L 1 3 / N / P E A C 4 0 0 V , 5 0 H z1 )
G 1
F 3
L 1 L 2 L 3
T 1 T 2 T 3
M 1
NSB0_01492
F 1
V 1U 1 W 1
M
P E 3 ~
L 3
L 2
L 1 3 / N / P E A C 4 0 0 V , 5 0 H z1 )
3RW Soft Starters
Project planning aids
6/31Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) Permissible values for main and control voltage,
see Technical Specifications.
2) Caution. Risk of restarting!
The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset
command because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically
if a start command is active after the reset command. This applies
especially in case of motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
Main circuit Control circuit
Possibility 2: Possibility 2:
Inline circuit with main contactor Control of a main contactor and control by means of PLC
Q1
L3
L2
L1
G1
K1
F3
L1 L2 L3
T1 T2 T3
M1
NSB0_01495a
V1U1 W1
M
PE 3~
1)
(optional
semiconductor
protection)
(optional line
contactor if floating
switching of the
motor is planned)
3/N/PE 400 V AC , 50 Hz
13 14 23 24 33 34 95 9896
+
T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1
A2
N
PE
PE
G1
K1
NSB0_01496a
F2
+24 V DC
M
L1 1/N/PE AC 230 V , 50 Hz1)
Switch-on duration
Motorright
TripReset
PLC outputs PLC inputs
Noaction
Noaction
No action No action
Group error
PTC type A /
Thermoclick
(optional line contactor
if floating switching
of the motor is planned)
PS1
ResetStart 2)
3RW Soft Starters
Project planning aids
6/32 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
1) Permissible values for main and control voltage,
see Technical Specifications.
2) Caution. Risk of restarting!
The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset
command because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically
if a start command is active after the reset command. This applies espe-
cially in case of motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
3) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking
contactor is required.
If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor
must be used in addition. Type, see Fuse Coordination (inline circuit) on
pages 6/21 to 6/23.
For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we
recommend the function "DC braking".
The output 2 must be switched over to "DC braking contactor".
4) Auxiliary relay K4, e.g.:
LZX:RT4A4T30 (230 V AC rated control supply voltage),
LZX:RT4A4S15 (115 V AC rated control supply voltage).
Main circuit Control circuit
Possibility 3a: Possibility 3a:
Inline circuit with ramp-down function DC braking3)
(for device types 3RW44 22 to 3RW44 25)
Control of the braking contactor3)
Main circuit Control circuit
Possibility 3b: Possibility 3b:
Inline circuit with ramp-down function DC braking3)
(for device types 3RW44 26 to 3RW44 47)
Control of the braking contactor3)
Q1
L3
L2
G1
F3
T1 T2 T3
M1
NSB0_01501a
L1 L2 L3
V1U1 W1
M
K2 K2 K2
PE 3~
1)
2
(optional
semi-
conductor
protection)
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC , 50 Hz
13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
96 +
T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1
A2
N
PE
PE
G1
K2
NSB0_01502
Reset
M Start Reset
+24 V DC
K2
F2
1)
2)
No action Group error
Noaction
Noaction
On period
PLC output
PTC type A
or
Thermoclick
L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC , 50 Hz
DC braking contactor 3)
K2 K3
3 3
G1
F3
T1 T2 T3
M1
NSB0_01503a
L1 L2 L3
V1U1 W1
M
PE 3~
Q1
L3
L2
1)
(optional
semi-
conductor
protection)
L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC , 50 Hz
13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98
96 +
T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1
A2
N
PE
PE
G1
K4
NSB0_01504
Reset
K4 K4
K3 K2
K2 K3
+24 V DC
M Start Reset
F2
1)
2)
4)
PLC output
No action Group error
Noaction
Noaction
ON period
PTC type A
or
Thermoclick
Motoronright
L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC , 50 Hz
DC braking contactor 3)
3RW Soft Starters
Project planning aids
6/33Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
66
1) Permissible values for main and control voltage,
see Technical Specifications.
2) Caution. Risk of restarting!
The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset
command because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically
if a start command is active after the reset command. This applies
especially in case of motor protection tripping.
For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output
(terminals 95 and 96) in the controller.
Main circuit Control circuit
Possibility 4a: Possibility 4b: Possibility 4:
Inside-delta circuit Change of direction of rotation for
inside-delta circuit
Control by means of PLC
M
V 1 W 1
U 2
U 1
W 2 V 2
G 1
M 1
NSB0_01497a
L 1 L 2 L 3
T 1 T 2 T 3
Q 1
F 3
K 1
P E
3 ~
L 3
L 2
1 )L 1 3 / N / P E A C 4 0 0 V , 5 0 H z
L 1 L 2 L 3
T 1 T 2 T 3
M 1
NSB0_01499a
M
V 1U 1 W 1
U 2W 2 V 2
P E
3 ~
Q 1
L 3
L 2
1 )
G 1
F 3
L 1 3 / N / P E A C 4 0 0 V , 5 0 H z
13 14 23 24 33 34 95 9896
+
T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1
A2
N
PE
PE
G1
NSB0_01498a
+24 V DC
M
F2
L1 1/N/PE AC 230 V , 50 Hz
1)
2)
Reset
Switch-on
duration
No action
Group error
Noaction
Noaction
No action
PTC type A or
Thermoclick
Motorright
PLC outputs PLC inputs
Start Reset
3RW Soft Starters
Notes
6/34 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
6
7
Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays
for Electrical and Additional
Measurements
Power factor and active current
monitoring
7/2 - Overview
7/2 - Benefits
7/2 - Application
7/2 - Selection and ordering data
7/3 - Accessories
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays
for Electrical and Additional
Measurements
Power factor and active current
monitoring
7/4 - Function
7/6 - Technical specifications
7/7 - Dimensional drawings
7/8 - Schematics
Monitoring and
Control Devices
Catalog
Technical Information
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor and active current monitoring
7/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
7
■Overview
The 3UG46 41 power factor and active current monitoring
device enables the load monitoring of motors.
Whereas power factor monitoring is used above all for monitor-
ing no-load operation, the active current monitoring option can
be used to observe and evaluate the load factor over the entire
torque range.
■Benefits
• Can be used world-wide thanks to voltage range from
90 to 690 V
• Monitoring of even small single-phase motors with a no-load
supply current below 0.5 A
• Simple determination of threshold values through direct
referencing from measured variable to motor load
• Window monitoring and active current measurement are used
to detect phase failure as well as a broken cable between the
control cabinet and the motor
• Power factor or active current can be selected as
measurement principle
■Application
• No-load monitoring and load shedding, e.g. in the event of a
torn V-belt
• Underload monitoring in the low rating range, e.g. in the event
of pump no-load operation
• Monitoring of overload, e.g. due to a dirty filter system
• Simple power factor monitoring in networks for control of
compensation equipment
• Broken cable between control cabinet and motor
■Selection and ordering data
Relay for monitoring the power factor and the active current,
(p.f. x Ires),
overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring,
single and three-phase, overall width 22.5 mm
Digitally adjustable, with LCD display
• Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted separately
• 1 changeover contact each for undershoot/overshoot
• Permanent display of actual value and release status
Measuring range Hysteresis ON delay OFF delay Rated control
supply volt-
age Us
DT Screw
terminal
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
for power
factor
for active
current
Ires
for
power
factor
for active
current
Ires
AC 50/60 Hz
p.f. A p.f. A s s V
Order No. Price
per PU kg
0.10 ... 0.99 0.2 ... 10.0 0.1 0.1 ... 2.0 0 ... 99 0.1 ... 20.0 90 ... 690 A 3UG46 41-1CS20 1 1 unit 101 0.147
Measuring range Hysteresis ON delay OFF delay Rated control
supply
voltage Us
DT Spring-loaded
terminal
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
for power
factor
for active
current
Ires
for
power
factor
for active
current
Ires
AC 50/60 Hz
p.f. A p.f. A s s V
Order No. Price
per PU kg
0.10 ... 0.99 0.2 ... 10.0 0.1 0.1 ... 2.0 0 ... 99 0.1 ... 20.0 90 ... 690 A 3UG46 41-2CS20 1 1 unit 101 0.147
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor and active current monitoring
7/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
77
■Accessories
1) Computer labeling system for individual labeling of device labeling plates
available from:
murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH.
Use Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
Blank labeling plates
Blank labeling plates, 20 mm x 7 mm,
pastel turquoise1)
C 3RT19 00-1SB20 100 340 units 101 22.000
Push-in lugs and sealable caps
for devices
with 1 or 2 CO
contacts
Plug-in lugs
for screw fixing
(1 set = 2 units)
} 3RP19 03 1 10 units 101 0.002
for devices
with 1 or 2 CO
contacts
Sealable caps
for securing against unauthorized
adjustment of setting knobs
} 3RP19 02 1 5 units 101 0.004
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor and active current monitoring
7/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
7
■Function
The 3UG46 41 voltage monitoring relay has an internal power
supply and performs single-phase monitoring of the power
factor or overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring of the
resulting active current, depending on which option is selected.
The load to be monitored is connected in front of the IN terminal.
The load current flows through the IN and Ly/N terminals. The
setting range for the power factor is 0.1 ... 0.99 and for the active
current 0.2 ... 10 A.
If no load current flows when the supply voltage is switched on,
the display indicates I < 0.2 and shows a symbol for overshoot,
undershoot or window monitoring.
If the current exceeds 0.2 A when the motor is now switched on,
the set start-up delay time (onDelay) starts. During this time, an
undershooting or overshooting of the set limit values will not lead
to a relay response of the changeover contact.
If the operational flowing active current and/or the power factor
value overshoots or undershoots the corresponding selected
threshold value, the fault peak delay time (Delay) starts. When
this time has elapsed, the relay changes its switching position.
The responsible measured variable for the overshooting or
undershooting flashes in the display.
The relay works selectably by the open-circuit or closed-circuit
principle.
If the device is set to Auto-RESET (Memory = No), the relay
returns to its original status according to the principle of opera-
tion is set and the flashing is ended once the hysteresis
threshold is reached.
If manual reset is selected in the menu (Memory = Yes), the
switching relay remains in its current switching status and the
current measured value and the symbol for overshoot or under-
shoot continue to flash even when the measured variable adopts
a permissible value again. This stored fault status can be reset
by simultaneously pressing the UP▲ or DOWN▼ key for
2 seconds or by switching the supply voltage off and on.
With the closed-circuit principle selected
Indication outside the measurement range limits
Overshooting of the active current
Undershooting of the active current
Window monitoring of the active current
NSB0_01658
21/24
21/22
11/14
11/12
< 0,2 A
Lx-Ly/N
= 0,2 A
= 0
onDelay onDelay
NSB0_01659
21/24
21/22
11/14
11/12
> res
= 0
res
DelayonDelay
Hysteresis
NSB0_01660
21/24
21/22
11/14
11/12
< res
= 0
res
DelayonDelay
Hysteresis
NSB0_01661
21/24
21/22
11/14
11/12
< res
= 0
> res
res
res
DelayonDelay Delay
Hysteresis
Hysteresis
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor and active current monitoring
7/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
77
Overshooting of the power factor
Undershooting of the power factor
Window monitoring of the power factor
Legend
p.f.: power factor
NSB0_01662
21/24
21/22
11/14
11/12
> cos
cos = 0
cos
p.f.
DelayonDelay
Hysteresis 0,10
cos = 0
NSB0_01663
21/24
21/22
11/14
11/12
< cos
cos
p.f.
Hysteresis 0,10
DelayonDelay
cos = 0
NSB0_01664
21/24
21/22
11/14
11/12
> cos < cos
cos
cos
p.f.
Hysteresis
0,10
DelayonDelay Delay
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor and active current monitoring
7/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
7
■Technical specifications
1) Caution: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this
device may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce
suitable measures.
Type 3UG46 41
General data
Rated control supply voltage Us V 90 … 690
Rated frequency Hz 50/60
Rated output, typical
• At 200 V AC VA 2.0
• At 400 V AC VA 2.7
• At 460 V AC VA 3.1
Width mm 22.5
RESET Automatic/ manual
Function principle Closed-circuit principle, open-circuit principle
Availability time after application of Us ms 1000
Response time on occurrence of a fault ms 300
Adjustable tripping delay time s 0.1 ... 20
Adjustable ON-delay time s 0 ... 99
Mains buffering time, typical ms 10
Rated insulation voltage Ui
Degree of pollution 3
Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110
V 690
Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 6000
Permissible ambient temperature
• During operation °C -25 … +60
• During storage °C -40 … +85
EMC tests1)
IEC 60947-1/ IEC 61000-6-2 / IEC 61000-6-4
Degree of protection
• Enclosure IP40
• Terminals IP20
Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 5 ... 25/0.75
Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27 g/ ms 15/11
Conductor cross-section
• Screw terminal M3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2)
- Solid mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 4) / 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5)
- Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2
1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) / 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 14)
- Tightening torque NM 0.8 … 1.2
• Spring-loaded terminals
- Solid mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228 mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- Finely stranded mm2
2 x (0.25 ... 1.5)
- AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 16)
Measuring circuits
Measurable active current Ires A 0.2 ... 10
Max. permissible load current A 10
Peak current < 1 s A 50
Adjustable response value
Phase displacement angle
0.1 ... 0.99
DIAZED protection, gL/gG operational class A 16
Measuring accuracy % 10
Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % 1
Accuracy of digital display ± 1 digit
Deviations for temperature fluctuations %/°C ± 0.1
Hysteresis Phase angle 0.10
Hysteresis Active current monitoring A 0.1 ... 2.0
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor and active current monitoring
7/7Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
77
■Dimensional drawings
1) For standard mounting rail according to EN 50022.
Type 3UG46 41
Control circuit
Number of changeover contacts for auxiliary contacts 2
Load capacity of the output relay
• Thermal current Ith A 5
Rated operational current Ie at
• AC-15/230 V A 3
• DC-13/24 V A 1
• DC-13/110 V A 0.2
• DC-13/230 V A 0.1
Minimum contact load at 17 V DC mA 5
Output relay with DIAZED fuse
gL/gG operational class
A 4
Electrical endurance AC-15 Million
operating
cycles
0.1
Mechanical endurance Million
operating
cycles
10
NSB0_01665
A
B
C
74
865
36
62
110
15
22,5
82
1)
A B C
Type 3UG46 41
Removable terminals
Spring-loaded terminals 84 94 103
Screw terminal 83 92 102
Monitoring Relays
3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements
Power factor and active current monitoring
7/8 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
7
■Schematics
Position of the connection terminals
1-phase motors 3-phase motors 3-phase motors
with transformers for currents > 10 A
M
1~
Lx IN
12
14
22
24
N
L
NSB0_01654
21
Ly/N
11
3UG46 41
cos<
>
cos>
res
< res
Lx IN
12
14
22
24
L1
NSB0_01655
L2
L3
21
M
3~
11
Ly/N
3UG46 41
cos<
>
cos>
res
< res
Lx IN
12
14
22
24
NSB0_01656
21
L1
L2
L3
M
3~K(P1) L(P2)
Ly/N
11
K(S1) L(S2)
3UG46 41
cos<
>
cos>
res
< res
3UG46 41
NSB0_01657
Lx
12 14
IN
22 21 24
11
Ly/N
7
Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
Commanding and
Signaling Devices
3SB3 Pushbutton Units and
Indicator Lights, 22 mm
Components for Actuators and
Indicators
AS-Interface F adapters for
EMERGENCY-STOP control devices
9/2 - Overview
9/2 - Selection and ordering data
AS-Interface Enclosures and
Front Panel Modules
General data
9/3 - Overview
9/3 - Design
9/3 - Function
AS-Interface enclosures with
standard fittings
9/4 - Overview
9/4 - Selection and ordering data
3SB3 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights, 22 mm
Components for Actuators and Indicators
AS-Interface F adapters
for EMERGENCY-STOP control devices
9/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
9
■Overview
The AS-Interface Failsafe adapter is used to connect an
EMERGENCY-STOP control device according to ISO 13850 or
EN 418 from the 3SB3 series to the AS-Interface bus system.
The Failsafe adapter has a safe AS-Interface slave and is
snapped from behind onto the EMERGENCY-STOP control
device (only actuating element).
Depending on the version, screw terminals or spring-loaded ter-
minals are used. In the extended version there is an output for
controlling an indicator light or an LED.
Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or
the integrated addressing socket.
Safety category 4 (SIL 3) is achieved with the adpater.
■Selection and ordering data
Version Connection DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
3SF5 402-1AB03
AS-Interface F adapters
for SIRIUS 3SB3
EMERGENCY-STOP
control devices
for mounting on
front plate
• 2I Screw terminals } 3SF5 402-1AA03 1 1 unit 121 0.066
Spring-loaded terminals } 3SF5 402-1AA04 1 1 unit 121 0.066
• 2I/1O, output for LED
control
Screw terminals } 3SF5 402-1AB03 1 1 unit 121 0.066
Spring-loaded terminals } 3SF5 402-1AB04 1 1 unit 121 0.066
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
3SB3 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights, 22 mm
AS-Interface Enclosures and Front Panel Modules
General data
9/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
99
■Overview
Distributed command devices of the 3SB3 series can be quickly
connected to the AS-Interface using AS-Interface enclosures.
Using suitable components you can make your own enclosures
with integrated AS-Interface or flexibly modify existing
enclosures.
Enclosure
Color of cover of enclosure:
7 Gray, RAL 7035, or
7 Yellow, RAL 1004, for EMERGENCY-STOP.
Color of the base of the enclosure:
7 Black, RAL 9005
■Design
Connection
One set of links is required in each case to connect a slave to
contact blocks, to lampholders and to the connection element.
The connection elements are mounted in the front-end cable
glands of the enclosure and are used for connection of the
AS-Interface or for bringing unused inputs or outputs out of the
enclosure.
For connection to the AS-Interface bus there is a choice of the
following options:
7 Terminal for shaped AS-Interface cable. The cable is
contacted by the insulation displacement method and routed
past the enclosure on the outside (possible only with plastic
enclosure).
7 Cable gland for the shaped AS-Interface cable or round
cable. The cable is routed into the enclosure (preferable for
metal enclosure).
7 Connection using M12 plug
If less than all inputs/outputs of the installed slaves in an enclo-
sure are used for connecting the command devices, free inputs
and outputs can be routed on request to the outside through an
M12 socket on the top or bottom side of the enclosure.
To supply inputs with power, the S+ connection of the must be
assigned to the socket, for outputs the OUT – connection must
be assigned.
Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or
the integrated addressing socket. An external power supply is
not required.
■Function
AS-Interface slaves
The following slave types are available:
7 Slave in A/B technology with 4 inputs and 3 outputs
7 Slave with 4 inputs and 4 outputs
7 F slave with 2 safe inputs
The following table shows the maximum number of equippable
slaves:
1) For metal enclosures only 1 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O is possible.
Enclosures for Number of slaves
for enclosures without
EMERGENCY-STOP
Number of slaves
for enclosures with
EMERGENCY-STOP
1 command point Not available 1 × F slave
2 command points 1 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O Not available
3 command points 1 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 1 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O +
1 × failsafe slave
4 command points 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O1)
2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O +
1 × failsafe slave1)
6 command points 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O +
1 × failsafe slave
3SB3 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights, 22 mm
AS-Interface Enclosures and Front Panel Modules
AS-Interface enclosures with standard fittings
9/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
9
■Overview
Enclosures with standard fittings are available with:
7 1 to 3 command points
7 Operational voltage through AS-Interface (approx. 30 V),
7 Vertical mounting type.
7 Molded-plastic enclosures with actuators and indicators
made of plastic, metal enclosures with actuators and indica-
tors made of metal.
The actuator/indicator is fixed with an enclosure nut. If required
it can be disassembled with a 27 mm socket wrench or with a
3SX17 07 ring nut wrench.
The enclosures without EMERGENCY-STOP each have one user
module with 4I/3O; the enclosures with EMERGENCY-STOP
have a safe AS-Interface slave integrated in the enclosure.
The EMERGENCY-STOP enclosures have two NC contact
blocks which are fitted inside the enclosure and wired to the safe
slave. The contact blocks and lampholders (with spring-loaded
terminals) of the control devices and the AS-Interface slaves are
mounted in the bottom of the enclosure and connected by
cables.
The molded-plastic versions of the enclosures have a connec-
tion for the AS-Interface flat cable (the cable is routed past the
enclosure on the outside); in the case of the metal versions the
AS-Interface cable is routed into the enclosure.
■Selection and ordering data
Equipping options
(A, B, C = identification letters of the command points)
Number of
command
points
DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
AS-Interface enclosures, molded plastic
A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton through
AS-Interface adapter, top part of enclosure in yellow
1 A 3SF5 811-0AA08 1 1 unit 121 0.415
A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton through
AS-Interface adapter, top part of enclosure in yellow,
with protective collar
1 A 3SF5 811-0AB08 1 1 unit 121 0.415
B = Pushbutton green, label "I",
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
2 A 3SF5 812-0DA00 1 1 unit 121 0.352
B = Pushbutton white, label "I",
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
2 A 3SF5 812-0DB00 1 1 unit 121 0.352
C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription,
B = Pushbutton green, label "I",
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
3 A 3SF5 813-0DA00 1 1 unit 121 0.415
C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription,
B = Pushbutton white, label "I",
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
3 A 3SF5 813-0DC00 1 1 unit 121 0.415
C = Pushbutton black, label "II",
B = Pushbutton black, label "I",
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
3 A 3SF5 813-0DB00 1 1 unit 121 0.415
AS-Interface enclosures, metal
A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton through
AS-Interface adapter, top part of enclosure in yellow
1 A 3SF5 811-2AA08 1 1 unit 121 0.415
A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton through
AS-Interface adapter, top part of enclosure in yellow,
with protective collar
1 A 3SF5 811-2AB08 1 1 unit 121 0.415
B = Pushbutton green, label "I",
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
2 A 3SF5 812-2DA00 1 1 unit 121 0.415
B = Pushbutton white, label "I",
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
2 A 3SF5 812-2DB00 1 1 unit 121 0.415
C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription,
B = Pushbutton green, label "I",
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
3 A 3SF5 813-2DA00 1 1 unit 121 0.415
C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription,
B = Pushbutton white, label "I",
A = Pushbutton black, label "O"
3 A 3SF5 813-2DC00 1 1 unit 121 0.415
C = Pushbutton black, label "II",
B = Pushbutton black, label "I",
A = Pushbutton red, label "O"
3 A 3SF5 813-2DB00 1 1 unit 121 0.415
7
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
ES Motor Starter
13/2 - Overview
13/3 - Selection and ordering data
ES Soft Starter
13/4 - Overview
13/4 - Selection and ordering data
Planning
and Configuration
with SIRIUS
Catalog
Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS
ES Motor Starter
13/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
13
■Overview
ES Motor Starter is used for start-up, parameterization, diagnos-
tics, documentation and the preventative maintenance of the
High-Feature motor starters of the SIMATIC ET 200S, ET 200pro
and ECOFAST product families.
Interfacing is performed
• Either through the serial device interface (applicable to
ET 200S/ET 200pro/ECOFAST) or
• With PROFIBUS DP V1 capable motor starters from any point
in PROFIBUS (applies for ET 200pro/ECOFAST).
Using ES Motor Starter, the communication capable motor start-
ers are easily parameterized during start-up, monitored during
normal operation and successfully diagnosed for service
purposes. Preventative maintenance is supported by a function
for reading out diverse statistical data (e.g. operating hours,
operating cycles, cut-off currents, etc.). The user is supported
during these procedures with comprehensive Help functions
and plain text displays.
ES Motor Starter can either be used as a stand-alone program
or it can be integrated into STEP 7 V5.1 SP3 upwards by means
of an object manager.
The following components are required for a serial connection:
ET 200S motor starters, High Feature:
• Control module 2DI DC 24 V COM
3RK1 903-0CH10
• LOGO! PC cable
6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0
ET 200pro motor starters:
• RS 232 interface cable
3RK1 922-2BP00
ECOFAST motor starters, High Feature (interface cable):
• PC cable
3RK1 911-0BN20
13
Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS
ES Motor Starter
13/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
■Selection and ordering data
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
ES Motor Starter 2006 Smart
single license
Comprising:
• ES Motor Starter for parameterizing, monitoring, diagnosing and testing
the ECOFAST Motor Starters,
SIMATIC ET 200S High-Feature Starters and
SIMATIC ET 200pro Motor Starters
over a serial connection
- With Online Help
German/English selectable
- Operating system: Windows 2000/XP
• System requirements:
- Cable for serial communication through a serial interface
- CD-ROM drive
B 3ZS1 310-1CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 121 0.230
ES Motor Starter 2006 Professional
single license
Comprising:
• ES Motor Starter for parameterization, monitoring, diagnostics and
testing of the ECOFAST Motor Starters,
SIMATIC ET 200S High-Feature Starters and
SIMATIC ET 200pro Motor Starters
over PROFIBUS DP or a serial connection
- With Online Help
German/English selectable
- Operating system: Windows 2000/XP
• STEP7 Object Manager (OM)
for integrating the ECOFAST starter as S7 slave in SIMATIC S7
for calling ES Motor Starter from STEP7
B 3ZS1 310-2CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 121 0.230
ES Motor Starter 2006 Professional Upgrade
single license
Comprising:
• Upgrade from Switch ES Motor Starter 2004 or
ES Motor Starter Smart 2005
to ES Motor Starter 2006 Professional
B 3ZS1 310-2CC10-0YE0 1 1 unit 121 0.230
Accessories for ET 200S motor starters, High-Feature
Control module 2DI DC 24 V COM
Digital input module with 2 inputs for local motor starter functions for
mounting onto the front of motor starters
Operational voltage 24 V DC (supplied from U1), short-circuit proof,
floating contact with serial interface for connecting to ES Switch
Connection through LOGO! PC cable, max. cable length (out and back)
50 m
A 3RK1 903-0CH10 1 1 unit 121 0.025
LOGO! PC cables
for connecting the High-Feature motor starter with Switch ES interface
to a PC
A 6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0 1 1 unit 200 0.159
Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters
RS 232 interface cables
for serial data connection between an ET 200pro motor starter and
a laptop/PC/PG
B 3RK1 922-2BP00 1 1 unit 121 0.330
Accessories for ECOFAST motor starters, High-Feature (interface cable)
PC cables B 3RK1 911-0BN20 1 1 unit 121 0.162
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS
ES Soft Starter
13/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
13
■Overview
ES Soft Starter 2006 Smart: Soft starter control function
ES Soft Starter 2006 Smart: Motor starter control
ES Soft Starter 2006 Smart is used for starting up,
parameterizing, diagnosing and documenting the
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter range for High-Feature applications.
Interfacing is by PC or PG and a special connecting cable
through the serial interface provided on the soft starter.
Using ES 2006 Soft Starter Smart, the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft
starters for High-Feature applications are easily parameterized
during start-up, monitored during normal operation and
successfully diagnosed for service purposes. The device
parameters can be conveniently set offline on the PC for
user-friendly local transfer into the soft starter during start-up at
a later time.
The main features of the program include:
• Clearly arranged setting of device functions and their
parameters (online/offline)
• Storage and print-out of the set parameters for data back-up
• Clearly arranged diagnostics function of the soft starter and
presentation of the most important measured values
• Logbook with error and event memory
• Oscilloscope function for recording measured values and
events
• German/English as operating language
The following requirements must be met in order to use the
software together with the soft starter:
• Soft starter requirements:
- SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters firmware *E04* and higher
Applied to soft starters with delivery date December 2005
and later
• PC system requirements:
- Operating system:
Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional
- Processor: ≥ 800 MHz
- Free space on hard disk: approx. 150 MByte
- CD-ROM drive
- Serial interface
• Serial connecting cable (PC – soft starter):
- Connecting cable:
3UF7 940-0AA00-0.
■Selection and ordering data
Version DT Order No. Price
per PU
PU
(UNIT,
SET, M)
PS* PG Weight
per PU
approx.
kg
ES Soft Starter 2006 Smart
Parameterization and service software for
SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters for parameterizing through the
system interface on the device.
Executes on PC/PG under Windows
2000/XP Professional.
Delivered without PC cable.
Type of supply: CD, single license
• System requirements:
- Operating system:
Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional
- Processor: ≥ 800 MHz
- Free space on hard disk: approx. 150 MByte
- CD-ROM drive
- Serial PC cable
} 3ZS1 313-1CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 131 0.230
Accessories
PC cables
Connecting cable for PC/PG communication with SIRIUS 3RW44
soft starters and for connecting to the serial interface of the PC/PG
B 3UF7 940-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 131 0.150
* You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
13
Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS
Notes
13/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS
Notes
13/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
13
7
Appendix
Terms and conditions of sale and delivery
Export regulations
■Terms and conditions of sale and delivery
By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software
products described therein from the Siemens AG subject to the
following terms. Please note! The scope, the quality and the con-
ditions for supplies and services, including software products,
by any Siemens entity having a registered office outside of Ger-
many, shall be subject exclusively to the General Terms and
Conditions of the respective Siemens entity.
For customers with a seat or registered office in the
Federal Republic of Germany
The "General Terms of Payment" as well as the "General Condi-
tions for the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical
and Electronics Industry" shall apply.
For software products, the "General License Conditions for Soft-
ware Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a
Seat or registered Office in Germany" shall apply.
For customers with a seat or registered office outside of
Germany
The "General Terms of Payment" as well as the "General Condi-
tions for Supplies of Siemens, Automation and Drives for Cus-
tomers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany" shall
apply.
For software products, the "General License Conditions for Soft-
ware Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a
Seat or registered Office outside of Germany" shall apply.
General
The prices are in € (Euro) ex works, exclusive packaging.
The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices.
It shall be debited separately at the respective rate according to
the applicable legal regulations.
In addition to the prices of products which include silver, plump,
aluminum and/or copper, surcharges may be calculated if the
respective limits of the notes are exceeded. The respective note
(e.g. source: German newspaper "Handesblatt" in category
"deutsche Edelmetalle" and "Metallverarbeiter") for silver ("verar-
beitetes Silber"), plump ("Blei in Kabeln"), aluminum ("Aluminium
in Kabeln") and copper ("Elektrolytkupfer", "DEL-Notiz") respec-
tively, of the day the order or rather the on call order is received,
is decisive for the calculation of the surcharges.
Surcharges of copper shall be calculated for Drives at a note
("DEL-Notiz") above EUR 225,00 / 100 Kg and for chokes / trans-
formers above EUR 150,00 / 100 kg.
Surcharges shall be charged based on the quantities of the ma-
terials which are contained in the relevant products.
Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will debit
the prices valid at the time of delivery.
The dimensions are in mm. Illustrations are not binding.
Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages,
- especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given -
these are subject to change without prior notice.
Comprehensive Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery are
available free of charge from your local Siemens business office
under the following Order Nos.:
• 6ZB5310-0KR30-0BA0
(for customers based in the Federal Republic of Germany)
• 6ZB5310-0KS53-0BA0
(for customers based outside of the Federal Republic of
Germany)
or download them from the Internet
http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall
(Germany: A&D Mall Online-Help System)
■Export regulations
The products listed in this catalog / price list may be subject to
European / German and/or US export regulations.
Therefore, any export requiring a license is subject to approval
by the competent authorities.
According to current provisions, the following export regulations
must be observed with respect to the products featured in this
catalog / price list:
Even without a label or with an "AL: N" or "ECCN: N", authoriza-
tion may be required due to the final destination and purpose for
which the goods are to be used.
The deciding factors are the AL or ECCN export authorization
indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and invoices.
Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice.
A&D/VuL/De 17.03.05
AL Number of the German Export List.
Products marked other than "N" require an export
license.
In the case of software products, the export des-
ignations of the relevant data medium must also
be generally adhered to.
Goods labeled with an "AL not equal to N" are
subject to a European or German export authori-
zation when being exported out of the EU.
ECCN Export Control Classification Number.
Products marked other than "N" are subject to a
reexport license to specific countries.
In the case of software products, the export
designations of the relevant data medium must
also be generally adhered to.
Goods labeled with an "ECCN not equal to N" are
subject to a US re-export authorization.
lv1_news_U1_U4_200605_en.FH10 Thu May 18 13:19:21 2006 Seite 1
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage
Siemens AG
Automation and Drives
Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution
Postfach 48 48
90327 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
www.siemens.com/automation
The information provided in this catalog contains descriptions or
characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always
apply as described or which may change as a result of further development
of the products. An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall
only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Availability and
technical specifications are subject to change without notice.
All product designations may be trademarks or product names of
Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own
purposes could violate the rights of the owners.
Subjecttochangewithoutpriornotice|Dispo68201|KG050610.E112En/603018|PrintedinGermany|©SiemensAG2006
Order No. E86060-K1002-A141-A1-7600 Token fee: 2.00 €

Catalogue siemens-3 rf-3rw_lv1 2006

  • 1.
    lv1_news_U1_U4_200605_en.FH10 Thu May18 13:19:21 2006 Seite 3 low-voltageCONTROLS AND DISTRIBUTION CatalogLV1News•April2006 SIRIUS SENTRON SIVACON
  • 2.
    Related catalogs Contents Low-VoltageControls and Distribution SIRIUS · SENTRON · SIVACON Order No. Catalog E86060-K1002-A101-A5-7600 Technical Information E86060-T1002-A101-A5-7600 LV 1 LV 1 T Systems · Controls: Contactors and contactor assem- blies, solid-state switching devices · Protection equip- ment · Load feeders, motor starters and soft starters · Monitoring and control devices · Detecting devices · Commanding and signaling devices · Transformers · Power supplies · ALPHA FIX terminal blocks · Planning and configuration with SIRIUS · SIVACON busway and cubicle systems · SENTRON switching and protection devices for power distribution: Air circuit-breakers, molded case circuit-breakers, switch disconnectors · Planning, design and management with SIMARIS · BETA modular installation devices Industrial Communication Industrial Communication for Automation and Drives Order No.: E86060-K6710-A101-B4-7600 IK PI Industrial Ethernet to IEEE 802.3 · PROFINET · Industrial Mobile Communicaton · PROFIBUS to IEC 61158/EN 50170 · SIMATIC ET 200 distributed I/Os · AS-Interface to EN 50295/IEC 61158 · Remote operation with SINAUT ST7 · Routers · ECOFAST system SICUBE System Cubicles and Cubicle Air-Conditioning Order No. E86060-K1920-A101-A3-7600 LV 50 System Cubicles · Cubicle Modifications · Cubicle Expansion · Accessories · Special Cubicles · CubicleSo- lutions in Practice · Cubicle Air-Conditioning· Special Colors SIDAC Reactors and Filters Order No.: E86060-K2803-A101-A3-7600 LV 60 Commutating reactors for converters · Mains reactors for frequency converters · Iron-core output reactors · Ferrite output reactors · Iron-core smoothing reactors · Smoothing air-core reactors · Filter reactors · Application- specific reactors · Radio interference suppression filters · dv/dt filters · Sinewave filters SIVACON 8PS Busway systems CD, BD01, BD2 to 1250 A Order No.: E86060-K1870-A101-A2-7600 LV 70 Busway systems, Overview · CD system (25 A to 40 A) · BD01 system (40 A to 160 A) · BD2 system (160 A to 1250 A) Automation & Drives The A&D Offline Mall Order No.: E86060-D4001-A110-C4-7600 DVD: E86060-D4001-A510-C4-7600 CA 01 All Automation and Drives products, including those in the catalogs listed above. A&D Mall Internet: http://www.siemens.com/ automation/mall All Automation and Drives products, including those in the catalogs listed above. Catalog PDF Internet: http://www.automation. siemens.com/cd All catalogs for Low-Voltage Controls can be downloaded as pdf files. Registered trademarks Technical Assistance All product designations may be registered trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or other supplying companies. Third parties using these trademarks or product names for their own purposes may infringe upon the rights of the trademark owners. Further information about low-voltage controls is available on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage Expert technical assistance for Low-Voltage Controls and Electrical Installations. Tel.: +49 (9 11) 8 95-59 00 Fax: +49 (9 11) 8 95-59 07 E-Mail: technical-assistance @siemens.com
  • 3.
    0/1Siemens LV 1· 2006 The corresponding sections in Catalog LV 1 · 2006 and in the Technical Information LV 1 T · 2006 are replaced by this news edition Contact your local Siemens representative for further information © Siemens AG 2006 The products and systems listed in this catalog are distributed/ manufactured using a certified quality management system which complies with EN ISO 9001 (Certificate Register Nos. can be found in the appendix). The certificates are recognized in all IQ Net countries. 1 Introduction Funktionen 11 Supply Power supplies 2 Systems 12 Connecting with ALPHA ALPHA FIX terminal blocks 3 Controls Contactors and contactor assemblies 13 Engineering Software Planning and configuration with SIRIUS 4 Solid-state switching devices 14 Distributing with SIVACON SIVACON power distribution boards, busway and cubicle systems 5 Protecting Protection equipment 15 Switching and Protecting with SENTRON Air circuit-breakers 6 Starting Load feeders, motor starters and soft starters 16 Molded case circuit-breakers 7 Monitoring and Control Monitoring and control devices 17 Switch disconnectors 8 Detection Detecting devices 18 Engineering Software Planning, design and management with SIMARIS 9 Commanding and Signaling Commanding and signaling devices 19 Protecting with BETA BETA modular installation devices 10 Supply Transformers 20 Appendix Low-Voltage Controls SIRIUS · SENTRON · SIVACON Catalog LV 1 News · 04/2006 s
  • 5.
    1 Introduction Welcome toAutomation and Drives TIA - Innovations for more productivity TIP - Power distribution and management from one source Low-voltage controls and distribution - The basis for progressive solutions SIRIUS industrial controls Low-voltage power distribution Supply 11 Power Supplies 4AV non-stabilized power supplies 6EP stabilized power supplies SITOP power LOGO! Power SIRIUSIndustrialControls Systems 2 Systems AS-Interface ECOFAST system SIRIUS Safety Integrated PROFIBUS SIRIUS Modular System ConnectingwithALPHA 12 ALPHA FIX Terminal Blocks Terminals with insulation displacement connection Standard terminals, spring-loaded Terminals with screw connection Switching 3 Controls - Contactors and contactor assemblies 3RT, 3TF contactors for switching motors 3RA13, 3RA14 contactor assemblies 3RT, 3RH, 3TB, 3TC, 3TH, 3TK contactors for special applications 3RH, 3TH contactor relays · 3RT coupling relays 3TX7, 3RS18 coupling relays LZX plug-in relays · 3TG10 power relays/miniature contactors EngineeringSoftware 13 Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS ES motor starters ECOFAST ES SIMOCODE ES Soft Starter ES 4 Controls - Solid-State Switching Devices 3RF20 solid-state relays 3RF21 solid-state relays 3RF23 solid-state contactors 3RF29 function modules Low-VoltagePowerDistribution DistributingwithSIVACON 14 SIVACON Power Distribution Boards, Busway and Cubicle Systems SIVACON power distribution boards and motor control centers 8PS busbar trunking systems · SICUBE 8MC, 8MF system cubicles and cubicle air-conditioning · SIKUS series of switchgear cubicles · ALPHA 630-DIN floor-mounted distribution boards · 8HP molded-plastic distribution systems Components for 8US, 8UC, 4NC distribution systems Protecting 5 Protection Equipment 3RV motor starter protectors 3RB2 solid-state overload relays 3RU1 thermal overload relays SwitchingandProtectingwithSENTRON 15 SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution 3WL air circuit-breakers Starting 6 Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters 3RW44 soft starters 3RA fuseless load feeders 3RA71 load feeders with safety integrated AS-Interface motor starters and soft starters ET 200S, ET 200pro, ET 200X motor starters ET 200S Safety motor starters Solutions local/PROFIsafe ECOFAST motor starters and soft starters 3RE encapsulated starters 16 SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution 3VL, 3VF2 molded case circuit-breakers MonitoringandControl 7 Monitoring and Control Devices SIMOCODE 3UF motor management and control devices LOGO! Logic Modules · 3RP, 7PV timing relays 3UG monitoring relays for electrical and additional measurements 3RS10, 3RS11, temperature monitoring relays 3RN1 thermistor motor protection 3TK28 safety relays 3RS17 interface converters 17 SENTRON Switching and Protection Devices for Power Distribution 3KA, 3LD switch disconnectors 3KL, 3NJ6 switch disconnectors with fuses 3NP, 3NJ4, 3NJ5 fuse switch disconnectors Detection 8 Detecting Devices 3SE2, 3SE3, position switches 3SE2 hinge switches 3SE6 magnetically operated switches EngineeringSoftware 18 Planning, Design and Management with SIMARIS SIMARIS design Switch ES Power SIMARIS manager CommandingandSignaling 9 Commanding and Signaling Devices 3SB2, 3SB3, 3SF5 pushbutton units and indicator lights 3SB3 two-hand operation consoles 3SE7, 3SF2 cable-operated switches 3SE2, 3SE3 foot switches 8WD4 signaling columns 8WD5 integrated signal lamps ProtectingwithBETA 19 BETA Modular Installation Devices Fuse and fuse systems SR60 busbar system Miniature circuit-breakers Residual current operated circuit-breakers Lightning and surge arresters Power supply devices Measuring devices Supply 10 Transformers Single-phase transformers Three-phase transformers 20 Appendix Glossary · Training · Ordering notes · Further documentation · Standards and approvals · Quality management · Siemens contacts· External partners · Online services · Customer support Software licenses · Subject index Order number index · Fax order Conditions of sale and delivery
  • 6.
    Niederspannungs-Schalttechnik 4 Siemens LV1 News · 04/2006 Delivery times (DT) } Preferred type A 2 working days B 1 week C 3 weeks D 6 week X on request Preferred types are available immediately from stock, i.e. are dispatched within 24 hours. Normal quantities of the products are usually deliv- red within the specified time following receipt of your order at our branch. In exceptional cases, the actual delivery period may differ from that specified. The delivery periods apply up to the ramp at Siemens AG (products ready for dispatch). The transport times depend on the destination and type of shipping. The standard transport time for Germany is 1 day. The delivery times specified here represent the state of 02/2006. They are per- manently optimized. Up-to-date information can be found at www.siemens.com/automation/mall. Price units (PU) The price unit defines the number of units, sets or meters to which the specified price and weight apply. Packaging sizes (PS) The packaging size defines the number, e.g. of units, sets or meters, for outer packaging. Only the quantity defined by the packaging size or a multiple thereof can be ordered! For multi-unit packaging and recyclable packaging, see Appendix. Price groups (PG) Each product is assigned to a price group. The defined weight in kg refers to the price unit (PU). Dimensions All dimensions in mm. Explanations
  • 7.
    Siemens LV 1News · 04/2006 AS-Interface Introduction AS-Interface Specification 2/2 - Overview 2/3 - Benefits Routers DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 2/4 - Overview 2/4 - Benefits 2/5 - Application 2/6 - Selection and ordering data 2/6 - Accessories Slaves Digital I/O modules according to Specification 3.0 2/7 - Overview 2/7 - Selection and ordering data Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20 2/8 - Overview 2/9 - Selection and ordering data 2/9 - Accessories Analog I/O modules IP67 – K60 2/11 - Overview 2/11 - Benefits 2/12 - Selection and ordering data 2/13 - Accessories AS-Interface Routers DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 2/14 - Design 2/14 - Function 2/15 - Technical specifications Slaves Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20 2/16 - Design 2/19 - Technical specifications 2/23 - Dimensional drawings 2/24 - Schematics Analog I/O modules IP67 – K60 2/25 - Function 2/26 - Technical specifications 2/26 - Schematics Systems Catalog Technical information
  • 8.
    AS-Interface Introduction AS-Interface Specification 2/2 SiemensLV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Overview Technology development of the AS-Interface System limits of the AS-Interface Specification Expansions of the AS-Interface Specification 2.1 • The AS-Interface Specification 2.1 enables the number of net- work stations to be doubled from 31 to 62.The 31 addresses which are possible in an AS-Interface network can be split by means of the so-called extended addressing function. • If this option is used for each of the 31 slaves, the maximum number of stations in an AS-Interface network is then 62. The so-called A/B slaves can have a maximum of four inputs and three outputs. The extended addressing function can be used only for digital slaves, not for analog slaves or safety-oriented slaves (ASIsafe). • Another function of the AS-Interface Specification V2.1 is the integrated analog value transfer function. In this case "inte- grated" means that no special function blocks are required for accessing the analog values. It is just as easy to access the analog values as the digital values. The integrated analog value transfer function can be used with analog slaves which support the profiles 7.3 and 7.4. Expansions of the AS-Interface Specification 3.0 • The AS-Interface Specification 3.0 enables the connection of up to 1000 digital inputs and outputs (profile S-7.A.A: 8DI/8DO as A/B slave). • New profiles make it possible to use the extended addressing function for analog slaves as well. • Analog value transfer is accelerated by "Fast Analog Profiles". • Variable use of analog modules: optional parameterization of the resolution (12/14 bit) and one or two channels. • Asynchronous serial protocol 100 baud or 50 baud bidirec- tional. ASi Spec. V2.0 ASi Spec. V2.1 1994 1998 2001 2005/2006 ASIsafe ASi Spec. V3.0 5 ms bus cycle time NSA0_00453a 31 Slaves• • 62 Slaves (10 ms)• • • • • • • • • Speed/Flexibility Analog profiles Diagnostics peripherals 4DI/4DO in A/B technology 8DI/8DO in A/B technology Additional analog profiles Transmission of serial data Safety monitor Safe input slaves AS-Interface Specification Maximum number of slaves Number of digital inputs Number of digital outputs digital analog ASIsafe Version 2.0 31 31 31 31 × 4 = 124 31 × 4 = 124 Version 2.1 62 31 31 62 × 4 = 248 62 × 3 = 186 Version 3.0 62 62 31 62 × 8 = 496 62 × 8 = 496
  • 9.
    AS-Interface Introduction AS-Interface Specification 2/3Siemens LV1 News · 04/2006 2 AS-Interface master To be able to operate A/B slaves on an AS-Interface network you must also use master modules which comply with at least Specification 2.1. A/B technology is supported by the masters of the SIMATIC S7 and the DP/AS-Interface links from Siemens. Only standard slaves and A slaves (= A/B slave with an A address) can be operated on masters which do not support Specification 2.1. The subaddress of A/B slaves is set to "A" in the as-delivered state. The new masters according to Specification 3.0 support all new slave profiles and also display full download compatibility. The AS-Interface Specification applicable for the particular slave is specified in the section Selection and Ordering Data. The exact slave profile is shown in the section Technical Specifications. Communication cycle Standard slaves are queried in each cycle (max. cycle time: 5 ms). If only one A or B slave is installed at an address, this slave will be queried in each cycle (max. cycle time: 5 ms). If an A/B slave pair is installed at an address, the A slave will be que- ried in one cycle and the B slave in the next cycle (max. cycle time: 10 ms). If only standard and/or A slaves are installed in a network, the cycle time is identical to the standard masters (max. cycle time: 5 ms). Whether an AS-Interface slave is a standard slave or an A/B slave is noted in the section Selection and Ordering Data in the column Slave Type and can be deduced from the section Technical Specifications of the slave in question. All slave types can be mixed and used in the same AS-Interface network. ■Benefits • Reduction of master and power supply costs thanks to a higher number of slaves and I/Os per AS-Interface line. • Improved decentralization in plants with numerous, widely spread signals. • Further expansion of existing AS-Interface systems is possible. AS-Interface Specification Available master Version 2.1 S7-200 (CP 243-2), S7-300 (CP 343-2, 343-2P), DP/ASi Link 20E Version 3.0 DP/AS-i Link Advanced AS-Interface Specification Maximum cycle time Slave profile Version 2.0 5 ms S-X.0, S-X.1, S-X.F Version 2.1 5 ms with 31 slaves 10 ms with 62 Slaves S-X.A, S-7.3, S-7.4, S-7.F Version 3.0 as for Version 2.1, and profile-specific 10 ms for inputs/outputs (e.g. 20 ms for 4DI/4DO and 40 ms for 8DI/8DO) S-7.5.5; S-7.A.5, S-B.A.5; S-7.A.7, S-7.A.8; S-7.A.9, S-7.A.A, S-6.0
  • 10.
    AS-Interface Routers DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 2/4Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Overview • Compact router between PROFIBUS (DP Slave) and AS-Interface • Single and double AS-Interface master (according to AS-Interface Specification V3.0) for connection of 62 AS-Interface slaves each and integrated analog value transfer • Integrated ground fault monitoring for the AS-Interface cable • User-friendly local diagnostics and start-up by means of a full graphic display and control keys or through a web interface with a standard browser • Optimum TIA integration through STEP 7, integration in non- Siemens engineering tools using PROFIBUS type file (GSD) • Vertical integration (standard web interface) through Industrial Ethernet • Supply from AS-Interface cable; hence no additional power supply required • Module exchange without a PG using C-PLUG ■Benefits • Short start-up times through simple configuration at the press of a button and testing of the AS-Interface line using the display or web interface • Reduction of downtimes and servicing times in the event of a slave failure thanks to user-friendly diagnostics using the display or web interface and through simple module exchange with the help of the C-PLUG exchange medium • Reduction of installation costs because the supply comes completely from the AS-Interface cable, making an additional power supply superfluous • Reduced amount of engineering work thanks to user-friendly configuration of Siemens slaves using the slave catalog in HW-Config (STEP 7) • Costs saved by the double AS-Interface master when large volumes of project data are involved
  • 11.
    AS-Interface Routers DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 2/5SiemensLV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Application The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is a PROFIBUS DPV1 slave (according to EN 50 170) and an AS-Interface master (based on AS-Interface Specification V3.0 according to EN 50 295). It enables transparent data access to AS-Interface from PROFIBUS DP. PROFIBUS DP masters can exchange I/O data with AS-Interface in cyclic mode; DP masters with acyclic services can perform AS-Interface master calls in addition. As such, the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is particularly well suited for a decentral construction and for connection of a lower-level AS-Interface network. For applications with typical volumes of project data it is sufficient to use the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in its version as an AS-Interface single master. For applications with large volumes of project data the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced in its version as an AS-Interface double master is used. In this case, twice the volume of project data can be used on two AS-Interface lines running indepen- dently of each other. Integration of AS-Interface on PROFIBUS through DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as single/double master DP/AS-i LINK Advanced ET 200pro ET 200S G_IK10_XX_40018 LINK Advanced Power supply unit LOGO! Safety monitor Safe slave with EMERGENCY-STOP PG e.g. with CP 5611 A2 S7-300 e.g. with CP 342-5 PC with SOFTNET-DP Power supply unit Slave Safety monitor Safe slave with EMERGENCY-STOP Laser scanner S7-400 with CP 443-5 Extended Operating & Monitoring When using DP/AS-i LINK Advanced as double master
  • 12.
    AS-Interface Routers DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 2/6Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Selection and ordering data ■Accessories Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg DP/AS-i LINK Advanced Router between PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface; master profiles M3 and M4, extended AS-Interface Specification V3.0; degree of protection IP20 • Single master with display A 6GK1 415-2BA10 1 1 unit 543 0.380 • Double master with display A 6GK1 415-2BA20 1 1 unit 543 0.380 Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg C-PLUG Exchange medium for the simple exchange of devices in the event of a fault; for accommodating configuration and application data; can be used in SIMATIC NET products with a C-PLUG slot } 6GK1 900-0AB00 1 1 unit 543 0.200 IE FC RJ45 Plug 90 RJ45 plug-in connector for Industrial Ethernet, with robust metal enclosure and integrated cutting and clamping contacts for connection of Industrial Ethernet FC installation cables; with 90° cable feeder; for ET 200S • 1 pack = 1 unit } 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AA0 1 1 PK 543 0.030 • 1 pack = 10 units } 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AB0 1 1 PK 543 0.300 • 1 pack = 50 units } 6GK1 901-1BB20-2AE0 1 1 PK 543 1.500 Bus connector RS 485 with angled cable feeder (35°) screw terminals, max. transfer rate 12 Mbit/s • Without PG interface } 6ES7 972-0BA60-0XA0 1 1 unit 250 0.045 SIMATIC NET Manual Collection B 6GK1 975-1AA00-3AA0 1 1 unit 540 0.017 Electronic manuals for communication systems, protocols, products; on CD-ROM; German/English * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 13.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesaccording to Specification 3.0 2/7Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Overview The new AS-Interface Specification 3.0 adds a number of com- pletely new features to AS-Interface bus system. The extended address mode (A/B addresses) enables the connection of up to 62 slaves on one AS-Interface network. With the extended address mode according to Specification 3.0, four outputs are now possible for the first time even with A/B slaves (instead of only three outputs possible up to now with Specification 2.1). Hence with full expansion of an AS-Interface network, there are now 248 inputs as well as 248 outputs available on one AS-Interface system. Modules with four inputs and four outputs as A/B slaves according to Specification 3.0 are available • for field use in degree of protection IP67 (compact modules K20 and K60) • and for the control cabinet (SlimLine Module S45) in degree of protection IP20. Please note that these modules can be used only with a new master according to AS-Interface Specification 3.0 (e.g. the new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced) and that the cycle times for the outputs can extend to max. 20 ms. ■Selection and ordering data Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg 3RK2 400-1DQ00-0AA3 Digital I/O modules, IP67 – K60 • PNP transistor • Modules supplied without mounting plate Type Current carrying capacity of outputs Slave type Pin assign- ment Connec- tion technique 4 inputs/ 4 out- puts 2 A A/B (Spec. 3.0) Y-II M12 } 3RK2 400-1DQ00-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.212 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20 • PNP transistor • Start of delivery: 3rd quarter 2006 Type Current carrying capacity of outputs Slave type Pin assign- ment Connec- tion technique 4 inputs/ 4 out- puts 1 A A/B (Spec. 3.0) Stan- dard M8 A 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.110 3RK2 400-1CE01-0AA2 S45 SlimLine modules • Inputs: PNP transistor Type Connec- tion termi- nals Slave type Inputs Outputs 4 inputs/ 4 out- puts Screw A/B (Spec. 3.0) 2- and 3-wire PNP tran- sistor 2 A } 3RK2 400-1CE01-0AA2 1 1 unit 121 0.289 Spring- loaded connection B 3RK2 400-1CG01-0AA2 1 1 unit 121 0.241 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 14.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/8 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Overview The K20 series of compact modules supplements the AS-Interface compact modules with a particularly narrow version measuring just 20 mm wide. Thanks to their extremely compact size the modules are particularly well suited for the use of handling machines in production systems where modules need to be arranged in most confined space. Another field of application is robotics. The K20 modules are connected to the AS-Interface with a round cable with M12 cable box instead of with the AS-Interface flat cable. The AS-Interface bus cable and the 24 V DC auxiliary power supply are routed in this case in a shared round cable. This enables a mounting arrangement that saves a great deal of space. Use on moving machinery is also possible without difficulty thanks to the flexibility of the round cable. The K20 modules are also ideal for such applications as their non-encapsulated design makes them particularly light in weight. In applications with tow chains, many users rely on placing the AS-Interface bus cable in a round cable. With the K20 modules, direct connection to the round cable is possible in this case. No adapter is required from the flat to the round cable. The K20 series of compact modules includes both standard AS-Interface modules as well as an ASIsafe version for connec- tion of safety-oriented sensors such as Emergency Stop push- buttons or door safety monitors. All standard AS-Interface K20 modules support the extended address module (A/B addresses) accorfding to AS-Interface Specification 2.1, with which 62 stations can be connected to one AS-Interface net- work. The K20 module with four inputs and four outputs works in the extended address mode according to AS-Interface Specification 3.0, thus enabling for the first time four outputs with one A/B slave and hence 248 inputs plus 248 outputs with full expansion of the AS-Interface network. For particularly space-saving dimensions the sensors and actu- ators are connected using M8 plug-in connectors. Alternatively there is also an M12 socket with a Y connector.
  • 15.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/9Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Selection and ordering data ■Accessories Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg 3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20 Type Current carrying capacity of outputs Slave type Pin assign- ment Con- nection tech- nique Start of delivery 4 inputs -- A/B Stan- dard M8 A 3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075 Y M12 A 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075 2 out- puts/ 2 inputs 1 Stan- dard M8 A 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075 Y M12 A 3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075 4 out- puts/ 4 inputs 1 A/B (Spec. 3.0) Stan- dard M8 3rd quarter 2006 A 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.110 2 safe inputs -- Stan- dard Y-II M12 A 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.075 Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg 3RK1 901-1KA00 3RK1 901-1PN00 AS-Interface sealing caps • For free M12 sockets } 3RK1 901-1KA00 1 10 units 121 0.100 • For free M8 sockets A 3RK1 901-1PN00 1 10 units 121 0.100 3RK1 901-1NN00 AS-Interface standard distributor, for AS-Interface flat cable • Current carrying capacity up to 7 A • Delivery includes special mounting plate for wall and standard rail mounting • Seals (3RK1 902-0AR00) are required only if a cable is to be terminated in the distributor and must be ordered separately } 3RK1 901-1NN00 1 1 unit 121 0.086 3RK1 901-1NN10 AS-Interface compact distributor, for AS-Interface flat cable Current carrying capacity up to 6 A A 3RK1 901-1NN10 1 1 unit 121 0.040 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 16.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/10 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 Note: For plug connectors and cables see • Catalog FS 10 / chapter Proximity Switches / Accessories / Plug Connectors or • Internet (www.siemens.com/as-interface) 3RX9 801-0AA00 3RK1 901-1NR11 3RG7 838-1DG 3RK1 901-1NR21 3RK1 901-1NR00 AS-Interface M12 branch for flat cable to Cable length AS-i M12 socket -- } 3RX9 801-0AA00 1 1 unit 121 0.029 M12 cable box 1 m A 3RK1 901-1NR11 1 1 unit 121 0.070 2 m A 3RK1 901-1NR12 1 1 unit 121 0.100 AS-i / Uaux M12 socket -- A 3RG7 838-1DG 1 1 unit 575 0.200 M12 cable box 1 m A 3RK1 901-1NR21 1 1 unit 121 0.070 2 m A 3RK1 901-1NR22 1 1 unit 121 0.100 Quadruple M12 socket Supplied with coupling module -- A 3RK1 901-1NR00 1 1 unit 121 0.186 3RK1 901-1TR00 M12-T distributor • IP68 • 1 x M12 connector • 2 x M12 box C 3RK1 901-1TR00 1 1 unit 121 0.038 6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0 M12 Y-shaped coupler plugs for connection of two sensors to one M12 socket with Y connector A 6ES7 194-1KA01-0XA0 1 1 unit 250 0.046 3RK1 901-3RA00 Addressing cable with jack plugs to M12 • For addressing K20 modules • Required only for 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit • If the latest version of the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit is used, the addressing is performed with a standard 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5 M12 cable C 3RK1 901-3RA00 1 1 unit 121 0.064 Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 17.
    AS-Interface Slaves Analog I/O modules,IP67 – K60 2/11Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Overview AS-Interface analog modules from the K60 compact series detect or issue analog signals locally. These modules are linked to the higher level controller through an AS-Interface master according to Specification 2.1 or Specification 3.0. The analog modules are divided into five groups: • Input module for sensors with current signal • Input module for sensors with voltage signal • Input module for sensors with thermal resistor • Output module for current actuators • Output module for voltage actuators The input modules according to Profile 7.3/7.4 are available with two or four input channels. It is possible in addition to convert the two-channel module to using only one input channel, thus enabling very short times before the analog value is available. The conversion is effected by means of a jumper plug at socket 3.The transmission times achieved with analog modules according to Profile 7.A.9 are half shorter than those achieved with Profile 7.3/7.4. Operation is adjustable in this case, e.g. it is possible to choose with the ID1 Code whether the module is op- erated with one or two channels. The output modules are configured as two-channel modules as standard. The input and output channels are electrically isolated from the AS-Interface network. If sensors with a higher power require- ment are to be connected, more power can be supplied through the auxiliary voltage as an alternative to the internal supply. In the manual the modules are presented in great detail along with their technical specifications and in-depth notes on opera- tion. Sample function blocks round off the manual. ■Benefits • Analog modules are just as easy to integrate in AS-Interface as digital modules • Analog values can be easily detected and issued locally • Preprocessing of the analog value transmission in the master enables rapid evaluation of the analog values • Up to four values can be detected using one analog module • Extremely fast transmission and conversion of analog values is possible by the new possibility of changing over to single- channel operation Specification 3.0 now provides the following benefits in addition: • A/B technology is now also available with analog modules • On average the transmission times are shorter by half (only three or four cycles depending on the resolution selected); the total processing times can be found in the manual • Operation is variably adjustable: 12 or 14-bit resolution, one or two channels can be selected with the ID1 Code • Handling of the analog value processing with masters Specification 3.0, the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced, has been further simplified
  • 18.
    AS-Interface Slaves Analog I/O modules,IP67 – K60 2/12 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Selection and ordering data You can find more information on the Internet at: http://mall.ad.siemens.com Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg 3RK1 207-1BQ44-0AA3 Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60, Analog Profile 7.3 • Slave type: Standard • Modules supplied without mounting plate Inputs Type Measuring range 1 or 2 inputs (switch-selectable by means of a jumper plug at socket 3) Current 4 ... 20 mA or ± 20 mA (selectable) A 3RK1 207-1BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.187 Voltage ± 10 V or 1 ... 5 V (selectable) A 3RK1 207-2BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.188 Thermal resistance Pt 100 or Ni 100 or 0 ... 600 Ω (selectable) A 3RK1 207-3BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.183 4 inputs Current 4 ... 20 mA or ± 20 mA (selectable) A 3RK1 207-1BQ44-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.190 Voltage ± 10 V or 1 ... 5 V (selectable) C 3RK1 207-2BQ44-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.190 Thermal resistance Pt 100 or Ni 100 or 0 ... 600 Ω (selectable) A 3RK1 207-3BQ44-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.190 Outputs Type Output range 2 outputs Current for 2-wire actuators 4 ... 20 mA or ± 20 mA or 0 ... 20 mA (selectable) A 3RK1 107-1BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.200 Voltage for 2-wire actuators ± 10 V or 0 ... 10 V or 1 ... 5 V (selectable) A 3RK1 107-2BQ40-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.200 3RK2 207-2BQ50-0AA3 Analog I/O module, IP67 – K60, Analog Profile 7.A.9 • Slave type: A/B (Specification 3.0) • Modules supplied without mounting plate Inputs Type Measuring range 1 or 2 inputs (variably adjustable) Current 4 ... 20 mA or ± 20 mA (selectable) A 3RK2 207-1BQ50-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.187 Voltage ± 10 V or 1 ... 5 V (selectable) A 3RK2 207-2BQ50-0AA3 1 1 unit 121 0.187 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 19.
    AS-Interface Slaves Analog I/O modules,IP67 – K60 2/13Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Accessories Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg Manual, German available only as a download from the Internet: http://www.siemens.de/automation/manuals 3RK1 901-0CA00 K60 mounting plates • Wall mounting } 3RK1 901-0CA00 1 1 unit 121 0.065 • Standard rail mounting } 3RK1 901-0CB01 1 1 unit 121 0.095 3RK1 901-1KA00 M12 sealing caps } 3RK1 901-1KA00 100 10 units 121 0.100 3RK1 902-0AR00 Sealing sets • For K60 mounting plate and distribution board • Cannot be used for K45 mounting plate • One set contains one straight and one shaped seal B 3RK1 902-0AR00 100 5 units 121 0.100 3RK1 901-1AA00 Jumper plugs for changing over the 2-channel input modules A 3RK1 901-1AA00 1 1 unit 121 0.012 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 20.
    AS-Interface Routers DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 2/14Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Design • Solid plastic enclosure in degree of protection IP20 for standard rail mounting • Compact design - Display in the front panel for detailed indication of the operating state and functional readiness of all connected and activated AS-Interface slaves - 6 buttons for starting up and testing the AS-Interface line directly on DP/AS-i LINK Advanced - LED indication of the operating state of PROFIBUS DP and AS-Interface - Integrated Ethernet port (RJ45 socket) for user-friendly start-up, diagnostics and testing of the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced through a web interface using a standard browser - Supply voltage from the AS-Interface shaped cable or alternatively through the 24 V DC supply - Small mounting depth thanks to recessed plug mounting • Simple mounting on standard rail • Operation without fans and batteries • Quick exchange of devices in the event of a fault when using the optional C-PLUG exchange medium (not included in the scope of supply) ■Function The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced provides a PROFIBUS DP master with the possibilities of cyclic access to the I/O data of all the slaves of a lower-level AS-Interface segment. According to the extended AS-Interface Specification (V3.0) it is possible to connect a maximum of 62 slaves, each with 4 inputs and 4 outputs and analog slaves, per AS-Interface line. DP/AS-i LINK Advanced occupies in the master as standard 32 bytes of input data and 32 bytes of output data in which the I/O data of the connected AS-Interface slaves are stored. The size of the input/output buffer can be compressed so that only the actually required I/O memory space is occupied in the system of the DP master. The integrated evaluation of analog signals is just as easy as access to digital values; there is no need to call any communication modules. PROFIBUS DP V1 masters are able in addition to initiate AS-Interface master calls (e.g. to write parameters, change addresses or read diagnostics values) through the acyclic PROFIBUS services. Using an operating display in AS-i Link it is possible to fully commission the lower-level AS-Interface line. The DP/AS-i LINK Advanced is equipped with an additional Ethernet port which enables use of the integrated web server and further increases the previously described user-friendliness of the operating display. Free firmware updates are also possible. The optional C-PLUG supports module exchange without a PG, thus reducing downtimes to a minimum in the event of a fault. Diagnostics With LEDs, the display and control keys, web interface and STEP 7 there is an extensive diagnostics offering that includes: • Operating state of the link • State of the link as a PROFIBUS DP slave • Diagnostics of the AS-Interface network • Message frame statistics • Standard diagnostics pages for fast diagnostics access using a standard browser Configuration The configuration of the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be defined either by means of STEP 7/NCM PC or simply by adopting the ACTUAL configuration on the display. Alternatively the DP/AS-i LINK Advanced can be integrated through the PROFIBUS type file (GSD) in the engineering tool: • COM PROFIBUS • Older STEP 7/NCM PC versions • Non-Siemens engineering tools With STEP 7 configuring, the AS-Interface configuration can be uploaded in STEP 7 V5.4 and higher. The user-friendly configu- ration of AS-Interface slaves from Siemens is also possible here in HW-Config (slave catalog).
  • 21.
    AS-Interface Routers DP/AS-i LINK Advanced 2/15SiemensLV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Technical specifications DP/AS-i LINK Advanced Transmission rates per AS-Interface line • AS-Interface bus cycle time 5 ms with 31 slaves; 10 ms with 62 slaves • PROFIBUS transmission rate max. 12 Mbit/s • Ethemet transmission rate 10/100Mbit/s, autosensing Interfaces • AS-Interface connection 1 x 4-pole clamping contacts (plug-in) - for single master 1 x 4-pole clamping contacts (plug-in) - for double master (2 AS-i lines) 2 x 4-pole clamping contacts (plug-in) • Connection to PROFIBUS 9-pole Sub D socket • Communication to Ethernet RJ45 socket • Optional: 24 V DC supply voltage 3-pole clamping contacts (plug-in) Display 128 x 64 pixel with background lighting Keys Membrane keypad (6 keys) Supply voltage • From the AS-Interface shaped cable (line 1) acc. to AS-Interface Specification EN 50295 • Optional: 24 V DC 24 V DC, protective ground conductor Current consumption • From the AS-Interface shaped cable max. 200 mA Load capacity • 5 V DC at the PROFIBUS connection max. 70 mA • Power loss 7,5 W Degree of protection IP20 Permissible ambient conditions • Operating temperature - Horizontal mounting 0 °C to +60 °C - Vertical mounting 0 °C to +45 °C • Transport and storage temperature -30 °C to +70 °C • Relative humidity Max. 95 % at +25 °C • Operating altitude 3000 m above sea level Structural design • Installation on standard mounting rail • Dimensions (W x H x D) in mm 90 x 132 x 88.5 • Weight approx. 380 g Supported AS-Interface master profiles M1, M2, M3, M4 (acc. to Complete AS-Interface Spec- ification V3.0) Configuring the AS-Interface using pushbuttons on the front panel, with STEP 7 V5.4 or higher, through web interface DP/AS-i LINK Advanced
  • 22.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/16 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Design Installation Mounting the K20 modules: on the front (see left) or on the side (see right) The K20 modules are mounted with two screws. A mounting plate is not required. In addition to mounting in the front it is possible to mount the modules on the side in a space-saving and protected position, e.g. on mounting rails. Addressing Addressing the K20 modules Addressing the K20 modules is performed using the same socket as for the bus connection. For the addressing the module is connected to the 3RK1 904-2AB01 addressing unit using a standard M12 cable (2 or 3-pole), e.g. 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5. If the older version of the 3RK1 904-2AB00 addressing unit is used, a special addressing cable (3RK1 901-3RA00) is required for connection to the addressing unit. After the addressing operation the addressing cable is removed again and the module connected to the bus line. No 4 or 5-pole connecting cable may be used for the addressing. All standard K20 modules (not ASIsafe versions) support the extended address mode and can be addressed with an A or B address. Up to 62 slaves can thus be operated on one AS-Interface network. The version with four inputs and four out- puts (3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3) works according to the new AS-Interface Specification 3.0. Through Specification 3.0 it is possible for even A/B slaves to have four outputs (instead of only three possible up to now with Specification 2.1). Please note that this module can be used only with a new master according to AS-Interface Specification 3.0 (e.g. the new DP/AS-i LINK Advanced) and that the cycle times for the outputs can extend to max. 20 ms. Connection AS-Interface M12 feeders and distribution boards, closed AS-Interface M12 feeders and distribution boards, open NSA0_00443 3RK1 904-2AB01 AS-Interface: 1 ... 31 (1A ... 31B) AS-Interface Pin ASi- 3 3RK2 200- ... 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF32-1AB5 3RK2 400- ... 1 ASi+ ASi+ 2 not conn. AUX- 4 not conn. AUX+ 3 ASi- ASi- ASi- 3 ASi+ 14 ASi+ 1 3 2 4 1
  • 23.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/17Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 For simple connection of the K20 modules to the AS-Interface flat cable there is a new series of AS-Interface distribution boards and M12 feeders: AS-Interface distribution boards Like the AS-Interface 3RK1 901-1NN00 standard distribution board, the new AS-Interface 3RK1 901-1NN10 compact distribution board enables distribution of the AS-Interface flat cable to several lines. The compact distribution board can be used for a current carrying capacity of up to 6 A. It is character- ized by particularly simple handling: • insert the cable, • swing closed and • screw down with only one captive screw. No additional seals are required for the compact distribution board. The AS-Interface flat cable must always be passed through the compact distribution board, i.e. it must never be terminated inside the compact distribution board. For higher currents and for cases where one of the two flat cables is to be terminated inside the distribution board, the standard distribu- tion board must be used. AS-Interface M12 feeders AS-Interface M12 feeders are available in the same design as the compact distribution boards. They are required for transfer- ring from the AS-Interface flat cable to a round cable. The spectrum covers AS-Interface M12 feeders with different cable lengths (1 and 2 m) and differentiates between M12 feeders for AS-i/Uaux for connection of I/O modules and AS-Interface without Uaux for connection of modules with inputs. These AS-Interface M12 feeders are just as easy to handle as the AS-Interface compact distributor. The flat cable must always be passed through the M12 distribution board, i.e. it must never be terminated inside the M12 distribution board. For the event that the AS-Interface flat cable is to be terminated in the M12 feeder, the standard M12 feeder (3RX9 801-0AA00) or the quadruple M12 (feeder 3RK1 901-1NR00) are available. The different possibilities of connecting the K20 modules to the AS-Interface bus line and the 24 V DC auxiliary voltage are presented in the following table: To connect the feeder and the K20 module over a cable length > 2 m it is also possible to use freely configurable cables with an M12 cable box and an open cable end, which are fitted with an M12 plug (straight version: 3RX8 000-0CD45, 3RX8 000-0CE45 angle plug ) and connected to the feeder. This cable is available in two versions: • 3RX8 000-0CB42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 cable box • 3RX8 000-0CC42-1AF0: 5 m long, with M12 angle cable box To connect more than one K20 modules to one spur line, the spur line can be split again using a T distributor (3RK1 901-1TR00). Digital I/O modules IP67 – K20 AS-i without Uaux AS-i / Uaux 4DI, M8 3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 2DI/2DO, M8 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3 4DI, M12 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3 2DI/2DO, M12 3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3 2FDI, M12 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3 4DI/4DO, M8 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 K20 module • plus M12 feeder with integrally extruded cable M12 feeder: 3RK1 901-1NR11 (1 m) or 3RK1 901-1NR12 (2 m) M12 feeder: 3RK1 901-1NR21 (1 m) or 3RK1 901-1NR22 (2 m) K20 module • plus M12 feeder with socket • plus separate M12 cable M12 feeder: 3RX9 801-0AA00 M12 feeder: 3RG7 838-1DG M12 cable: 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m) M12 cable: 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m) K20 module • plus quadruple M12 feeder • plus separate M12 cable M12 feeder: 3RK1 901-1NR00 M12 feeder: 3RK1 901-1NR00 M12 cable: 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m) M12 cable: 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 (0.6 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 (1.0 m) 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 (1.5 m) NSA0_00445 NSA0_00446 NSA0_00447 NSA0_00448 NSA0_00449 NSA0_00450
  • 24.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/18 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 Options for connection of the K20 modules to other AS-Interface modules Please note the following boundary conditions: • The configuration guidelines for AS-Interface generally apply. For all M12 connecting cables the maximum permissible current is limited to 4 A. The cross-section of these cables amounts to just 0.34 mm². For connection of the K20 modules the previously mentioned M12 connecting cables can be used for the spur lines. The voltage drop caused by the ohmic re- sistance (approx. 0.11 Ω/m) must be taken into account. • For round cable connections with joint routing of AS-i and Uaux in one line the following maximum lengths apply: - Yes, spur line from feeder to module: maximum 5 m - Sum of all round cable pieces in one AS-Interface network: maximum 20 m Mounting examples for K20 modules NSA0_00444a 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AA6 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB0 3RX8 000-0GF42-1AB5 3RG9 001-0AD00 3RK1 901-1NR11 3RK1 901-1NR12 3RK1 901-1NR21 3RK1 901-1NR22 3RX9 801-0AA00 3RK1 901-1TR00 l 5 m< l 5 m< l 1,5 m< l 1,5 m< NSA0_00451 Connection using 4-fold M12 feeder (3RK1 901-1NR00) (AS-i/ ) for I/O modules Uaux Connection using M12 feeder (3RK1 901-1NR2.) (AS-i/ ) for I/O modules Further distribution using M12 T feeder (3RK1 901-1TR00) Connection using M12 feeder (3RK1 901-1NR1.) (AS-i without ) for modules with inputs Uaux Uaux
  • 25.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/19Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Technical specifications Digital I/O module IP67 – K20 4 inputs 4 inputs 2 inputs/ 2 outputs M8 M12 M8 3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3 Slave type A/B slave A/B slave A/B slave Operational voltage acc. to AS-Interface Specification in V 26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6 26.5 ... 31.6 Total current input in mA ≤ 270 ≤ 270 ≤ 270 Input circuit PNP PNP PNP Inputs • Sensor supply using AS-Interface Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant • Sensors 2- and 3-wire 2- and 3-wire 2- and 3-wire • Voltage range in V 16.5... 30 16.5 ... 30 16.5 ... 30 • Current carrying capacity for all inputs (Tu ≤ 40 °C) in mA 200 200 150 • Current carrying capacity for all inputs (Tu ≤ 55 °C) in mA 150 150 70 • Switching level High in V ≥ 10 ≥ 10 ≥ 10 • Input current Low/High in mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 • Socket assignment of inputs - PIN 1 Sensor supply L+ Sensor supply L+ Sensor supply L+ - PIN 2 -- Data input 2 -- - PIN 3 Sensor supply L- Sensor supply L- Sensor supply L- - PIN 4 Data input Data input 1 Data input - PIN 5 -- Not assigned -- Outputs • Type of output -- -- Solid-state • Current carrying capacity in A per output DC 12 /13 typical -- -- 1 • Maximum aggregate current per module in A -- -- 1 • Socket assignment of outputs -- -- 3 = "-" 4 = output • Short-circuit protection -- -- Built-in • Induction protection -- -- Built-in • External power supply 24 V DC -- -- Shared round cable connection with AS-Interface connection through M12 female connector • Watchdog -- -- Built-in I/O configuration 0 0 B ID/ID2 code A/0 A/2 A/0 Assignment of data bits • Socket 1 PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN4 = IN1 (D0) PIN2 = IN2 (D1) PIN4 = IN3(D2) • Socket 2 PIN4 = IN2 (D1) PIN4 = IN3 (D2) PIN2 = IN4 (D3) PIN4 = IN4 (D3) • Socket 3 PIN4 = IN3(D2) n/a PIN4 = OUT1(D0) • Socket 4 PIN4 = IN4 (D3) n/a PIN4 = OUT2 (D1) • Socket 5 n/a n/a n/a • Socket 6 n/a n/a n/a • Socket 7 n/a n/a n/a • Socket 8 n/a n/a n/a AS-Interface certificate Yes Yes Yes Approvals submitted for UL/CSA approval submitted for UL/CSA approval submitted for UL/CSA approval
  • 26.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/20 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 Digital I/O module IP67 – K20 4 inputs 4 inputs 2 inputs/ 2 outputs M8 M12 M8 3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3 3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3 Degree of protection IP65/67 IP65/67 IP65/67 Ground terminal n/a n/a n/a Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 Number of I/O sockets 4 2 4 Status displays • Display of I/Os Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED • Display of Uaux Not required Not required Green LED • Display of AS-Interface/diagnostics Green/red LED Green/red LED Green/red LED Note -- -- An external additional supply (AUX POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required for the supply of the output circuits. The additional supply must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection class III. Digital I/O module IP67 – K20 2 inputs/ 2 outputs 4 inputs/ 4 outputs 2 inputs, safe M12 M8 M12 3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3 Slave type A/B slave A/B Slave (Specification 3.0) Standard slave Operational voltage acc. to AS-Interface Specification in V 26,5 ... 31,6 26,5 ... 31,6 26,5 ... 31,6 Total current input in mA ≤ 270 ≤ 270 ≤ 45 Input circuit PNP PNP for mechanical switching contacts Inputs • Sensor supply using AS-Interface Short-circuit and overload resistant Short-circuit and overload resistant not applicable • Sensors 2- and 3-wire 2- and 3-wire Mechanical switching contact • Voltage range in V 16,5 ... 30 16,5 ... 30 not applicable • Current carrying capacity for all inputs (Tu ≤ 40 °C) in mA 150 200 not applicable • Current carrying capacity for all inputs (Tu ≤ 55 °C) in mA 70 150 not applicable • Switching level High in V ≥ 10 ≥ 10 not applicable • Input current Low/High in mA ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 ≤ 1.5 / ≥ 6 -- / Ipeak ≥ 5 • Socket assignment of inputs PIN 1 = sensor supply L+ PIN 2 = data input II PIN 3 = sensor supply L- PIN 4 = data input I PIN 5 = not assigned PIN 1 = sensor supply L+ PIN 3 = sensor supply L- PIN 4 = data input PIN 1/2 = F-IN1 PIN 3/4 = F-IN2 PIN 5 = not assigned Outputs • Type of output Solid-state Solid-state -- • Current carrying capacity in A per output DC 12 /13 typical 1 1 -- • Maximum aggregate current per module in A 1 2 at T = 40 °C -- • Socket assignment of outputs 2 = output 2 3 = "-" 4 = output 1 3 = "-" 4 = output -- • Short-circuit protection Built-in Built-in -- • Induction protection Built-in Built-in -- • External power supply 24 V DC Shared round cable connection with AS-Interface connection through M12 female connector Shared round cable connection with AS-Interface connection through M12 female connector -- • Watchdog Built-in Built-in -- I/O configuration B 7 0 ID/ID2 code A/2 A/7 B/0
  • 27.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/21Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 Digital I/O module IP67 – K20 2 inputs/ 2 outputs 4 inputs/ 4 outputs 2 inputs, safe M12 M8 M12 3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3 3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3 3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3 Assignment of data bits • Socket 1 PIN4 = IN3 (D2) PIN2 = IN4 (D3) PIN4 = IN1(D0) PIN 1/2 = F-IN1 PIN 3/4 = F-IN2 PIN 5 = not assigned • Socket 2 PIN4 = OUT1 (D0) PIN2 = OUT2 (D1) PIN4 = IN2 (D1) PIN 1/2 = F-IN2 PIN 3/4 = not assigned PIN 5 = not assigned • Socket 3 n/a PIN4 = IN3(D2) n/a • Socket 4 n/a PIN4 = IN4 (D3) n/a • Socket 5 n/a PIN4 = OUT1(D0) n/a • Socket 6 n/a PIN4 = OUT2 (D1) n/a • Socket 7 n/a PIN4 = OUT3 (D2) n/a • Socket 8 n/a PIN4 = OUT4 (D3) n/a AS-Interface certificate Yes Under application Yes Approvals submitted for UL/CSA approval submitted for UL/CSA approval submitted for UL/CSA approval Degree of protection IP65/67 IP65/67 IP65/67 Ground terminal n/a n/a n/a Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 -25 ... +70 Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 Number of I/O sockets 4 8 4 Status displays • Display of I/Os Yellow LED Yellow LED Yellow LED • Display of Uaux Green LED Green LED Not required • Display of AS-Interface/diagnostics Green/red LED Green/red LED Green/red LED Note 1 An external additional supply (AUX POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required for the supply of the output circuits. The additional supply must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection class III. An external additional supply (AUX POWER) of 20 to 30 V DC is required for the supply of the output circuits. The additional supply must comply with VDE 0106 (PELV), protection class III. Note 2 A master acc. to AS-Interface Specification 3.0 is required for this module
  • 28.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/22 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 AS-Interface M12 feeder AS-i flat cable AS-i / Uaux flat cable to M12 cable box to M12 cable box to quadruple M12 socket 1 m 2 m 1 m 2 m -- 3RK1 901-1NR11 3RK1 901-1NR12 3RK1 901-1NR21 3RK1 901-1NR22 3RK1 901-1NR00 Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 DC Total current carrying capacity in A 6 4 Socket assignment 1 = AS-i "+" 2 = not assigned 3 = AS-i "–" 4 = not assigned 1 = AS-i "+" 2 = Uaux "-" 3 = AS-i "–" 4 = Uaux "+" Degree of protection IP67 / IP68 / IP69K IP67 Ambient temperature in °C –25 ... +85 Storage temperature in °C –40 ... +85 Note Flat cable can be termi- nated inside the feeder Connection through FKE coupling module (included in the scope of supply) M12-T distributor 3RK1 901–1TR00 Voltage range in V 20 ... 30 DC Current carrying capacity total in A 4 at T = 40 °C Connection M12 Degree of protection IP68 Ambient temperature in °C -25 ... +85 Storage temperature in °C -25 ... +85 Number of M12 sockets 1 × M12 connector / 2 × M12 box
  • 29.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/23Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Dimensional drawings K20 module, four inputs, M8 (3RK2 200-0CT30-0AA3) K20 module, two inputs / two outputs, M8 (3RK2 400-1BT30-0AA3) K20 module, four inputs, M12 (3RK2 200-0CQ30-0AA3) K20 module, two inputs / two outputs, M12 (3RK2 400-1BQ30-0AA3) K20 module, two safe inputs, M12 (3RK1 205-0BQ30-0AA3) K20 module, four inputs / four outputs, M8 (3RK2 400-1CT30-0AA3) AS-Interface standard distributor, for AS-Interface flat cable (3RK1 901-1NN00) AS-Interface compact distributor, for AS-Interface flat cable (3RK1 901-1NN10) AS-Interface M12 feeder, AS-i / Uaux, M12 cable box, 1 m cable length (3RK1 901-1NR21) M12-T distributor (3RK1 901-1TR00) 20 20 38 45 NSA0_00437a 100 108 Ø 4,6 20 20 38 45 NSA0_00438a 100 108 Ø 4,6 20 20 38 45 155 164 NSA0_00439a Ø 4,6 31 NSA00308 45 667 80 21 33 ø5,2 ø5,2 ø5,1 NSA0_00452 2619 5 20 35 40 NSA0_00440 2619 5 20 351000 M12 40 M12x1 M12x1 M12x1 56 45 17 NSA0_00340 1 2 3 4 3 4 1 2 1 2 3 4 Male cable plug Fem. cable plug Cover ring Wiring diagram 4-pole
  • 30.
    AS-Interface Slaves Digital I/O modulesIP67 – K20 2/24 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Schematics Inputs Terminal assignment for input, M8 socket, standard assignment Terminal assignment for input, M12 socket, Y assignment Terminal assignment for safe input, M12 socket, Y-II assignment Outputs Terminal assignment for output, M8 socket, standard assignment Terminal assignment for out put, M12 socket, Y assignment 1 3 4 NSA0_00196a Pin 1: Supply L+ Pin 4: Supply L– Pin 4: Input signal NSA0_00008d 1 2 4 3 5 Pin 1: Supply L+ Pin 2: Input signal 2 Pin 3: Supply L– Pin 4: Input signal 1 Pin 5: Earth connection 1 3 4 2 NSA0_00442a Socket Assignment / data sheets / function 1 Pin 1 and Pin 2: Influences the bits D0 and D1 = Channel 1 Pin 3 and Pin 4: Influences the bits D2 and D3 = Channel 2 Pin 5 not assigned 2 Pin 1 and Pin 2: Influences the bits D2 and D3 = Channel 2 Pin 3, Pin 4 and Pin 5 not assigned Socket 1 Socket 2 1 3 4 NSA0_00441b Pin 1: Supply L+ Pin 4: Supply L– Pin 4: Input signal 1 2 4 3 5 NSA0_00009b Pin 1: Pin 2: Output signal 2 Pin 3: Supply L– Pin 4: Output signal 1 Pin 5: Earth connection
  • 31.
    AS-Interface Slaves Analog I/O modules,IP67 – K60 2/25Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Function Data transfer according to Analog Profile 7.3/7.4 With Analog Profile 7.3/7.4 at least seven AS-Interface cycles must be passed through before transmission is completed. This requires the use of a master according to Extended Specification V2.1. With input modules the complete analog value is then available in the AS-Interface master. Preprocessing is thus performed in the master. With the next system function call the user program brings the analog value as one value into the user program. Hence the analog value is very quickly updated. The analog value transmission allies in reverse order for the output modules as well. In total this results in the following maximum times before the analog value with Profile 7.3/7.4 (with presetting: smoothing function deactivated; line filter 50 Hz) is available: Data transfer according to Analog Profile 7.A.9 With Analog Profile 7.A.9 only three or four AS-Interface cycles are required for the transmission. This requires the use of a master according to Extended Specification 3.0. The maximum times before the analog value with Profile 7.A.9 is available are presented in detail in the manual according to the mode selected (resolution, number of channels, A/B technology). G_NSA0_XX_00181 Analog module One User program cycle with system function call Conversion Analog valueCPU Seven AS-Interface cycles (max. 5 ms each) Note: Values can be accesses with SFC58, SFC59 integrated standard function blocks AS-Interface Master 1 channel 2 channels 4 channels Conversion and transmission time max. 95 ms max. 235 ms max. 435 ms G_NSA0_XX_00436Analog module One User program cycle with system function call Conversion Analog valueCPU Seven AS-Interface cycles (max. 5 ms each) Note: Values can be accesses with SFC58, SFC59 integrated standard function blocks AS-Interface Master
  • 32.
    AS-Interface Slaves Analog I/O modules,IP67 – K60 2/26 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 ■Technical specifications ■Schematics Pin assignment for input module Current input for 4-wire sensor Current input for 2-wire sensor Voltage input for 4-wire sensor Thermal resistor for 4-wire sensor Thermal resistor for 2-wire sensor Thermal resistor for 3-wire sensor Analog I/O modules, IP67 – K60 Analog Profile 7.3 Analog Profile 7.A.9 Slave type Analog slave A/B analog slave (Spec. 3.0) Profile 7.3 D/E 7.A.9 Number format S7 S7 Operational voltage acc. to AS-Interface Specification in V 26,5 ... 31,6 26,5 ... 31,6 Total current input of the module including connection of sensors / actuators in mA 150 150 Current transfer with connection of two/four sensors in mA (without Uaux infeed) max. 46 / max. 46 max. 46 Additional supply of sensors through Uaux in V 24 up to 30 24 up to 30 Current transfer from Uaux with connection of two/four sensors in mA max. 500 / max. 500 max. 500 Current transfer with connection of two current / voltage actuators in mA max. 30 / max. 24 -- I/O configuration 7 7 ID Code 3 A ID-2 Code D/E 9 Certification UL, CSA, shipbuilding UL, CSA, shipbuilding available soon Degree of protection IP67 (with inserted cables) IP67 (with inserted cables) Ambient temperature in °C -20 ... +60 -20 ... +60 Storage temperature in °C -40 ... +85 -40 ... +85 Display of AUX PWR (Uaux) Green LED Green LED Display of AS-i Green LED Green LED Display of FAULT Red LED Red LED Connection Using mounting plate for K60 compact module Using mounting plate for K60 compact module NSA0_00013b 1 2 4 3 5 Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V) Pin 2: IN+ Pin 3: Supply M (ground) Pin 4: IN- Pin 5: Cable shield / FG (functional ground) All pin assignments are shown without external sensor supply. NSA0_00014c 1 2 4 3 5 Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V) Pin 2: IN+ Pin 3: Supply M (ground) Pin 4: IN- Pin 5: Cable shield / FG (functional ground) All pin assignments are shown without external sensor supply. Bridge from to M(3) can be set intenally via parameterisation n– NSA0_00017b 1 2 4 3 5 Pin 1: Supply L+ (DC 24 V) Pin 2: IN+ Pin 3: Supply M (ground) Pin 4: IN- Pin 5: Cable shield / FG (functional ground) All pin assignments are shown without external sensor supply. NSA0_00018b 1 2 4 3 5 Pt 100 I I Pin 1: Pin 2: IN+ Pin 3: Pin 4: IN- Pin 5: Cable shield All pin assignments are shown without external sensor supply. const+ const– NSA0_00015c 1 2 4 3 5 Pt 100 I I Pin 1: Pin 2: IN+ Pin 3: Pin 4: IN- Pin 5: Cable shield All pin assignments are shown without external sensor supply. const+ const– NSA0_00019c 1 2 4 3 5 Pt 100 const+ const– Pin 1: Pin 2: IN+ Pin 3: Pin 4: IN- Pin 5: Cable shield All pin assignments are shown without external sensor supply.
  • 33.
    AS-Interface Slaves Analog I/O modules,IP67 – K60 2/27Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 2 Pin assignment for output module Current output Voltage output Connection of the 2-channel input modules for single-channel use The 3RK1 901-1AA00 input bridge can also be used for this purpose. NSA0_00016a 1 2 4 3 5 Pin 5: Cable shield All pin assignments are shown without external sensor supply. NSA0_00020a 1 2 4 3 5 Pin 5: Cable shield All pin assignments are shown without external sensor supply. NSA0_00409 1 2 5
  • 34.
  • 35.
    Siemens LV 1News · 04/2006 4/2 Introduction Solid-State Switching Devices 4/3 General data Solid-State Relays 4/6 3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm Solid-State Contactors 4/7 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 3RF29 Function Modules 4/9 Power control regulators Solid-State Switching Devices 4/10 General data Solid-State Relays 4/11 3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm Solid-State Contactors 4/16 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 3RF29 Function Modules 4/24 General data 4/25 Power control regulators Controls – Solid-State Switching Devices Catalog Technical Information
  • 36.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Introduction 4/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 ■Overview 3RF21 3RF20 3RF22 3RF23 3RF24 3RF29 Order No. Page SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices Solid-state relays 22.5 mm solid-state relays 45 mm solid-state relays • Widths of 22.5 mm and 45 mm • Compact and space-saving design • "Zero-point switching" version • Mounting onto existing heat sinks 3RF21, 3RF20 3RF22 Catalog LV 1 4/6 Solid-state contactors Solid-state contactors • Complete units comprising a solid-state relay and an optimized heat sink, "ready to use" • Compact and space-saving design • Versions for resistive loads "zero-point switching" and inductive loads "instantaneous switching" • Special designs "Low Noise" and "Short-Circuit Resistant" 3RF23 3RF24 Catalog LV 1 4/7 Function modules For extending the functionality of the 3RF21 solid-state relays and the 3RF23 solid-state contactors for many different applications: Converter • For converting an analog input signal into an on/off ratio; can also be used on 3RF22 and 3RF24 3-phase switching devices 3RF29 00-0EA18 Catalog LV 1 Load monitoring • For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads) 3RF29 20-0FA08, 3RF29 .0-0GA.. Catalog LV 1 Heating current monitoring • For load monitoring of one or more loads (partial loads) 3RF29 ..-0JA.. Catalog LV 1 Power control regulator • For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching device depending on a setpoint value. There is a choice of full-wave control and generalized phase control. 3RF29 .0-0KA.. 4/9 Power controller • For supplying the current by means of a solid-state switching device depending on a setpoint value. Closed-loop control: Full wave control or generalized phase control. 3RF29 .0-0HA.. Catalog LV 1
  • 37.
    Solid-State Switching Devices Generaldata 4/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■Overview SIRIUS solid-state switching devices • Solid-state relays • Solid-state contactors • Function modules SIRIUS – for almost unending activity Conventional electromechanical switching devices are often overtaxed by the rise in the number of switching operations. A high switching frequency results in frequent failure and short re- placement cycles. However, this does not have to be the case, because with the latest generation of our SIRIUS solid-state switching de- vices we provide you with solid-state relays and contactors with a particularly long service life – for almost unending activity even under the toughest conditions and under high mechanical load, but also in noise-sensitive areas. Proved time and again in service SIRIUS solid-state switching devices have become firmly estab- lished in industrial use. They are used above all in applications where loads are switched frequently – mainly with resistive load controllers, with the control of electrical heat or the control of valves and motors in conveyor systems. In addition to its use in areas with high switching frequencies, thanks to its silent switching SIRIUS is also ideally suited to noise-sensitive areas such as offices or hospitals. The most reliable solution for any application Compared with mechanical switching devices, our SIRIUS solid- state switching devices stand out because of their considerably longer service life. Thanks to the high product quality, their switching is extremely precise, reliable and above all insuscep- tible to faults. With its variable connection methods and a wide spread of control voltages, the SIRIUS family is universally appli- cable. Depending on the individual requirements of the applica- tion, our modular switching devices can also be quite easily expanded by the addition of standardized function modules. Always on the sunny side with SIRIUS Because SIRIUS offers even more: • The space-saving and compact side-by-side mounting ensures reliable operation up to an ambient temperature of +60 °C. • Thanks to fast configuration and the ease of installation and start-up, you save not only time but also expenses.
  • 38.
    Solid-State Switching Devices Generaldata 4/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 Type Solid-state relays Solid-state contactors Function modules 1-phase 3-phase 1-phase 3-phase Converter Load monitoring Heating current monitoring Power control regulator Circuit- breaker22.5 mm 45 mm 45 mm Basic Extended Usage Simple use of exist- ing solid-state relays ❑ ✓ ❑ ❑ ❑ -- -- -- -- -- -- Complete device "Ready to use" ❑ ❑ ❑ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- -- Space-saving ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- Can be extended with modular function modules ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- -- Frequent switching and monitoring of loads and solid-state relays/solid-state contactors -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Monitoring of up to 6 partial loads -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- ✓ -- -- Monitoring of more than 6 partial loads -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- -- -- Control of the heat- ing power through an analog input -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- -- -- ✓ ✓ Power control -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ Startup Easy setting of setpoints with "Teach" button -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ "Remote Teach" input for setting setpoints -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ -- -- Mounting Mounting onto mounting rails or mounting plates -- -- -- ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- -- Can be snapped directly onto a solid-state relay or contactor -- -- -- -- -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ For use with "Cool- plate" heat sink ✓ ✓ ✓ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- Cable routing Connection of load circuit as for controls ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ -- ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ Connection of load circuit from above -- ✓ -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- -- ✓ Function is available ❑ Function is possible
  • 39.
    Solid-State Switching Devices Generaldata 4/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■Application Solid-state relays SIRIUS solid-state relays are suitable for surface mounting on existing cooling surfaces. Installation is quick and easy, involving just two screws. The special technology of the power semiconductor ensures there is excellent thermal contact with the heat sink. Depending on the nature of the heat sink, the capacity reaches up to 88 A on resistive loads. The solid-state relays are available in three different versions: • 3RF21 single-phase solid-state relay with a width of 22.5 mm • 3RF20 single-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm • 3RF22 three-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm The 3RF21 and 3RF22 solid-state relays can be expanded with various function modules to adapt them to individual applica- tions. Solid-state contactors The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depend- ing on the version, current intensities of up to 88 A are achieved. Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their parti- cular advantages is their compact and space-saving design. With their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped onto a standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on carrier plates with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be used in circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety extra-low voltage (SELV) in building engineering. For other appli- cations, such as for extended personal safety, the heat sink can be grounded through a screw terminal. The solid-state contactors are available in two different versions: • 3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors • 3RF24 single-phase solid-state contactors The 3RF20 and 3RF21 single-phase solid-state relays and the 3RF23 single-phase solid-state contactors are described in Catalog LV 1 · 2006. ■Design 3RF22 three-phase solid-state relay with a width of 45 mm With its compact design, which stays the same even at currents of up to 55 A, the 3RF22 solid-state relay is the ultimate in space- saving construction, at a width of 45 mm. Installation on cooling surfaces is quick and easy, involving just two screws. The logical connection arrangement, with the power infeed from above and connection of the load from below, ensures tidy installation in the control cabinet. 3RF24 three-phase solid-state contactors The compact design enables small compact units with currents up to 50 A. All special features of the solid-state relays for saving time and space are effective here too. ■Function Two-phase controlled version In many three-phase applications there is no need of a three- phase controller. Loads in a delta circuit or wye circuit, which have no connection to the neutral conductor, can be safely switched on and off using only two phases. Nevertheless, the 3RF22 and 3RF24 three-phase solid-state switching devices provide the possibility of connecting all three phases to the switching device, with the middle phase looped directly through the device. Thanks to the lower power loss compared to a three-phase controlled device it is possible for the mounted accessories to be more compact. Three-phase controlled version This version is used in three-phase applications which have to switch all phases on and off for system reasons or in the case of loads in a wye circuit with connection to the neutral conductor. Version for resistive loads, "zero-point switching" This standard version is often used for switching space heaters on and off.
  • 40.
    Solid-State Relays 3RF22 solid-staterelays, 3-phase, 45 mm 4/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 ■Selection and ordering data Selecting solid-state relays When selecting solid-state relays, in addition to information about the power system, the load and the ambient conditions it is also necessary to know details of the planned design. The solid-state relays can only conform to their specific technical specifications if they are mounted with appropriate care on an adequately dimensioned heat sink. The following procedure is recommended: • Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage • Select the relay design and choose a solid-state relay with higher rated current than the load • Determine the thermal resistance of the proposed heat sink • Check the correct relay size with the aid of the diagrams. 1) The type current provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depending on the connection method and cooling conditions. 2) Please note that the version with an M4 screw terminal can only be used for a rated current of up to approx. 50 A and a conductor cross-section of 10 mm2 . 3) Please note that this version can only be used for a rated current of up to approx. 20 A and a conductor cross-section of 2.5 mm2. Type current1) Rated control supply voltage DT Screw terminal2) PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No. Price per PUA V kg Zero-point switching Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V 3RF22 30-1AB45 Two-phase controlled 30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 55 B 3RF22 55-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 Three-phase controlled 30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 55 B 3RF22 55-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 Type current1) Rated control supply voltage DT Spring-loaded terminals3) PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No. Price per PUA V kg Zero-point switching Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V 3RF22 30-2AB45 Two-phase controlled 30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-2AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 55 B 3RF22 55-2AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 Three-phase controlled 30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-2AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 55 B 3RF22 55-2AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 Type current1) Rated control supply voltage DT Ring terminal end connection PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No. Price per PUA V kg Zero-point switching Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V 3RF22 30-3AB45 Two-phase controlled 30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-3AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 55 B 3RF22 55-3AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 Three-phase controlled 30 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF22 30-3AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 55 B 3RF22 55-3AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.150 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 41.
    Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-statecontactors, 3-phase 4/7Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■Selection and ordering data Selecting solid-state contactors The solid-state contactors are selected on the basis of details of the power system, the load and the ambient conditions. As the solid-state contactors are already equipped with an optimally matched heat sink, the selection process is considerably simpler than that for solid-state relays. The following procedure is recommended: • Determine the rated current of the load and the mains voltage • Select a solid-state contactor with the same or higher rated current than the load • Check the correct contactor size with the aid of the rated current diagram, taking account of the design conditions 1) The type current provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depending on the connection method and cooling conditions. Type current1) Imax Rated control supply voltage DT Screw terminal PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No. Price per PUA V kg Zero-point switching Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V Two-phase controlled 3RF24 20-1AB45 10.5 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 10-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.320 20 B 3RF24 20-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.400 30 B 3RF24 30-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.540 40 B 3RF24 40-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.800 50 B 3RF24 50-1AB45 1 1 unit 101 1.100 10.5 230 V AC B 3RF24 10-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.320 20 B 3RF24 20-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.400 30 B 3RF24 30-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.540 40 B 3RF24 40-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.800 50 B 3RF24 50-1AB55 1 1 unit 101 1.100 Three-phase controlled 3RF24 10-1AC45 10.5 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 10-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.320 20 B 3RF24 20-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.540 30 B 3RF24 30-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.800 40 B 3RF24 40-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 1.100 50 B 3RF24 50-1AC45 1 1 unit 101 1.850 10.5 230 V AC B 3RF24 10-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.320 20 B 3RF24 20-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.540 30 B 3RF24 30-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.800 40 B 3RF24 40-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 1.100 50 B 3RF24 50-1AC55 1 1 unit 101 1.850 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 42.
    Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-statecontactors, 3-phase 4/8 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 1) The type current provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depending on the connection method and cooling conditions. Type current1) Imax Rated control supply voltage DT Spring-loaded terminals PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No. Price per PUA V kg Zero-point switching Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V 3RF24 10-2AB45 Two-phase controlled 10 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 10-2AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.320 20 B 3RF24 20-2AB45 1 1 unit 101 0.400 10 230 V AC B 3RF24 10-2AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.320 20 B 3RF24 20-2AB55 1 1 unit 101 0.400 Three-phase controlled 10 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 10-2AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.320 20 B 3RF24 20-2AC45 1 1 unit 101 0.540 10 230 V AC B 3RF24 10-2AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.320 20 B 3RF24 20-2AC55 1 1 unit 101 0.540 Type current1) Imax Rated control supply voltage DT Ring terminal end connection PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Order No. Price per PUA V kg Zero-point switching Rated operational voltage Ue 48 V ... 600 V 3RF24 50-3AB45 Two-phase controlled 50 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 50-3AB45 1 1 unit 101 1.100 50 230 V AC B 3RF24 50-3AB55 1 1 unit 101 1.100 Three-phase controlled 50 4 ... 30 V DC B 3RF24 50-3AC45 1 1 unit 101 1.850 50 230 V AC B 3RF24 50-3AC55 1 1 unit 101 1.850 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 43.
    3RF29 Function Modules Powercontrol regulators 4/9Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■Overview Function modules for SIRIUS solid-state switching devices A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of functionality. With our function modules, these requirements can be met really easily. The modules are mounted simply by clicking them into place; straight away the necessary connec- tions are made with the solid-state relay or contactor. The plug-in connection to control the solid-state switching devices can simply remain in use. All three-phase solid-state switching devices in the version with a control supply voltage of 4 to 30 V DC can be supplemented with the 3RF29 00-0EA18 converter. Details of the converter can be found in the Catalog LV1 · 2006. Power control regulators for single-phase solid-state devices The following functions have been integrated: • Power control regulator for adjusting the power of the con- nected load. Here, the setpoint is set with a rotary knob on the module as a percentage with reference to the 100 % power stored as a setpoint. • Inrush current limitation: With the aid of an adjustable voltage ramp, the inrush current is limited by means of phase control. This is useful above all with loads such as lamps or infrared lamps which have an inrush transient current. • Load circuit monitoring for detecting load failure, partial load faults, alloyed power semiconductors, lack of voltage or a break in the load circuit. ■Application The power control regulator adjusts the current in the connected load by means of a solid-state switching device depending on a setpoint. The setpoint can be predefined externally as a 0 to 10 V signal or internally by means of a potentiometer. Depending on the setting of the potentiometer (tR), the control is carried out according to the principle of full-wave control or generalized phase control. Full-wave control In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required setpoint by changing the on-to-off period. The period duration is predefined at one second. Generalized phase control In this operating mode the output is adjusted to the required setpoint by changing the current flow angle. In order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage for indus- trial networks, a choke rated at at least 200 µH must be included in the load circuit. Special versions 3RF29 04 The 3RF29 04 versions are not equipped with the partial load monitoring function. The 3RF29 04-0KC0 version is pro- grammed in addition for no current to flow in the solid-state switching device during the teach routine. ■Selection and ordering data Rated operational current Ie Rated operational voltage Ue DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. A V kg Power control regulators Rated control supply voltage 24 V AC/DC 4 110 … 230 A 3RF29 04-0KA13-0KC0 1 1 unit 101 0.175 4 A 3RF29 04-0KA13-0KT0 1 1 unit 101 0.175 20 A 3RF29 20-0KA13 1 1 unit 101 0.175 20 400 … 600 A 3RF29 20-0KA16 1 1 unit 101 0.175 50 A 3RF29 50-0KA16 1 1 unit 101 0.175 90 A 3RF29 90-0KA16 1 1 unit 101 0.175 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 44.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Switching Devices General data 4/10 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 ■Design There is no typical design of a load feeder with solid-state relays or solid-state contactors; instead, the great variety of connection systems and control voltages offers universal application oppor- tunities. SIRIUS solid-state relays and solid-state contactors can be installed in fuseless or fused feeders, as required. There are special versions with which it is even possible to achieve short-circuit strength in a fuseless design. ■Function Connection technique All SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are characterized by the great variety of connection methods. You can choose be- tween the following connection techniques: Screw terminal system The screw connection system is the standard among industrial controls. Open terminals and a plus-minus screw are just two features of this technology. Two conductors of up to 6 mm² can be connected in just one terminal. As a result, loads of up to 50 A can be connected. Spring-loaded connection system This innovative technology manages without any screw connec- tion. This means that very high vibration resistance is achieved. Two conductors of up to 2.5 mm² can be connected to each terminal. As a result, loads of up to 20 A can be dealt with. Ring terminal end connection The ring terminal end connection is equipped with an M5 screw. Ring terminal ends of up to 25 mm² can be connected. In this way it is possible to connect even high powers with current intensities of up to 90 A safely. Finger-safety is provided in this case too with a special cover. Switching functions In order to guarantee an optimized control method for different loads, the functionality of our solid-state switching devices can be adapted accordingly. The "zero-point switching" method has proved to be ideal for resistive loads, i.e. where the power semiconductor is activated at zero voltage. For inductive loads, on the other hand, for example in the case of valves, it is better to go with "instantaneous switching". By distributing the ON point over the entire sine curve of the mains voltage, disturbances are reduced to a minimum. Performance characteristics The performance of the solid-state switching devices is substan- tially determined by the type of power semiconductors used and the internal design. In the case of the SIRIUS solid-state contac- tors and solid-state relays, only thyristors are used in place of less powerful Triacs. Two of the most important features of thyristors are the blocking voltage and the maximum load integral: Blocking voltage Thyristors with a high blocking voltage can also be operated without difficulty in power systems with high interference voltages. Separate protective measures, such as a protective circuit with a varistor, are not necessary in most cases. With SIRIUS solid-state switching devices, for example, thyris- tors with 800 V blocking voltage are fitted for operation in power systems up to 230 V. Thyristors with up to 1600 V are used for power systems with higher voltages. Maximum load integral One of the purposes of specifying the maximum load integral (I²t) is to determine the rating of the short-circuit protection. Only a large power semiconductor with a correspondingly high I²t value can be given appropriate protection against destruction from a short-circuit by means of a protective device matched to the application. However, SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are also characterized by the optimum matching of the thyristors (I²t value) with the rated currents. The rated currents specified on the devices according to EN 60947-4-3 were confirmed by extensive testing. You can find more information on the Internet at: http://www.siemens.com/siriussc ■Integration Notes on integration in the load feeders The SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are very easy to inte- grate into the load feeders thanks to their industrial connection technology and design. Particular attention must however be paid to the circumstances of the installation and ambient conditions, as the performance of the solid-state switching devices is largely dependent on these. Depending on the version, certain restrictions must be observed. Detailed information, for example in relation to solid- state contactors about the minimum spacing and to solid-state relays about the choice of heat sink, is given in the product data sheets and the technical specifications in the A&D Mall. Despite the rugged power semiconductors that are used, solid-state switching devices respond more sensitively to short-circuits in the load feeder. Consequently, special precau- tions have to be taken against destruction, depending on the type of design. Siemens generally recommends using SITOR solid-state protec- tion fuses. These fuses also provide protection against destruc- tion in the event of a short-circuit even when the solid-state contactors and solid-state relays are fully utilized. Alternatively, if there is lower loading, protection can also be provided by standard fuses or miniature circuit-breakers. This protection is achieved by overdimensioning the solid-state switching devices accordingly. The technical specifications in the A&D Mall and the product data sheets contain details both about the solid-state fuse protection itself and about use of the SIRIUS devices with conventional protection equipment. The SIRIUS solid-state switching devices are suitable for inter- ference-free operation in industrial power systems without further measures. If they are used in public power systems, it may be necessary for conducted interference to be reduced by means of filters. This does not include the special solid-state contactors of type 3RF23..-.CA.. "Low Noise". These comply with the class B limit values up to a rated current of 16 A. If other versions are used, and at currents of over 16 A, standard filters can be used in order to comply with the limit values. The decisive factors when it comes to selecting the filters are essentially the current loading and the other parameters (operational voltage, design type, etc.) in the load feeder. Suitable filters can be ordered from EPCOS AG. You can find more information on the Internet at: http://www.epcos.com
  • 45.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Relays 3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm 4/11Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■Overview 45 mm solid-state relays The 3RF22 solid-state relays with a width of 45 mm provide space advantages over solutions with single-phase versions. The logical connection arrangement, with the power infeed from above and connection of the load from below, ensures tidy installation in the control cabinet. Important features: • LED indicators • Variety of connection techniques • Plug-in control connection • Degree of protection IP20 • Zero-point switching, • Two or three-phase controlled ■Technical specifications 1) These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the may be required to introduce additional damping measures. Type 3RF22 ..-1.... 3RF22 ..-2.... 3RF22 ..-3.... General data Ambient temperature • During operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60 • During storage °C -55 ... +80 Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; > 1000 ask Technical Assistance Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11 Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 g 2 Degree of protection IP20 Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz (main/control circuit to ground) V rms 4000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) • Emitted interference - Conducted interference voltage acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Class A for industrial applications1) - Emitted, high-frequency interference voltage acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Class A for industrial applications • Interference immunity - Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2 - Induced RF fields acc. to IEC 61000-4-6 MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1 - Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1 - Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor – ground 2; conductor – conductor 1; behavior criterion 2 Connection technique Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring terminal end connection Main contact connection • Conductor cross-section - Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) -- - Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) -- - Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) -- - Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14) -- • Stripped length mm 10 10 • Terminal screw M4 -- M5 - Tightening torque, ∅ 5 ... 6 mm, PZ 2 Nm 2 ... 2.5 2.5 ... 2 lb.in 18 ... 22 18 ... 22 • Cable lug -- -- - acc. to DIN 46234 5-2.5 ... 5-25 - acc. to JIS C 2805 R 2-5 ... 14-5 Connection, auxiliary/control contacts • Conductor cross-section, with or without end sleeve mm AWG 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) 20 ... 12 0.5 ... 2.5 20 ... 12 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) 20 ... 12 • Stripped length mm 7 10 7 • Terminal screw M3 -- M3 - Tightening torque, ∅ 3.5 , PZ 1 Nm 0.5 ... 0.6 0.5 ... 0.6 lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 4.5 ... 5.3
  • 46.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Relays 3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm 4/12 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 1) Imax provides information about the performance of the solid-state relay. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depend- ing on the connection method and cooling conditions. Type 3RF22 ..-.AB.5 3RF22 ..-.AC.5 Main circuit Controlled phases Two-phase Three-phase Rated operational voltage Ue V 48 ... 600 48 ... 600 • Operating range V 40 ... 660 40 ... 660 • Rated frequency Hz 50/60 ± 10 % 50/60 ± 10 % Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600 600 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 6 Blocking voltage V 1200 1200 Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1.000 1.000 Order No. Imax 1) Ie acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Ie acc. to UL/CSA Power loss at Imax Minimum load current Max. leakage currentat Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 40 °C at Rthha/Tu = 50 °C A K/W A K/W A K/W W A mA Main circuit 3RF22 30-. AB.. 30 0.57 30 0.57 30 0.44 81 0.5 10 3RF22 55-1AB.. 55 0.18 50 0.27 50 0.19 151 0.5 10 3RF22 55-2AB.. 20 1.83 20 1.58 3RF22 55-3AB.. 50 0.27 50 0.19 3RF22 30-. AC.. 30 0.33 30 0.33 30 0.25 122 0.5 10 3RF22 55-1AC.. 55 0.09 50 0.15 50 0.1 226 0.5 10 3RF22 55-2AC.. 20 1.19 20 1.02 3RF22 55-3AC.. 88 0.15 83 0.1 Order No. Rated impulse withstand capacity Itsm I2 t value A A2s Main circuit 3RF22 30-....5 300 450 3RF22 55-....5 600 1800 Type 3RF22 ..-.AB4. 3RF22 ..-.AC4. Control circuit Method of operation DC operation DC operation Rated control supply voltage Us V 4 ... 30 4 ... 30 Response voltage V 15 15 • For tripping current mA 2 2 Drop-out voltage V 1 1 Operating times • ON-delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 1 + max. one half-wave • OFF delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 1 + max. one half-wave
  • 47.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Relays 3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm 4/13Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■Characteristic curves Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta (two-phase controlled) Type current 30 A (3RF22 30-.AB..) Type current 55 A (3RF22 55-.AB..) Ambient temperature in °CDevice current in A ModulepowerlossinW 4 12 20 30 36 60 NSB0_01671 einA 0 10 20 30 40 50 ae M 28 0,35 K/W 0,45 K/W 0,56 K/W 0,75 K/W 1 K/W 1,3 K/W 1,7 K/W 2,2 K/W 3 K/W 4 K/W 5 K/W 7 K/W 10 K/W 20 40 60 80 100 Rthha Ambient temperature in °CDevice current in A ModulepowerlossinW NSB0_01672 600 10 20 30 40 50 ae einA M 0,13 K/W 0,18 K/W 0,25 K/W 0,37 K/W 0,55 K/W 0,8 K/W 1,2 K/W 2 K/W 3 K/W 4 K/W 5 K/W 7 K/W 10 K/W 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 5 15 25 35 45 55 Rthha
  • 48.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Relays 3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm 4/14 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 Dependence of the device current Ie on the ambient temperature Ta (three-phase controlled) Type current 30 A (3RF22 30-.AC..) Type current 55 A (3RF22 55-.AC..) Arrangement example Given conditions: Ie = 55 A and Ta = 40 C. The task is to find the thermal resistance Rthha and the heat sink overtemperature dTha. From the diagram on the left → PM = 227 W, from the diagram on the right → Rthha = 0.09 K/W. This results in: dTha = Rthha × PM = 0.09 K/W × 227 W = 20.4 K. At dTha = 20.4 K the heat sink must therefore have an Rthha = 0.09 K/W. Ambient temperature in °CDevice current in A ModulepowerlossinW 60 NSB0_01673 einA 4 12 20 28 30 36 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 0 10 20 30 40 50 0,26 K/W 0,33 K/W 0,44 K/W 0,62 K/W 0,9 K/W 1,3 K/W 1,7 K/W 2,2 K/W 3 K/W 4 K/W 5 K/W 7 K/W 10 K/W ae M Rthha Ambient temperature in °CDevice current in A ModulepowerlossinW 60 NSB0_01674 einA 5 15 25 35 45 55 0 50 100 150 200 250 0 10 20 30 40 50 Rthha 0,06 K/W 0,09 K/W 0,15 K/W 0,25 K/W 0,4 K/W 0,6 K/W 0,8 K/W 1,1 K/W 1,5 K/W 2 K/W 3 K/W 4 K/W 6 K/W ae M
  • 49.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Relays 3RF22 solid-state relays, 3-phase, 45 mm 4/15Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■Dimensional drawings Solid-state relays ■Schematics 95 47,5 69 77 69 13 26 30 31 47 29 2933 45 47 NSB0_01689 Screw terminal Spring-loaded terminals Ring terminal end connection 3RF22 ..-1.... 3RF22 ..-2.... 3RF22 ..-3.... Spring-loaded terminals Two-phase controlled DC control supply voltage Three-phase controlled DC control supply voltage A1 + A2 - 1 L1 L23 5 L3 2 T1 T24 6 T3 NSB0_01694 A1 + A2 - 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 2 T1 4 6T2 T3 NSB0_01696
  • 50.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 4/16 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 ■Overview The complete units consist of a solid-state relay plus optimized heat sink, and are therefore ready to use. They offer defined rated currents to make selection as easy as possible. Depend- ing on the version, current intensities of up to 50 A are achieved. Like all of our solid-state switching devices, one of their particu- lar advantages is their compact and space-saving design. With their insulated mounting foot they can easily be snapped onto a standard mounting rail, or they can be mounted on carrier plates with fixing screws. This insulation enables them to be used in circuits with protective extra-low voltage (PELV) or safety extra-low voltage (SELV) in building engineering. For other appli- cations, such as for extended personal safety, the heat sink can be grounded through a screw terminal. Version for resistive loads, "zero-point switching" This standard version is often used for switching space heaters on and off. ■Technical specifications 1) These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the may be required to introduce additional damping measures. Order No. 3RF24 ..-1.... 3RF24 ..-2.... 3RF24 ..-3.... General data Ambient temperature • During operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60 • During storage °C -55 ... +80 Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; derating from 1000 Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11 Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 g 2 Degree of protection IP20 Insulation strength at 50/60 Hz (main/control circuit to ground) V rms 4000 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) • Emitted interference acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 - Conducted interference voltage Class A for industrial applications1) - Emitted, high-frequency interference voltage Class A for industrial applications • Interference immunity - Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2 - Induced RF fields acc. to IEC 61000-4-6 MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1 - Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 kV 2/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1 - Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor – ground 2; conductor – conductor 1; behavior criterion 2 Connection technique Screw terminal Spring-loaded connection Ring terminal end connection Main contact connection • Conductor cross-section - Solid mm2 2 x (1.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6) 2x (0.5 ... 2.5) -- - Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x (1 ... 2.5), 2 x (2.5 ... 6), 1 x 10 2x (0.5 ... 1.5) -- - Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 -- 2x (0.5 ... 2.5) -- - Solid or stranded, AWG conductors 2 x (AWG 14 ... 10) 2 x (AWG 18 ... 14) -- • Stripped length mm 10 10 -- • Terminal screw M4 -- M5 - Tightening torque NM 2 ... 2.5 2 ... 2.5 lb.in 18 ... 22 18 ... 22 • Cable lug -- -- - acc. to DIN 46234 5-2.5 ... 5-25 - acc. to JIS C 2805 R 2-5 ,,, 14-5 Connection, auxiliary/control contacts • Conductor cross-section mm AWG 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) AWG 20 ... 12 0.5 ... 2.5 AWG 20 ... 12 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0) AWG 20 ... 12 • Stripped length mm 7 10 7 • Terminal screw M3 -- M3 - Tightening torque, ∅ 3.5 , PZ 1 NM 0.5 ... 0.6 0.5 ... 0.6 lb.in 4.5 ... 5.3 4.5 ... 5.3
  • 51.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 4/17Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 1) The type current provides information about the performance of the solid- state contactor. The actual permitted rated operational current Ie can be smaller depending on the connection method and start-up conditions. For derating see the characteristic curves on page 4/18. Type 3RF24 ..-.AB.5 3RF24 ..-.AC.5 Main circuit Controlled phases Two-phase Three-phase Rated operational voltage Ue V 48 ... 600 48 ... 600 • Operating range V 40 ... 660 40 ... 660 • Rated frequency Hz 50/60 ± 10 % 50/60 ± 10 % Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600 600 Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp kV 6 6 Blocking voltage V 1200 1200 Rage of voltage rise V/µs 1000 1000 Order No. Type current Rated operational current Ie Power loss at IAC-51 Minimum load current Max. leakage current Rated impulse withstand current Itsm I2 t value IAC-51 at 40 °C acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 for 40°C acc. to UL/CSA for 50 °C A A A w A mA A A²s Main circuit 3RF24 10-.AB.5 10.5 7.5 9.5 21 0.1 10 200 200 3RF24 20-.AB.5 20 15 18 39 0.5 10 500 1800 3RF24 30-.AB.5 30 22 26 61 0.5 10 1200 7200 3RF24 40-.AB.5 40 32 35 81 0.5 10 1150 6600 3RF24 50-.AB.5 50 38 45 105 0.5 10 1150 6600 3RF24 10-.AC.5 10.5 7 9 32 0.1 10 300 450 3RF24 20-.AC.5 20 15 18 67 0.5 10 600 1800 3RF24 30-.AC.5 30 22 26 93 0.5 10 1200 7200 3RF24 40-.AC.5 40 29 35 121 0.5 10 1150 6600 3RF24 50-.AC.5 50 38 45 160 0.5 10 1150 6600 Type 3RF24 ..-...4. 3RF24 ..-...5. Control circuit Method of operation DC operation AC operation Rated control supply voltage Us V 4 ... 30 190 ... 230 Rated frequency of the control supply voltage Hz -- 50/60 ± 10% Actuating voltage, max. V 30 253 • For actuating current mA 15 6 Response voltage V 4 180 • For tripping current mA > 3 > 2 Drop-out voltage V < 1 < 40 Operating times • ON-delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 40 + max. one half-wave • OFF delay ms 1 + max. one half-wave 40 + max. one half-wave
  • 52.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 4/18 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 ■Characteristic curves Derating curves, two-phase controlled Type current 10.5 A (3RF24 10-.AB..) Type current 20 A (3RF24 20-.AB..) Type current 30 A (3RF24 30-.AB..) Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 2 6 12 16 20 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 NSB0_01675 einA 4 8 10 14 18 22 24 e in A PMinW Ta in °C 26 Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 5 10 15 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 5 25 30 40 0 4 8 12 20 2416 NSB0_01676 einA 10 20 15 35 45 50 e in A PMinW Ta in °C 25 Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 5 10 15 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 6 18 36 54 0 6 1812 NSB0_01677 einA 12 24 30 42 48 60 66 72 78 e in A PMinW Ta in °C 25 24 30 35 40 30 36
  • 53.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 4/19Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 Type current 40 A (3RF24 40-.AB..)1) Type current 50 A (3RF24 50-.AB..)1) 1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side installation. Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 20 40 0 8 16 3224 NSB0_01678 einA 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 100 e in A PMinW Ta in °C 50 40 48 110 Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 20 40 0 10 20 4030 NSB0_01679 einA 60 80 100 120 e in A PMinW Ta in °C 50 50 55 60 T h e r m a l l i m i t c u r r e n t f o r i n d i v i d u a l m o u n t i n g T h e r m a l l i m i t c u r r e n t f o r s i d e - b y - s i d e m o u n t i n g C u r r e n t a c c . t o I E C 9 4 7 - 4 - 3 f o r i n d i v i d u a l m o u n t i n g C u r r e n t a c c . t o I E C 9 4 7 - 4 - 3 f o r s i d e - b y - s i d e m o u n t i n g m a x m a x I E C I E C
  • 54.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 4/20 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 Derating curves, three-phase controlled Type current 10.5 A (3RF24 10-.AC..) Type current 20 A (3RF24 20-.AC..) 1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side installation. Type current 30 A (3RF24 30-.AC..)1) 1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side installation. Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss einA e in A PMinW Ta in °C 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 3 9 18 24 30 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 NSB0_01680 6 12 15 21 27 33 36 Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 5 10 15 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 5 15 30 40 50 0 3 6 9 15 1812 NSB0_01681 einA 10 20 25 35 45 55 60 e in A PMinW Ta in °C 25 21 24 65 70 75 Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 5 10 15 20 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 10 30 60 80 100 0 4 8 16 2012 NSB0_01682 einA 20 40 50 70 90 110 e in A PMinW Ta in °C 25 24 30 35 40 28 32 36
  • 55.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 4/21Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 Type current 40 A (3RF24 40-.AC..)1) Type current 50 A (3RF24 50-.AC..)1) 1) Identical current/temperature curves for stand-alone and side-by-side installation. Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 40 80 0 8 16 3224 NSB0_01683 einA 20 60 100 120 e PMinW Ta in °C 50 40 48 140 160 in A Device currentAmbient temperature Modulepowerloss 0 10 20 30 40 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 0 20 40 0 10 20 4030 NSB0_01684 einA 60 80 100 120 160 140 e in A PMinW Ta in °C 50 50 60 200 180 160 T h e r m a l l i m i t c u r r e n t f o r i n d i v i d u a l m o u n t i n g T h e r m a l l i m i t c u r r e n t f o r s i d e - b y - s i d e m o u n t i n g C u r r e n t a c c . t o I E C 9 4 7 - 4 - 3 f o r i n d i v i d u a l m o u n t i n g C u r r e n t a c c . t o I E C 9 4 7 - 4 - 3 f o r s i d e - b y - s i d e m o u n t i n g m a x m a x I E C I E C
  • 56.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 4/22 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 ■Dimensional drawings Type current 10.5 A Type current 20 A; 30 A (2-phase controlled) 30 14,4 14,4 4,5Ø 45 73 25 88 105 5 5 104,5 69 47,5 14,5 77 90 100 95 NSB0_01690 Screw terminal 3RF24 10-1.... Spring-loaded terminals 3RF24 10-2.... Spring-loaded terminals 69 14,5 47,5 90 100 NSB0_01691 77 99,5 112,5 30 14,4 33 14,4 4,5Ø b 45 25 5 3RF2420-.AB.. 3RF2420-.AC.. 3RF2430-.AB.. b A 67 89,5 77 View A View A Spring-loaded terminals 3RF24 20-2.... Screw terminal 3RF24 .0-1....
  • 57.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices Solid-State Contactors 3RF24 solid-state contactors, 3-phase 4/23Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 Type current 30 A (3-phase controlled); 40 A, 50 A ■Schematics 69 14,5 47,5 e a 4,5Ø 86 104,5 108 31,5 3RF2450-.AC.. 3RF2430-.AC.. 3RF2440-.AB.. 3RF2440-.AC.. 3RF2450-.AB.. a 180 100 100 b 157,5 113,5 157,5 d 146 100 146 e 160 85 80 121 14,4 14,4 45 d b NSB0_01692 69 View AA View A Ring terminal end connection 3RF24 50-3.... Screw terminal 3RF24 .0-1.... Two-phase controlled DC control supply voltage Three-phase controlled DC control supply voltage Two-phase controlled AC control supply voltage Three-phase controlled AC control supply voltage NSB0_01685 A1 + A2 - 1 L1 L23 5 L3 PE 2 T1 T24 6 T3 NSB0_01687 A1 + A2 - 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 PE 2 T1 4 6T2 T3 NSB0_01686 A1 A2 1 L1 L23 5 L3 PE 2 T1 T24 6 T3 NSB0_01688 A1 A2 1 L1 3 L2 5 L3 PE 2 T1 4 6T2 T3
  • 58.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices 3RF29 Function Modules General data 4/24 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 ■Overview Function modules for SIRIUS SC solid-state switching devices A great variety of applications demand an expanded range of functionality. With our function modules, these requirements can be met really easily. The modules are mounted simply by click- ing them into place; straight away the necessary connections are made with the solid-state relay or contactor. The plug-in connection to control the solid-state switching devices can simply remain in use. The following function modules are available: • Converter • Load monitoring • Heating current monitoring • Power control regulators • Power controller ■Technical specifications 1) These products were built as Class A devices. The use of these devices in residential areas could result in radio interference. In this case the user may require to introduce additional damping measures. Type 3RF29 ..-.K... General data Ambient temperature • During operation, derating from 40 °C °C -25 ... +60 • During storage °C -55 ... +80 Site altitude m 0 ... 1000; derating from 1000 Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g/ms 15/11 Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-27 g 2 Degree of protection IP20 Insulation resistance between load and control circuit MΩ 1.5 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) • Emitted interference - Conducted interference voltage acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Class A for industrial applications1) - Emitted, high-frequency interference voltage acc. to IEC 60947-4-3 Class A for industrial applications • Interference immunity - Electrostatic discharge acc. to IEC 61000-4-2 (corresponds to degree of severity 3) kV Contact discharge 4; air discharge 8; behavior criterion 2 - Induced RF fields acc. to IEC 61000-4-6 MHz 0.15 ... 80; 140 dBµV; behavior criterion 1 - Burst acc. to IEC 61000-4-4 2 kV/5.0 kHz; behavior criterion 1 - Surge acc. to IEC 61000-4-5 kV Conductor – ground 2; conductor – conductor 1; behavior criterion 2 Connection, auxiliary/control contacts, screw terminal • Conductor cross-section mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5), 2 x (0.5 ... 1.0), 1 x (AWG 20 ... 12) • Stripped length mm 7 • Terminal screw M3 - Tightening torque Nm lb.in 0.5 ... 0.6 4.5 ... 5.3 Converter, diameter of hole mm 17
  • 59.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices 3RF29 Function Modules Power control regulators 4/25Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■ Overview Power control regulators for SIRIUS solid-state switching devices The power control regulator is a function module for the autono- mous power control regulation of complex heating systems and inductive loads, for the operation of loads with temperature- dependent resistors or long-term aging, and for simple indirect temperature control. The power control regulator can be used on the 3RF21 and 3RF23 instantaneous switching solid-state switching devices (single-phase). If only the full-wave control mode is used, the power control regulator can also be used on the zero-point- switching solid-state relays and contactors. ■Application The power control regulator sets the load current of the solid- state switching device depending on a setpoint value as a percentage. Changes in the mains voltage or in the load resis- tance are not compensated in this case. The modulation, the On/off ratio or the phase angle, remains unchanged in accor- dance with the setpoint. The autonomous power control regula- tion is performed between 0 and 100 % of the setpoint value Full-wave control If the left potentiometer tR is set to 0 s (= far left), the power control regulator works according to the principle of full-wave control. The power set, be it internal or external, is converted into a pulse-width-modulated digital signal. The power control regu- lator controls the On and Off time of the solid-state switching device within a fixed period duration of 1 s so that the specified power is applied to the load. The "ON" LED flashes in the same rhythm as the solid-state switching device switches on and off. Generalized phase control If the left potentiometer tR is set to higher than 0 s, the power control regulator works according to the principle of generalized phase control. With generalized phase control, a choke rated at at least 200 µH must be included in the load circuit in order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage for industrial networks. ■Design Mounting Easy snapping onto the 3RF21 solid-state relays or 3RF23 solid- state contactors establishes the connections to the solid-state switching devices. Because of the special design, the straight- through transformer of the function module covers the lower main power connection. The cable to the load is simply pushed through and secured with the terminal screw. ■Function Setpoint selection The setpoint is selected either internally using the right-hand potentiometer P with 0 ... 100 % on the module or externally through the analog input 0 ... 10 V. 100 % corresponds in full-wave control to permanently On and in generalized phase control to a conduction angle of 180° and hence maximum power. When the setpoint is selected internally the module is controlled through the IN terminal. The terminal 10 then has no function. Input characteristic curve When the setpoint is selected externally (potentiometer P set far left = 0 %) the module is controlled by applying the analog voltage 0 ... 10 V. 0 ... 10 V corresponds to 0 ... 100 % power. Conversion of the voltage is linear between 0.1 and 9.9 V. Below 0.1 V the switching device remains off; at voltages above 9.9 V the power is always set to 100 %. Inrush current limitation The ramp time (tR) for a voltage ramp on switching on is set with the left potentiometer for the purpose of inrush current limitation. The set time refers to a power of 100 %. If, for example, a ramp time of 10 s is set and the selected power is 60 %, then a power of 60 % is reached after approx. 6 s. Line and thyristor monitoring The power control regulator recognizes supply failures and thyristor faults. The faults are indicated by the LEDs on the mod- ule and the fault output is activated. > 9,9 0° 100 % < 0,1 5,0 V 50 0 180° 90° 1000 50 % NSB0_01693 Modulation Conductionangle External setpoint of analog voltage 0 ... 10 V Internal setpoint of potentiometer P
  • 60.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices 3RF29 Function Modules Power control regulators 4/26 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4 ■Technical specifications Type 3RF29 ..-0KA.3 3RF29 ..-0KA.6 Main circuit Rated operational voltage Ue V 110 ... 230 400 ... 600 • Tolerance % -15/+10 • Rated frequency Hz 50/60 Rated insulation voltage Ui V 600 Voltage detection • Measuring/teach range V 93.5 ... 253 340 ... 660 Compensation of mains voltage fluctuation % 20 (only within the measuring range) Type 3RF29 04-0KA.. 3RF29 20-0KA.. 3RF29 50-0KA.. 3RF29 90-0KA.. Current measurement Rated operational current Ie A 4 20 50 90 Current measurement • Teach range A 0.15 ... 4 0.65 ... 20 1.6 ... 50 2.9 ... 90 • Measuring range A 0 ... 4 0 ... 22 0 ... 55 0 ... 99 • Minimum partial load current A -- 0.65 1.6 2.9 Number of partial loads 1 ... 6 Type 3RF29 ..-0KA1. 3RF29 ..-0KA3. Control circuit A1–A2 General data Rated control supply voltage Us V 24 AC/DC AC 110 • Operating range V 20.5 ... 26.5 DC 18 ... 30 90 ... 121 Rated frequency of the control supply voltage Hz 50/60 ± 10% -- 50/60 ± 10% Current consumption mA < 40 < 20 Control input IN Rated control voltage Uc V 24 AC/DC AC 110 • For actuating current mA < 15 < 15 • Actuating voltage, max. mA AC 26.5 DC 30 121 Control supply voltage, min./max. V AC 20.5 ... 26.5 DC 18 ... 30 90 ... 121 Response voltage V AC 14 DC 15 79 • For tripping current mA > 2 > 2 > 2 Drop-out voltage V 5 5 15 Control input 0 ... 10 V Input analog V 0 ... 10 • Permissible range V -1 ... 11 Input resistance kΩ 8 Period duration s 1 Auxiliary circuit 11–12 Switching voltage V 24 AC/DC AC 110 • Actuating current (utilization category) A 0.5 (DC-12) 0.5 (AC-12) • Switching voltage, min./max. V 15 ... 30 90 ... 121 Continuous thermal current, max. Ith A 1 1
  • 61.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices 3RF29 Function Modules Power control regulators 4/27Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 44 ■Dimensional drawings ■Schematics Terminal diagram 1) Internal connection. 2) Straight-through transformers. 3) Voltage detection not electrically isolated (3 MΩ per path). Switching example 1) Internal connection to the solid-state relay/contactor. 2) Straight-through transformer. 3) Make PE/ground connection according to installation regulations. 4) Connection of L/N contact with: - Load monitoring/power controller/control regulator 3RF29 ..-0.A.3 on neutral conductor N (e.g. 230 V), - Load monitoring/power controller/control regulator 3RF29 ..-0.A.6 on a second phase (e.g. 400 V). 5) Voltage detection not electrically isolated (3 MΩ per path). 6) Grounding of connection L- is recommended. 7) A 200 µH choke must be used when operating with leading-edge phase in order to observe the limit values of the conducted interference voltage according to Class A. 3RF29 ..-0KA.. 29,5 4 0 4 4 3 8 3 1 , 5 111,5 4 5 NSB0_01444 NSB0_01469a IN/0 – 10 V+ 11 12 L/N 1) 2) NC 3) comp. < 3) A1+ A2 – A out – A out + D in R1 L/N NC 11 12 IN/0 – 10 V + L – L + A1 A1 + A2 – 1) 2 T PE 3) 1 L L1 7) 2) K1 F1 L + PE L –N L3 3/N/PE 50 Hz 230/400 V DC 24 V NSB0_01436c L1 L2 4) comp. 5) 5) 6) A1 + A2 –
  • 62.
    Controls — Solid-StateSwitching Devices 3RF29 Function Modules Notes 4/28 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 4
  • 63.
    Siemens LV 1News · 04/2006 3RW Soft Starters General data 6/2 - Overview 3RW44 for High-Feature applications 6/3 - Overview 6/3 - Application 6/4 - Selection and ordering data 3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 for High-Feature applications 6/10 - Function 6/11 - Technical specifications 6/25 - Characteristic curves 6/26 - More information Project planning aids 6/28 - Dimensional drawings 6/30 - Schematics Load Feeders, Motor Starters and Soft Starters Catalog Technical Information
  • 64.
    3RW Soft Starters Generaldata 6/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 ■Overview The advantages of the SIRIUS soft starters at a glance: • Soft starting and smooth ramp-down1) • Stepless starting • Reduction of current peaks • Avoidance of mains voltage fluctuations during starting • Reduced load on the power supply network • Reduction of the mechanical load in the operating mechanism • Considerable space savings and reduced wiring compared with conventional starters • Maintenance-free switching • Very easy handling • Fits perfectly in the SIRIUS modular system ✔ Function is available -- Function not available. 1) Only soft starting available for 3RW31. 2) Not available for 3RW30 03. 3) Not possible in inside-delta circuit. 4) Trace function with Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart software. 5) For 3RW30 03 up to 230 V. 6) Calculate soft starter and motor with size allowance where required. More information can be found on the Internet at http://www.siemens.com/softstarter SIRIUS 3RW30/31 SIRIUS 3RW40 SIRIUS 3RW44 Standard applications High-Feature applications Rated current up to 40 °C A 3 ... 100 134 ... 432 29 ... 1214 Rated operational voltage V 200 ... 575 200 ... 600 200 ... 690 Motor rating at 400 V • Inline circuit kW 1.1 ... 55 75 ... 250 15 ... 710 • Inside-delta circuit kW -- -- 22 ... 1200 Temperature range °C -25 ... +60 -25 ... +60 0 ... +60 Soft starting/ramp-down ✔1) ✔ ✔ Voltage ramp ✔ ✔ ✔ Starting/stopping voltage % 40 ... 100 40 ... 100 20 ... 100 Starting and ramp-down time s 0 ... 20 0 ... 20 1 ... 360 Torque control -- -- ✔ Starting/stopping torque % -- -- 20 ... 100 Torque limit % -- -- 20 ... 200 Ramp time s -- -- 1 ... 360 Integral bypass contact system ✔2) ✔ ✔ Intrinsic device protection -- ✔ ✔ Motor overload protection -- ✔ ✔ Thermistor motor protection -- -- ✔ Adjustable current limiting -- ✔ ✔ Inside-delta circuit -- -- ✔ Breakaway pulse -- -- ✔ Creep speed in both directions -- -- ✔ Pump ramp-down -- -- ✔6) DC braking -- -- ✔3) 6) Combined braking -- -- ✔3) 6) Motor heating -- -- ✔ Communication -- -- with PROFIBUS DP (optional) External display and operator module -- -- (optional) Operating measured value display -- -- ✔ Error logbook -- -- ✔ Event list -- -- ✔ Slave pointer function -- -- ✔ Trace function -- -- ✔4) Programmable control inputs and outputs -- -- ✔ Number of parameter sets 1 (2 with 3RW31) 1 3 Parameterization software (Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart) -- -- ✔ Power semiconductors (thyristors) 2 controlled phases 2 controlled phases 3 controlled phases Spring-loaded terminals ✔ (only 3RW30 03) ✔ ✔ Screw terminals ✔ ✔ ✔ UL/CSA ✔5) ✔ ✔ CE marking ✔ ✔ ✔ Soft starting under heavy starting conditions -- -- ✔6) Configuring support Win-Soft Starter, the electronic selection slider ruler, Technical Assistance ++49 911 895 5900
  • 65.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 ■Overview In addition to soft starting and soft ramp-down, the solid-state SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters provide numerous functions for higher-level requirements. They cover a rating range up to 710 kW (at 400 V) in the inline circuit and up to 1200 kW (at 400 V) in the inside-delta circuit. The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are characterized by a compact design for space-saving and clearly arranged control cabinet layouts. For optimized motor starting and stopping the innova- tive SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are an attractive alternative with considerable savings potential compared to applications with a frequency converter. The new torque control and adjustable current limiting enable the High-Feature soft starters to be used in nearly every conceivable task. They guarantee the reliable avoidance of sudden torque applications and current peaks during motor starting and stopping. This creates savings poten- tial when calculating the size of the switchgear and when servic- ing the machinery installed. Be it for inline circuits or inside-delta circuits – the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter offers savings especially in terms of size and equipment costs. Combinations of various starting, operating and ramp-down possibilities ensure an optimum adaptation to the application- specific requirements. Operating and commissioning can be performed by means of the user-friendly keypad and a menu- prompted, multi-line graphic display with background lighting. The optimized motor ramp-up and ramp-down can be effected by means of just a few settings with a previously selected language. Four-key operation and plain-text displays for each menu point guarantee full clarity at every moment of the parameterization and operation. Applicable standards • IEC 60947-4-2 • UL/CSA ■Application The SIRIUS 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are suitable for the torque-controlled soft starting and smooth ramp-down as well as braking of three-phase asynchronous motors. Application areas, e. g. • Pumps • Ventilators • Compressors • Water transport • Conveying systems and lifts • Hydraulics • Machine tools • Mills • Saws • Breakers • Mixers • Centrifuges • Industrial cooling and refrigerating systems
  • 66.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 ■Selection and ordering data 1) 3RW44 2 ., 3RW44 3 . and 3RW44 4 . soft starters with screw-type terminals: delivery time class } (preferred type). 2) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means of PLC possible. Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current. The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mecha- nism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s or similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices should be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program. See Technical Specifications for information about rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and operating frequency. 3RW44 27-1BC44 3RW44 36-6BC44 3RW44 47-6BC44 3RW44 53-6BC44 Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Rated opera- tional current Ie Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue Rated opera- tional current Ie Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg Inline circuit, rated operational voltage 200 ... 460 V1) 29 5.5 15 -- -- -- 26 7.5 7.5 15 -- } 3RW44 22-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 36 7.5 18.5 -- -- -- 32 10 10 20 -- } 3RW44 23-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 47 11 22 -- -- -- 42 10 15 25 -- } 3RW44 24-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 57 15 30 -- -- -- 51 15 15 30 -- } 3RW44 25-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 77 18.5 37 -- -- -- 68 20 20 50 -- } 3RW44 26-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 93 22 45 -- -- -- 82 25 25 60 -- } 3RW44 27-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 3 • With screw terminals 1 113 30 55 -- -- -- 100 30 30 75 -- B 3RW44 34-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900 134 37 75 -- -- -- 117 30 40 75 -- B 3RW44 35-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900 162 45 90 -- -- -- 145 40 50 100 -- B 3RW44 36-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900 203 55 110 -- -- -- 180 50 60 125 -- B 3RW44 43-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 250 75 132 -- -- -- 215 60 75 150 -- B 3RW44 44-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 313 90 160 -- -- -- 280 75 100 200 -- B 3RW44 45-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 356 110 200 -- -- -- 315 100 125 250 -- B 3RW44 46-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 432 132 250 -- -- -- 385 125 150 300 -- B 3RW44 47-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 551 160 315 -- -- -- 494 150 200 400 -- C 3RW44 53-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 615 200 355 -- -- -- 551 150 200 450 -- C 3RW44 54-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 693 200 400 -- -- -- 615 200 250 500 -- C 3RW44 55-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 780 250 450 -- -- -- 693 200 250 600 -- C 3RW44 56-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 880 250 500 -- -- -- 780 250 300 700 -- C 3RW44 57-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 2 • With screw terminals 6 Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us 2) • 115 V AC 3 • 230 V AC 4 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 67.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) 3RW44 2 ., 3RW44 3 . and 3RW44 4 . soft starters with screw-type terminals: delivery time class A. 2) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means of PLC possible. Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current. The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mecha- nism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s or similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices should be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program. See Technical Specifications for information about rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and operating frequency. Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Rated opera- tional current Ie Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue Rated opera- tional current Ie Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg Inline circuit, rated operational voltage 400 ... 600 V1) 29 -- 15 18.5 -- -- 26 -- -- 15 20 A 3RW44 22-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 36 -- 18.5 22 -- -- 32 -- -- 20 25 A 3RW44 23-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 47 -- 22 30 -- -- 42 -- -- 25 30 A 3RW44 24-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 57 -- 30 37 -- -- 51 -- -- 30 40 A 3RW44 25-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 77 -- 37 45 -- -- 68 -- -- 50 50 A 3RW44 26-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 93 -- 45 55 -- -- 82 -- -- 60 75 A 3RW44 27-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 3 • With screw terminals 1 113 -- 55 75 -- -- 100 -- -- 75 75 B 3RW44 34-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900 134 -- 75 90 -- -- 117 -- -- 75 100 B 3RW44 35-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900 162 -- 90 110 -- -- 145 -- -- 100 125 B 3RW44 36-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900 203 -- 110 132 -- -- 180 -- -- 125 150 B 3RW44 43-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 250 -- 132 160 -- -- 215 -- -- 150 200 B 3RW44 44-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 313 -- 160 200 -- -- 280 -- -- 200 250 B 3RW44 45-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 356 -- 200 250 -- -- 315 -- -- 250 300 B 3RW44 46-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 432 -- 250 315 -- -- 385 -- -- 300 400 B 3RW44 47-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 551 -- 315 355 -- -- 494 -- -- 400 500 C 3RW44 53-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 615 -- 355 400 -- -- 551 -- -- 450 600 C 3RW44 54-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 693 -- 400 500 -- -- 615 -- -- 500 700 C 3RW44 55-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 780 -- 450 560 -- -- 693 -- -- 600 750 C 3RW44 56-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 880 -- 500 630 -- -- 780 -- -- 700 850 C 3RW44 57-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 2 • With screw terminals 6 Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us 2) • 115 V AC 3 • 230 V AC 4 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 68.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof. 1) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means of PLC possible. Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current. The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mecha- nism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s or similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices should be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program. See Technical Specifications for information about rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and operating frequency. Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Rated opera- tional current Ie Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue Rated opera- tional current Ie Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg Inline circuit, rated operational voltage 400 ... 690 V 29 -- 15 18.5 30 -- 26 -- -- 15 20 B 3RW44 22-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900 36 -- 18.5 22 37 -- 32 -- -- 20 25 B 3RW44 23-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900 47 -- 22 30 45 -- 42 -- -- 25 30 B 3RW44 24-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900 57 -- 30 37 55 -- 51 -- -- 30 40 B 3RW44 25-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900 77 -- 37 45 75 -- 68 -- -- 50 50 B 3RW44 26-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900 93 -- 45 55 90 -- 82 -- -- 60 75 B 3RW44 27-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 4.900 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 3 • With screw terminals 1 113 -- 55 75 110 -- 100 -- -- 75 75 B 3RW44 34-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 7.900 134 -- 75 90 132 -- 117 -- -- 75 100 B 3RW44 35-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 7.900 162 -- 90 110 160 -- 145 -- -- 100 125 B 3RW44 36-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 7.900 203 -- 110 132 200 -- 180 -- -- 125 150 B 3RW44 43-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300 250 -- 132 160 250 -- 215 -- -- 150 200 B 3RW44 44-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300 313 -- 160 200 315 -- 280 -- -- 200 250 B 3RW44 45-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300 356 -- 200 250 355 -- 315 -- -- 250 300 B 3RW44 46-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300 432 -- 250 315 400 -- 385 -- -- 300 400 B 3RW44 47-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 10.300 551 -- 315 355 560 -- 494 -- -- 400 500 C 3RW44 53-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000 615 -- 355 400 630 -- 551 -- -- 450 600 C 3RW44 54-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000 693 -- 400 500 710 -- 615 -- -- 500 700 C 3RW44 55-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000 780 -- 450 560 800 -- 693 -- -- 600 750 C 3RW44 56-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000 880 -- 500 630 900 -- 780 -- -- 700 850 C 3RW44 57-@BC@6 1 1 unit 131 50.000 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 2 • With screw terminals 6 Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us 1) • 115 V AC 3 • 230 V AC 4
  • 69.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/7Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) In the selection table, the unit rated operational current Ie refers to the three-phase motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta circuit. The actual current of the unit is approx. 58 % of this value. 2) 3RW44 2 ., 3RW44 3 . and 3RW44 4 . soft starters with screw-type terminals: delivery time class }(preferred type). 3) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means of PLC possible. Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current. The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mechanism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s or similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices should be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program. See Technical Specifications for information about rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and operating frequency. 3RW44 27-1BC44 3RW44 36-6BC44 3RW44 47-6BC44 3RW44 53-6BC44 Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Rated opera- tional current Ie 1) Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue Rated opera- tional current Ie Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg Inside-delta circuits, rated operational voltage 200 ... 400 V2) 50 15 22 -- -- -- 45 10 15 -- -- B 3RW44 22-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 62 18.5 30 -- -- -- 55 15 20 -- -- B 3RW44 23-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 81 22 45 -- -- -- 73 20 25 -- -- B 3RW44 24-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 99 30 55 -- -- -- 88 25 30 -- -- B 3RW44 25-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 133 37 75 -- -- -- 118 30 40 -- -- B 3RW44 26-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 161 45 90 -- -- -- 142 40 50 -- -- B 3RW44 27-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 4.900 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 3 • With screw terminals 1 196 55 110 -- -- -- 173 50 60 -- -- B 3RW44 34-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900 232 75 132 -- -- -- 203 60 75 -- -- B 3RW44 35-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900 281 90 160 -- -- -- 251 75 100 -- -- B 3RW44 36-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 7.900 352 110 200 -- -- -- 312 100 125 -- -- B 3RW44 43-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 433 132 250 -- -- -- 372 125 150 -- -- B 3RW44 44-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 542 160 315 -- -- -- 485 150 200 -- -- B 3RW44 45-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 617 200 355 -- -- -- 546 150 200 -- -- B 3RW44 46-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 748 250 400 -- -- -- 667 200 250 -- -- B 3RW44 47-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 10.300 954 315 560 -- -- -- 856 300 350 -- -- C 3RW44 53-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 1065 355 630 -- -- -- 954 350 400 -- -- C 3RW44 54-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 1200 400 710 -- -- -- 1065 350 450 -- -- C 3RW44 55-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 1351 450 800 -- -- -- 1200 450 500 -- -- C 3RW44 56-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 1524 500 900 -- -- -- 1351 450 600 -- -- C 3RW44 57-@BC@4 1 1 unit 131 50.000 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 2 • With screw terminals 6 Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us 3) • 115 V AC 3 • 230 V AC 4 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 70.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/8 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 1) In the selection table, the unit rated operational current Ie refers to the three-phase motor's rated operational current in the inside-delta circuit. The actual current of the unit is approx. 58 % of this value. 2) 3RW44 2 ., 3RW44 3 . and 3RW44 4 . soft starters with screw-type terminals: delivery time class A. 3) Control by way of the internal 24 V DC supply and direct control by means of PLC possible. Soft starter selection depends on the motor's rated current. The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal starting (class 10). (Inertia load of the overall operating mechanism JLoad < 10 x JMotor; starting current 350 % x Ie for 20 s or similar load.) For any other conditions of use, the devices should be selected using the Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program. See Technical Specifications for information about rated currents for ambient temperatures > 40 °C and operating frequency. Ambient temperature 40 °C Ambient temperature 50 °C DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Rated opera- tional current Ie 1) Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated opera- tional voltage Ue Rated opera- tional current Ie Rated output of three-phase induction motors for rated operational voltage Ue 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 1000 V 200 V 230 V 460 V 575 V A kW kW kW kW kW A hp hp hp hp kg Inside-delta circuits, rated operational voltage 400 ... 600 V2) 50 -- 22 30 -- -- 45 -- -- 30 40 B 3RW44 22-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 62 -- 30 37 -- -- 55 -- -- 40 50 B 3RW44 23-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 81 -- 45 45 -- -- 73 -- -- 50 60 B 3RW44 24-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 99 -- 55 55 -- -- 88 -- -- 60 75 B 3RW44 25-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 133 -- 75 90 -- -- 118 -- -- 75 100 B 3RW44 26-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 161 -- 90 110 -- -- 142 -- -- 100 125 B 3RW44 27-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 4.900 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 3 • With screw terminals 1 196 -- 110 132 -- -- 173 -- -- 125 150 B 3RW44 34-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900 232 -- 132 160 -- -- 203 -- -- 150 200 B 3RW44 35-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900 281 -- 160 200 -- -- 251 -- -- 200 250 B 3RW44 36-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 7.900 352 -- 200 250 -- -- 312 -- -- 250 300 B 3RW44 43-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 433 -- 250 315 -- -- 372 -- -- 300 350 B 3RW44 44-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 542 -- 315 355 -- -- 485 -- -- 400 500 B 3RW44 45-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 617 -- 355 450 -- -- 546 -- -- 450 600 B 3RW44 46-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 748 -- 400 500 -- -- 667 -- -- 600 750 B 3RW44 47-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 10.300 954 -- 560 630 -- -- 856 -- -- 750 950 C 3RW44 53-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 1065 -- 630 710 -- -- 954 -- -- 850 1050 C 3RW44 54-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 1200 -- 710 800 -- -- 1065 -- -- 950 1200 C 3RW44 55-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 1351 -- 800 900 -- -- 1200 -- -- 1050 1350 C 3RW44 56-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 1524 -- 900 1000 -- -- 1351 -- -- 1200 1500 C 3RW44 57-@BC@5 1 1 unit 131 50.000 Order No. supplement for connection methods • With spring-loaded terminals 2 • With screw terminals 6 Order No. supplement for the rated control supply voltage Us 3) • 115 V AC 3 • 230 V AC 4 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 71.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/9Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 Accessories Spare parts For soft starters Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Type kg Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart PC communication program Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart Parameterization and service software for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters for parameterizing through the system interface on the device Executes on PC/PG under Windows 2000/XP, without PC cable Type of supply: CD, single license } 1 1 unit 131 0.230 PC cables For PC/PG communication with SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters through the system interface, for connecting to the serial interface of the PC/PG B 3UF7 940-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 131 0.150 Box terminal blocks for soft starters Box terminal blocks 3RW44 2. Included in delivery 3RW44 3. • Up to 70 mm2 } 3RT19 55-4G 1 1 unit 101 0.237 • Up to 120 mm2 } 3RT19 56-4G 1 1 unit 101 0.270 3RW44 3. • Up to 240 mm2 } 3RT19 66-4G 1 1 unit 101 0.676 Covers for soft starters Terminal covers for box terminals Additional touch protection to be fitted at the box terminals (2 units required per device) 3RW44 2. and 3RW44 3. } 3RT19 56-4EA2 1 1 unit 101 0.028 3RW44 4. } 3RT19 66-4EA2 1 1 unit 101 0.038 Terminal covers for cable lugs and busbar connections 3RW44 2. and 3RW44 3. } 3RT19 56-4EA1 1 1 unit 101 0.067 3RW44 4. } 3RT19 66-4EA1 1 1 unit 101 0.124 For soft starters Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. Type kg Fans Fans 3RW44 2. and 3RW44 3. 115 V AC } 3RW49 36-8VX30 1 1 unit 131 0.300 230 V AC } 3RW49 36-8VX40 1 1 unit 131 0.300 3RW44 4. 115 V AC } 3RW49 47-8VX30 1 1 unit 131 0.500 230 V AC } 3RW49 47-8VX40 1 1 unit 131 0.500 3RW44 5. 115 V AC } 3RW49 57-8VX30 1 1 unit 131 0.800 230 V AC } 3RW49 57-8VX40 1 1 unit 131 0.800 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 72.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/10 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 ■Function Equipped with modern, ergonomic user prompting the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be commissioned quickly and easily using a keypad and a menu-prompted, multi-line display with background lighting. Motor starting and deceleration are optimized quickly, easily and safely with just a few settings in a selectable language. Four-key operation and plain-text displays for each menu point guarantee full clarity at every moment of the parameterization and operation. Measurement values and oper- ating values as well as warning messages and fault indications are output continuously on the front panel during operation and when control voltage is applied. An external display and opera- tor module can be connected by means of a connecting cable to the soft starter, thus enabling active indications and the like to be read directly from the control cabinet door. The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters are equipped with optimum functionality. An integral bypass contact system reduces the power loss of the soft starter during operation. This reliably prevents heating of the switchgear environment. The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters have internal intrinsic device protection. This prevents thermal overloading of the power section's thyristors, e.g. due to unacceptably high closing operations. Wiring work for installing an additional motor overload relay is no longer needed as the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters perform this function too. In addition they offer adjustable trip classes and a thermistor motor protection function. As an option the thyristors can also be protected by SITOR semi-conductor fuses from short-circuiting. And even inrush current peaks are reliably avoided thanks to adjustable current limiting. As a further option the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be upgraded with a PROFIBUS DP module. Thanks to their commu- nication capability and their programmable control inputs and relay outputs the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be very easily and quickly integrated in higher-level controllers. In addition a creep speed function is available for positioning and setting jobs. With this function the motor can be controlled in both directions of rotation with reduced torque and an adjust- able, low speed. On the other hand the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters offer a new, combined DC braking function for the fast stopping of driving loads. Highlights • Soft starting with breakaway pulse, torque control or voltage ramp and adjustable torque or current limiting as well as any combination of these, depending on load type • Integrated bypass contact system to minimize dissipated power • Various setting options for the starting parameters such as starting torque, starting voltage, ramp-up and ramp-down time, and much more in three separate parameter sets • Start-up detection • Inside-delta circuit for savings in terms of size and equipment costs • Various ramp-down modes selectable: free ramp-down, torque-controlled pump stopping, combined DC braking • Solid-state motor overload and intrinsic device protection • Thermistor motor protection • Keypad with a menu-controlled, multi-line, graphic display with background lighting • Interface for communication with the PC for more accurate setting of the parameters as well as for control and monitoring • Simple adaptation to the motor feeder • Simple mounting and commissioning • Display of operating states and fault signals • Connection to PROFIBUS with optional PROFIBUS DP module • External display and operator module • System voltages from 200 to 690 V, 50 to 60 Hz • Applicable up to 60 °C (derating from 40 °C)
  • 73.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/11Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 ■Technical specifications Type 3RW44 ..-.BC3. 3RW44 ..-.BC4. Terminal Control electronics Rated values Rated control supply voltage A1/A2/PE V 115 AC 230 AC • Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 Rated control supply current STANDBY mA 30 20 Rated control supply current ON • 3RW44 2. mA 300 170 • 3RW44 3. mA 500 250 • 3RW44 4. mA 750 400 • 3RW44 5. mA 450 200 Maximum current (pickup bypass) • 3RW44 2. mA 1000 500 • 3RW44 3. mA 2500 1250 • 3RW44 4. mA 6000 3000 • 3RW44 5. mA 4500 2500 Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60 50 ... 60 • Tolerance % ±10 ±10 Type 3RW44 .. Terminal Factory presetting Control electronics Control inputs Input 1 IN1 Start motor right parameter set 1 Input 2 IN2 No action Input 3 IN3 No action Input 4 IN4 Trip reset Supply L+/L- • Rated operational current mA Approx. 10 per input to DIN 19240 • Rated operational voltage L+ Internal voltage: 24 V DC from inter- nal supply through terminal L+ to IN1 ... IN4. Maximum load at L+ approx. 55 mA L- External voltage: DC external voltage (to DIN19240) through terminals L- and IN1 ... IN4 (min. 12 V DC, max. 30 V DC) Thermistor motor protection input Input T1/T2 PTC type A or Thermoclick Deactivated Relay outputs (floating auxiliary contacts) Output 1 13/14 ON period Output 2 23/24 No action Output 3 33/34 No action Output 4 95/96/98 Group fault Switching capacity of the relay outputs 230 V/AC-15 A 3 at 240 V 24 V/DC-13 A 1 at 24 V Protection against overvoltages Protection by means of Varistor through relay contact Short-circuit protection 4 A gL/gG operational class; 6 A quick (fuse is not included in scope of supply) Protective functions Motor protection functions Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the motor Trip class to IEC 60947-4-1 Class 5/10/15/20/30 10 Phase failure sensitivity % > 40 Overload warning yes Reset and recovery Manual/Automatic Manual Reset option after tripping Manual/Automatic Manual Recovery time min. 1 ... 30 1 Device protection functions Trips in the event of Thermal overloading of the thyristors Reset option after tripping Manual/Automatic Manual Recovery time min. 0.5
  • 74.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/12 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 Type 3RW44 .. Factory presetting Control times and parameters Control times Closing delay (with connected control voltage) ms < 50 Closing delay (automatic mode) ms < 4000 Recovery time (closing command in active ramp-down) ms < 100 Mains failure bridging time Control supply voltage ms 100 Mains failure response time Load current circuit ms 100 Reclosing lockout after overload trip Motor protection trip min. 1 ... 30 1 Device protection trip s 30 Setting options for starting Voltage ramp for starting voltage % 20 ... 100 30 Torque control for starting torque % 20 ... 100 50 Torque control for limit torque % 20 ... 200 150 Starting time s 0 ... 360 20 Maximum starting time s 1 ... 1000 Deactivated Current limit value % 125 ... 550 450 Breakaway voltage % 40 ... 100 80 Breakaway time s 0 ... 2 Deactivated Motor heat output % 0 ... 100 0 Creep mode Left/Right running Speed factor as function of rated speed (n = nrated/factor) 3 ... 21 7 Creep torque (reference variable depends on the motor used but is always smaller than the rated torque of the motor) % 20 ... 100 50 Setting options for ramp-down Torque control for stopping torque % 10 ... 100 10 Ramp-down time s 0 ... 360 10 Dynamic braking torque % 20 ... 100 50 DC braking torque % 20 ... 100 50 Operating indications Test voltage Test mains phases Ready to start Start active Motor running Ramp-down active Warnings/error signals Mains voltage missing Leading-edge phase error Phase failure • L1 • L2 • L3 Missing load phase • T1 • T2 • T3 Failure • Contact element 1 (thyristor) • Contact element 2 (thyristor) • Contact element 3 (thyristor) Flash memory faulty Supply voltage • Below 75 % • Below 85 % • Over 110 % Current unbalance exceeded Thermal motor model overload Prewarning limit exceeded • Motor heating • Time-related trip reserve Bypass elements defective Mains voltage too high Device not named Wrong naming version Current range exceeded Motor blocking – shutdown Current limit exceeded Power section • Overheated • Overtemperature Emergency active
  • 75.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/13Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) Parameter motor left possible only in conjunction with creep mode. Type 3RW44 .. Factory presetting Control times and parameters Warnings/error signals (contd.) Temperature sensor • Overload • Open-circuit • Short-circuit Ground fault • Detected • Shutdown Connection abort in manual mode Max. number of starts exceeded Ie limit value overshoot/undershoot Cooling time • Motor active • Switch block active Heat sink sensor • Open-circuit • Short-circuit Quick-stop function Switch block faulty Ie/class setting not permissible Control inputs Input 1 Motor right parameter set 1 Input 2 No action Input 3 No action Input 4 Trip reset Parameterizing options for control inputs 1 ... 4 No action Local manual mode Emergency start Creep speed Quick-stop Trip reset Motor right parameter set 1 Motor left parameter set 11) Motor right parameter set 2 Motor left parameter set 21) Motor right parameter set 3 Motor left parameter set 31) Relay outputs Output 1 ON period Output 2 No action Output 3 No action Output 4 Group fault Parameterizing options for relay outputs 1 ... 3 No action PAA output 1 PAA output 2 Input 1 Input 2 Input 3 Input 4 Ramp-up Operation/Bypass Ramp-down ON period Command motor on Fan DC braking contactor Group warning Group fault Bus fault Device error Power on Ready to start Motor temperature sensors Deactivated Deactivated Thermoclick PTC type A
  • 76.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/14 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM. 2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for automatic mode. 3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting. Type 3RW44 ..-.BC.4 3RW44 ..-.BC.5 3RW44 ..-.BC.6 Power electronics Rated operational voltage for inline circuit V 200 ... 460 AC 400 ... 600 AC 400 ... 690 AC Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10 Rated operational voltage for inside-delta circuit V 200 ... 400 AC 400 ... 600 AC 400 ... 600 AC Tolerance % -15/+10 -15/+10 -15/+10 Rated frequency Hz 50 ... 60 Tolerance % ±10 Continuous operation at 40 °C (% of Ie) % 115 Minimum load (% of set motor current IM) % 8 Maximum conductor length between soft starter and motor m 200 Permissible installation height m 4000 (derating from 1000); higher on request Permissible mounting position Permissible ambient temperature Operation °C 0 ... +60; (derating from +40) Storage °C -25 ... +80 Degree of protection IP00 NSB00649 22,5° 22,5° 90°90° Type 3RW44 22 3RW44 23 3RW44 24 3RW44 25 3RW44 26 3RW44 27 Power electronics Rated operational current Ie 29 36 47 57 77 93 Load rating with rated operational current Ie • Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting, at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 29/26/23 36/32/29 47/42/37 57/51/45 77/68/59 93/82/72 Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM for the motor overload protection A 5 7 9 11 15 18 Power loss • In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 8 10 32 36 45 55 • During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 400 470 600 725 940 1160 Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour • Normal starting (Class 5) - Rated motor current IM 1), starting time 5 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 41 34 41 41 41 41 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 10 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20 • Normal starting (Class 10) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 10 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20 20 20 20 - Rated motor current IM 1)3), starting time 20 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 6 10 10 8 8 • Normal starting (Class 15) - Rated motor current IM 1), starting time 15 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 13 9 13 13 13 13 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 30 s A 29 36 47 57 77 93 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 4 6 6 6 6 • For heavy starting (Class 20) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 20 s A 29 36 47 57 73 88 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 6 10 10 10 10 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 40 s A 29 36 47 57 73 88 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 4 2 4 5 1.8 0.8 • For very heavy starting (Class 30) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 30 s A 29 36 44 57 65 77 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 4 6 6 6 6 - Rated motor current IM 1)3), starting time 60 s A 29 36 44 57 65 77 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 1.8 0.8 3.3 1.5 2 1
  • 77.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/15Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM. 2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for automatic mode. 3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting. Type 3RW44 34 3RW44 35 3RW44 36 Power electronics Rated operational current Ie 113 134 162 Load rating with rated operational current Ie • Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting, at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 113/100/88 134/117/100 162/145/125 Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM for the motor overload protection A 22 26 32 Power loss • In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 64 76 95 • During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 1350 1700 2460 Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour • Normal starting (Class 5) - Rated motor current IM 1), starting time 5 s A 113 134 162 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 41 39 41 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 10 s A 113 134 162 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20 • Normal starting (Class 10) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 10 s A 113 134 162 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 15 20 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 20 s A 113 134 162 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 9 6 7 • Normal starting (Class 15) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 15 s A 113 134 162 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 13 9 12 - Rated motor current IM 1)3), starting time 30 s A 113 134 162 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 6 1 • For heavy starting (Class 20) - Rated motor current IM 1), starting time 20 s A 106 125 147 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 9 9 10 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 40 s A 106 125 147 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 1.5 2 1 • For very heavy starting (Class 30) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 30 s A 91 110 120 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 6 6 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 60 s A 91 110 120 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 2 2 2
  • 78.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/16 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM. 2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for automatic mode. 3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting. Type 3RW44 43 3RW44 44 3RW44 45 3RW44 46 3RW44 47 Power electronics Rated operational current Ie 203 250 313 356 432 Load rating with rated operational current Ie • Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting, at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 203/180/156 250/215/185 313/280/250 356/315/280 432/385/335 Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM for the motor overload protection A 40 50 62 71 86 Power loss • In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 89 110 145 174 232 • During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 3350 4000 4470 5350 5860 Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour • Normal starting (Class 5) - Rated motor current IM 1), starting time 5 s A 203 250 313 356 432 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 41 41 41 41 39 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 10 s A 203 250 313 356 432 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 19 17 16 • Normal starting (Class 10) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 10 s A 203 250 313 356 432 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 19 17 16 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 20 s A 203 250 313 356 432 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 9 10 6 4 5 • Normal starting (Class 15) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 15 s A 203 240 313 325 402 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 13 13 10 13 11 - Rated motor current IM 1)3), starting time 30 s A 203 240 313 325 402 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 3 6 1 2 1 • For heavy starting (Class 20) - Rated motor current IM 1), starting time 20 s A 195 215 275 285 356 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 10 10 10 10 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 40 s A 195 215 275 285 356 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 1 5 1 3 1 • For very heavy starting (Class 30) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 30 s A 162 180 220 240 285 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 6 6 6 6 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 60 s A 162 180 220 240 285 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 3 3 3 2 1
  • 79.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/17Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) Current limit on soft starter set to 350 % IM. 2) For intermittent duty S4 with ON period = 70 %, Tu = 40 °C, stand-alone installation vertical. The quoted operating frequencies do not apply for automatic mode. 3) Maximum adjustable rated motor current IM, dependent on CLASS setting. Type 3RW44 53 3RW44 54 3RW44 55 3RW44 56 3RW44 57 Power electronics Rated operational current Ie 551 615 693 780 880 Load rating with rated operational current Ie • Acc. to IEC and UL/CSA for individual mounting, at 40/50/60 °C, AC-53a A 551/494/438 615/551/489 693/615/551 780/693/615 880/780/693 Smallest adjustable rated motor current IM for the motor overload protection A 110 123 138 156 176 Power loss • In operation after completed ramp-up with uninterrupted rated operational current (40 °C) approx. W 159 186 220 214 250 • During starting with current limit set to 350 % IM (40 °C) W 7020 8100 9500 11100 13100 Permissible rated motor current and starts per hour • Normal starting (Class 5) - Rated motor current IM 1), starting time 5 s A 551 615 693 780 880 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 41 41 37 33 22 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 10 s A 551 615 693 780 880 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 16 13 8 • Normal starting (Class 10) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 10 s A 551 615 693 780 880 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 20 20 16 13 8 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 20 s A 551 615 693 780 880 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 9 6 4 0.3 • Normal starting (Class 15) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 15 s A 551 615 666 723 780 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 13 13 11 9 8 - Rated motor current IM 1)3), starting time 30 s A 551 615 666 723 780 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 4 3 1 0.4 • For heavy starting (Class 20) - Rated motor current IM 1), starting time 20 s A 551 591 633 670 710 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 10 10 7 8 8 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 40 s A 551 591 633 670 710 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 4 2 1 1 0.4 • For very heavy starting (Class 30) - Rated motor current IM 1) , starting time 30 s A 500 525 551 575 600 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 6 6 6 6 6 - Rated motor current IM 1)3) , starting time 60 s A 500 525 551 575 600 - Starts per hour2) 1/h 2 1 1 1 1.5
  • 80.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/18 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 1) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46235 use 3RT19 56-4EA1 terminal cover for conductor cross-sections from 95 mm² to ensure phase spacing. 2) When connecting cable lugs to DIN 46234, the 3RT19 66-4EA1 terminal cover must be used for conductor cross-sections of 240 mm² and more as well as DIN 46235 for conductor cross-sections of 185 mm² and more to keep the phase clearance. Type 3RW44 2. 3RW44 3., 3RW44 4. 3RW44 5. Conductor cross-sections Screw terminals Main conductors: with box terminal 3RT19 55-4G (55 kW) 3RT19 66-4G Front clamping point connected • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240 • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 70 ... 240 • Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 95 ... 300 • Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 min. 6 x 9 x 0.8 max. 20 x 24 x 0.5 • AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 3/0 ... 600 kcmil Rear clamping point connected • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 185 • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 185 • Stranded mm2 16 ... 70 120 ... 240 • Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm min. 3 x 9 x 0.8, max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 min. 6 x 9 x 0.8 max. 20 x 24 x 0.5 • AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 2/0 250 ... 500 kcmil Both clamping points connected • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185 • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 max. 1 x 50, 1 x 70 min. 2 x 50; max. 2 x 185 • Stranded mm2 max. 2 x 70 max. 2 x 70; max. 2 x 240 • Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm max. 2 x (6 x 15.5 x 0.8) max. 2 x (20 x 24 x 0.5) • AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG max. 2 x 1/0 min. 2 x 2/0; max. 2 x 500 kcmil • Terminal screws M10 (hexagon socket, A/F4) M12 (hexagon socket, A/F5) - Pickup torque 10 ... 12 20 ... 22 90 ... 110 180 ... 195 Screw terminals Main conductors: with box terminal 3RT19 56-4G Front or rear clamp- ing point connected • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120 • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 16 ... 120 • Stranded mm2 16 ... 120 • Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm min. 3 x 9 x 0.8 max. 6 x 15.5 x 0.8 • AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 6 ... 250 kcmil Both clamping points connected • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120 • Finely stranded without end sleeve mm2 max. 1 x 95, 1 x 120 • Stranded mm2 max. 2 x 120 • Ribbon cable conductors (number x width x thickness) mm max. 2 x (10 x 15.5 x 0.8) • AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG max. 2 x 3/0 Screw terminals Main conductors: Without box terminal/rail connection • Finely stranded with cable lug mm2 16 ... 951) 50 ... 2402) 50 ... 2402) • Stranded with cable lug mm2 25 ... 1201) 70 ... 2402) 70 ... 2402) • AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 4 ... 250 kcmil 2/0 ... 500 kcmil 1/0 ... 500 kcmil • Connecting bar (max. width) mm 17 25 60 • Terminal screws M8 x 25 (A/F13) M10 x 30 (A/F17) M12 x 40 - Pickup torque NM 10 ... 14 14 ... 24 20 ... 35 lb.in 89 ... 124 124 ... 210 177 ... 310 NSB00479NSB00480NSB00481NSB00479 NSB00480 NSB00481
  • 81.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/19Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 Soft starters Type 3RW44 .. Conductor cross-sections Auxiliary conductors (1 or 2 conductors can be connected): Screw terminals • Solid mm2 2 x 0.5 ... 2.5 • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x 0.5 ... 1.5 • AWG cables - Solid or stranded AWG 2 x 20 ... 14 - Finely stranded with end sleeve AWG 2 x 20 ... 16 • Terminal screws - Pickup torque NM 0.7 ... 0.9 lb.in 7 ... 8 Spring-loaded terminals • Solid mm2 2 x 0.25 ... 2.5 • Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 2 x 0.25 ... 1.5 • AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x 24 ... 14 Standard Parameters Electromagnetic compatibility acc. to EN 60947-4-2 EMC interference immunity Electrostatic discharge (ESD) EN 61000-4-2 ±4 kV contact discharge, ±8 kV air discharge Electromagnetic RF fields EN 61000-4-3 Frequency range: 80 ... 1000 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz Degree of severity 3, 10 V/m Conducted RF interference EN 61000-4-6 Frequency range: 150 kHz ... 80 MHz with 80 % at 1 kHz Interference 10 V RF voltages and RF currents on conductors Burst EN 61000-4-4 ±2 kV/5 kHz Surge EN 61000-4-5 ±1 kV line to line ±2 kV line to ground EMC interference emission EMC interference field strength EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 30 ... 1000 MHz Radio interference voltage EN 55011 Limit value of Class A at 0.15 ... 30 MHz Is an RI suppression filter necessary? Degree of noise suppression A (industrial applications) no
  • 82.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/20 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 Fuse assignment The coordination type to which the motor feeder with soft starter is mounted depends on the application-specific requirements. Normally, fuseless mounting (combination of motor starter pro- tector and soft starter) is sufficient. If type 2 coordination is to be fulfilled, semiconductor fuses must be fitted in the motor feeder. 1) The rated motor current must be considered when selecting the devices. 2) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders. Inline circuit fuseless version Soft starters Motor starter protectors/circuit-breakers1) Rated current 440 V +10 % Rated current G1 Q1 Type A Type A Type of coordination 12): 3RW44 22 ... 3RW44 27: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW44 34 and 3RW44 35: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW44 36 ... 3RW44 57: Iq = 65 kA 3RW44 22 29 3RV10 42-4HA10 50 3RW44 23 36 3RV10 42-4JA10 63 3RW44 24 47 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3RW44 25 57 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3RW44 26 77 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3RW44 27 93 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3RW44 34 113 3VL17 16-2DD36 160 3RW44 35 134 3VL17 16-2DD36 160 3RW44 36 162 3VL37 25-2DC36 250 3RW44 43 203 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 3RW44 44 250 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 3RW44 45 313 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 3RW44 46 356 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 3RW44 47 432 3VL57 50-3DC36 500 3RW44 53 551 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 3RW44 54 615 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 3RW44 55 693 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 3RW44 56 780 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000 3RW44 57 880 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000 G 1 NSB0_01016 M 3 ~ Q 1
  • 83.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/21Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking contactor is required. If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor must also be used (see table for type). For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we recommend the function "DC braking". 2) Additional auxiliary relay K4: LZX:RT4A4T30 (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC), LZX:RT4A4S15 (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC). 3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders. Inline circuit fused version (line protection only) Soft starters Line protections Line contactors up to 400 V Braking contactors1)2) Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size (optional) (for typical circuit see page 6/32) G1 F1 K1 K2 K3 Type A Type A Type Type Type Type of coordination 13): Iq = 65 kA 3RW44 22 29 3NA3 820-6 50 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 -- 3RW44 23 36 3NA3 822-6 63 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 -- 3RW44 24 47 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 -- 3RW44 25 57 3NA3 830-6 100 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 -- 3RW44 26 77 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35 3RW44 27 93 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36 3RW44 34 113 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44 3RW44 35 134 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45 3RW44 36 162 3NA3 365-6 500 3 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RW44 43 203 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54 3RW44 44 250 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55 3RW44 45 313 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3RW44 46 356 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3RW44 47 432 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64 3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 F 1 NSB0_01477 M 3 ~ K 1 G 1
  • 84.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/22 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking contactor is required. If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor must also be used (see table for type). For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we recommend the function "DC braking". 2) Additional auxiliary relay K4: LZX:RT4A4T30 (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC), LZX:RT4A4S15 (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC). 3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders. Inline circuit fused version with 3NE1 SITOR all-range fuse (semiconductor and line protection) Soft starters All-range fuses Line contactors up to 400 V Braking contactors1)2) Rated current Rated current Voltage Size (optional) (for typical circuit see page 6/32) G1 F’1 K1 K2 K3 Type A Type A V Type Type Type Type of coordination 23): Iq = 65 kA 3RW44 22 29 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 -- 3RW44 23 36 3NE1 020-2 80 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 -- 3RW44 24 47 3NE1 021-2 100 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 -- 3RW44 25 57 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 -- 3RW44 26 77 3NE1 022-2 125 690 +5 % 00 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35 3RW44 27 93 3NE1 024-2 160 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36 3RW44 34 113 3NE1 225-2 200 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44 3RW44 35 134 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45 3RW44 36 162 3NE1 227-2 250 690 +5 % 1 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3RW44 43 203 3NE1 230-2 315 600 +10 % 1 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54 3RW44 44 250 3NE1 331-2 350 460 +10 % 2 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55 3RW44 45 313 3NE1 333-2 450 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3RW44 46 356 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +5 % 2 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3RW44 47 432 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +5 % 3 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64 3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NE1 334-2 500 690 +10 % 2 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NE1 435-2 560 690 +10 % 3 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 NSB0_01478 M 3 ~ K 1 G 1 F ´ 1
  • 85.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/23Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking contactor is required. If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor must also be used (see table for type). For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we recommend the function "DC braking". 2) Additional auxiliary relay K4: LZX:RT4A4T30 (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 230 V AC), LZX:RT4A4S15 (3RW44 soft starter with rated control supply voltage 115 V AC). 3) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders. Inline circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR semiconductor fuse (semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by circuit-breaker) Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses (cylinder) Rated current Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size G1 F3 F3 F3 Type A Type A Type A Type A Type of coordination 23) : Iq = 65 kA 3RW44 22 29 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58 3RW44 23 36 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58 3RW44 24 47 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58 3RW44 25 57 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0 3RW44 26 77 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0 3RW44 27 93 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RW44 34 113 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2 3RW44 35 134 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2 3RW44 36 162 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RW44 43 203 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RW44 44 250 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RW44 45 313 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2 3RW44 46 356 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2 3RW44 47 432 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2 3RW44 53 551 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2 3RW44 54 615 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2 3RW44 55 693 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2 3RW44 56 780 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3RW44 57 880 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 Soft starters Line contactors up to 400 V Braking contactors1)2) Motor starter protectors/ circuit-breakers Line protections Rated current (optional) (for typical circuit see page 6/32) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size G1 K1 Q1 F1 Type A Type Type A Type A Type of coordination 23): 3RW44 22 ... 3RW44 27: Iq = 32 kA; 3RW44 34 and 3RW44 35: Iq = 16 kA; 3RW44 36 ... 3RW44 57: Iq = 65 kA 3RW44 22 29 3RT10 34 3RT15 26 -- 3RV10 42-4HA10 50 3NA3 820-6 50 00 3RW44 23 36 3RT10 35 3RT15 26 -- 3RV10 42-4JA10 63 3NA3 822-6 63 00 3RW44 24 47 3RT10 36 3RT15 35 -- 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RW44 25 57 3RT10 44 3RT15 35 -- 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00 3RW44 26 77 3RT10 45 3RT10 24 3RT10 35 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RW44 27 93 3RT10 46 3RT10 25 3RT10 36 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RW44 34 113 3RT10 54 3RT10 34 3RT10 44 3VL17 16-2DD36 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RW44 35 134 3RT10 55 3RT10 36 3RT10 45 3VL17 16-2DD36 160 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RW44 36 162 3RT10 56 3RT10 44 3RT10 45 3VL37 25-2DC36 250 3NA3 365-6 500 3 3RW44 43 203 3RT10 64 3RT10 44 3RT10 54 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RW44 44 250 3RT10 65 3RT10 44 3RT10 55 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 2 x 3NA3 354-6 2 x 355 3 3RW44 45 313 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 46 356 3RT10 75 3RT10 54 3RT10 56 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 47 432 3RT10 76 3RT10 55 3RT10 64 3VL57 50-3DC36 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 53 551 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 54 615 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 55 693 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL67 80-3DE36 800 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 56 780 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 57 880 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL77 10-3AB36 1000 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 F 3 NSB0_01019a G 1 Q 1 M 3 ~ F 1 NSB0_01479a M 3 ~ K 1 G 1 F 3
  • 86.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/24 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 1) The types of coordination are explained in more detail in the Technical information LV 1 T under – Fuseless Load Feeders. Inside-delta circuit fused version with 3NE or 3NC SITOR fuses (semiconductor protection by fuse, lead and overload protection by circuit-breaker) Soft starters Semiconductor fuses, minimum Semiconductor fuses, maximum Semiconductor fuses (cylinder) Rated current Rated current Size Rated current Size Rated current Size G1 F3 F3 F3 Type A Type A Type A Type A Type of coordination 21) 3RW44 22 50 3NE4 120 80 0 3NE4 121 100 0 3NC2 280 80 22 x 58 3RW44 23 62 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58 3RW44 24 81 3NE4 121 100 0 3NE4 122 125 0 3NC2 200 100 22 x 58 3RW44 25 99 3NE4 122 125 0 3NE4 124 160 0 3RW44 26 133 3NE4 124 160 0 3NE4 124 160 0 3RW44 27 161 3NE3 224 160 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RW44 34 196 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2 3RW44 35 232 3NE3 225 200 1 3NE3 335 560 2 3RW44 36 281 3NE3 227 250 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RW44 43 352 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RW44 44 433 3NE3 230-0B 315 1 3NE3 333 450 2 3RW44 45 542 3NE3 233 450 1 3NE3 336 630 2 3RW44 46 617 3NE3 333 450 2 3NE3 336 630 2 3RW44 47 748 3NE3 335 560 2 3NE3 338-8 800 2 3RW44 53 954 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2 3RW44 54 1065 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2 3RW44 55 1200 2 x 3NE3 335 560 2 3 x 3NE3 334-0B 500 2 3RW44 56 1351 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 2 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 3RW44 57 1524 2 x 3NE3 336 630 2 3 x 3NE3 340-8 900 2 Soft starters Line contactors up to 400 V Motor starter protectors/ cirduit-breakers Line protections Rated current (optional) 440 V +10 % Rated current 690 V +5 % Rated current Size G1 K1 Q1 F1 Type A Type Type A Type A Type of coordination 21) 3RW44 22 50 3RT10 36-1AP04 3RV10 42-4KA10 75 3NA3 824-6 80 00 3RW44 23 62 3RT10 44-1AP04 3RV10 42-4LA10 90 3NA3 830-6 100 00 3RW44 24 81 3RT10 46-1AP04 3RV10 42-4MA10 100 3NA3 132-6 125 1 3RW44 25 99 3RT10 54-1AP36 3VL27 16-2DC36 160 3NA3 136-6 160 1 3RW44 26 133 3RT10 55-6AP36 3VL27 16-2DC36 160 3NA3 240-6 200 2 3RW44 27 161 3RT10 56-6AP36 3VL37 20-2DC36 200 3NA3 244-6 250 2 3RW44 34 196 3RT10 64-6AP36 3VL37 25-2DC36 250 3NA3 360-6 400 3 3RW44 35 232 3RT10 65-6AP36 3VL47 31-3DC36 315 3NA3 360-6 400 3 3RW44 36 281 3RT10 66-6AP36 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 360-6 2 x 400 3 3RW44 43 352 3RT10 75-6AP36 3VL47 40-3DC36 400 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 44 433 3RT10 76-6AP36 3VL57 50-3DC36 500 2 x 3NA3 365-6 2 x 500 3 3RW44 45 542 3TF68 44-0CM7 3WL12 08 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3RW44 46 617 3TF68 44-0CM7 3WL12 08 800 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3RW44 47 748 3TF69 3WL12 10 1000 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3RW44 53 954 2 x 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL77 10 1000 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3RW44 54 1065 2 x 3TF68 44-0CM7 3VL77 12 1250 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3RW44 55 1200 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 365-6 3 x 500 3 3RW44 56 1351 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 372 3 x 630 3 3RW44 57 1524 2 x 3TF69 44-0CM7 3VL87 16 1600 3 x 3NA3 372 3 x 630 3 F 3 NSB0_01596 G 1 Q 1 M 3 ~ F 1 NSB0_01597 M 3 ~ K 1 G 1 F 3
  • 87.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/25Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 ■Characteristic curves Motor protection tripping characteristics for 3RW44 (with symmetry) e 2 4 6 101 Class 10 Class 15 Class 20 100 101 102 103 2 4 6 2 4 6 2 4 6 Class 5 Class 30 NSB0_01500 [s] x Trippingtime
  • 88.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/26 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 ■More information Application examples for normal starting (Class 10) Application examples for heavy starting (Class 20) Application examples for very heavy starting (Class 30) Note: These tables present sample setting values and device sizes. They are intended only for the purposes of information and are not binding. The setting values depend on the application in question and must be optimized during commissioning. The soft starter dimensions should be checked where necessary with the Win-Soft Starter software or with the help of Technical Assistance. Normal starting Class 10 (up to 20 s with 350 % In motor), The soft starter rating can be selected to be as high as the rating of the motor used Application Conveyor belts Roller conveyors Compressors Small ventilators Pumps Hydraulic pumps Starting parameters • Voltage ramp and current limiting - Starting voltage % 70 60 50 30 30 30 - Starting time s 10 10 10 10 10 10 - Current limit value Deactivated Deactivated 4 x IM 4 x IM Deactivated Deactivated • Torque ramp - Starting torque 60 50 40 20 10 10 - End torque 150 150 150 150 150 150 - Starting time 10 10 10 10 10 10 • Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Ramp-down mode Smooth ramp-down Smooth ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Pump ramp-down Free ramp-down Heavy starting Class 20 (up to 40 s with 350 % In motor), The soft starter has to be selected one rating class higher than the motor used Application Stirrers Centrifuges Milling machines Starting parameters • Voltage ramp and current limiting - Starting voltage % 30 30 30 - Starting time s 30 30 30 - Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM • Torque ramp - Starting torque 30 30 30 - End torque 150 150 150 - Starting time 30 30 30 • Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Deactivated (0 ms) Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down or DC braking Very heavy starting Class 30 (up to 60 s with 350 % In motor), The soft starter has to be selected two rating classes higher than the motor used Application Large ventilators Mills Breakers Circular saw/bandsaws Starting parameters • Voltage ramp and current limiting - Starting voltage % 30 50 50 30 - Starting time s 60 60 60 60 - Current limit value 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM 4 x IM • Torque ramp - Starting torque 20 50 50 20 - End torque 150 150 150 150 - Starting time 60 60 60 60 • Breakaway pulse Deactivated (0 ms) 80 %, 300 ms 80 %, 300 ms Deactivated (0 ms) Ramp-down mode Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down Free ramp-down
  • 89.
    3RW Soft Starters 3RW44 forHigh-Feature applications 6/27Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 Circuit concept The SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters can be operated in two different types of circuit. • Inline circuit The controls for isolating and protecting the motor are simply connected in series with the soft starter. The motor is connected to the soft starter with three leads. • Inside-delta circuit The wiring is similar to that of wye-delta starters. The phases of the soft starter are connected in series with the individual motor windings. The soft starter then only has to carry the phase current, amounting to about 58 % of the rated motor current (conductor current). Comparison of the types of circuit Inline circuit: Rated current Ie corresponds to the rated motor current In, 3 leads to the motor Inside-delta circuit: Rated current Ie corresponds to approx. 58 % of the rated motor current In, 6 leads to the motor (as with wye-delta starters) Which circuit? Using the inline circuit involves the lowest wiring complexity. If the soft starter to motor connections are long, this contact sequence is preferable. With the inside-delta circuit there is double the wiring complexity but a smaller size of device can be used at the same rating. Thanks to the possibility of switching between the inline circuit and inside-delta circuit, the most favorable solution can always be chosen. The braking function is possible only in the inline circuit. Configuration The 3RW44 solid-state soft starters are designed for normal starting. In case of heavy starting or increased starting frequency, a larger device must be selected. For long starting times it is recommended to have a PTC ther- mistor detector in the motor. This also applies for the ramp-down modes smooth ramp-down, pump ramp-down and DC braking, because during the ramp-down time in these modes, an addi- tional current loading applies in contrast to free ramp-down. In the motor feeder between the SIRIUS 3RW soft starter and the motor, no capacitive elements are permitted (e.g. no reactive- power compensation equipment). In addition, neither static systems for reactive-power compensation nor dynamic PFC (Power Factor Correction) must be operated in parallel during starting and ramp-down of the soft starter. This is important to prevent faults arising on the compensation equipment and/or the soft starter. All elements of the main circuit (such as fuses and controls) should be dimensioned for direct starting, following the local short-circuit conditions. Fuses, switching devices and overload relays must be ordered separately. The harmonic component load for starting currents must be taken into consideration for the selection of motor starter protectors (selection of release). Serial PC interface RS 232 and parameterizing and operating software Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart The solid-state 3RW44 soft starters have a PC interface for communicating with the Soft Starter ES 2006 Smart software and an operating and monitoring module. Manual for SIRIUS 3RW44 Besides containing all important information on planning, com- missioning and servicing, the manual also contains suggested circuits and the technical specifications for all devices. Win-Soft Starter selection and simulation program With this software, you can simulate and select all Siemens soft starters, taking into account various parameters such as mains properties, motor and load data, and special application requirements. The software is a valuable tool, which makes complicated, lengthy manual calculations for determining the required soft starters superfluous. You can order the CD-ROM under the following order number: Order No.: E20001-D1020-P302-V2-7400. More information can be found on the Internet at http://www.siemens.com/softstarter SIRIUS soft starter training course (SD-SIRIUSO) Siemens offers a 2-day training course on the SIRIUS solid-state soft starters to keep customers and own personnel up-to-date on configuring, commissioning and servicing issues. Please direct enquiries and applications to: Training Center I&S IS E&C TC Werner-von-Siemens-Str. 65 D-91052 Erlangen Telephone: ++49 9131 729262 Telefax: ++49 9131 728172 sibrain@erl9.siemens.de http://www.siemens.com/sitrain N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 2 4L 1 L 2 L 3 N P E N S B 0 _ 0 0 4 2 5L 1 L 2 L 3 N P E W 2 W 1 T 3 L 3 V 1 V 2 L 2 T 2 U 2 U 1 T 1 L 1
  • 90.
    3RW Soft Starters Projectplanning aids 6/28 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 ■Dimensional drawings 3RW44 2., 3RW44 3. and 3RW44 4. for High-Feature applications l e f b p k i o h g m a c nd N S B 0 _ 0 1 4 9 3 q Type/Dimension (mm) a b c d e f g h I k l m n o p q 3RW44 2. 180 170 37 11 167 100 240 270 180 148 7,5 153 7 184 6,6 M6, 10 Nm 3RW44 3. 180 170 37 17 167 100 240 270 180 148 7,5 153 7 198 9 M6, 10 Nm 3RW44 4. 210 210 48 25 190 140 269 298 205 166 16 166 9 230 11 M8, 15 Nm
  • 91.
    3RW Soft Starters Projectplanning aids 6/29Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 3RW44 5. for High-Feature applications 147 173 195 118 NSB0_01653 261 290 249 162 152 623 105 253 16,5 76 44 470 510 15,5 20 Ø14 40 638,5 590
  • 92.
    3RW Soft Starters Projectplanning aids 6/30 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 ■Schematics 1) Permissible values for main and control voltage, see Technical Specifications. 3RW44 connection examples for main and control circuits Main circuit Control circuit Possibility 1a: Possibility 1: Inline circuit with circuit-breaker and SITOR fuse (semiconductor protection only) Control by pushbutton Main circuit Possibility 1b: Possibility 1c: Inline circuit with full-range protection (line and semiconductor protection) Inline circuit with line and SITOR fuse (semiconductor protection only) Q1 L3 L2 L1 G1 F3 T1 T2 T3 M1 NSB0_01490a L1 L2 L3 V1U1 W1 M PE 3~ 3/N/PE 400 V AC, 50 Hz (optional semiconductor protection fuse) 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98 96 + T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1 A2 N PE PE G1 F2 NSB0_01494a StartS2 ResetS3 Stop S1 L1 On period Group error Noaction Noaction No action PTC type A or Thermoclick No action 1/N/PE 230 V AC , 50 Hz Motoronright PS1 1) G 1 L 1 L 2 L 3 T 1 T 2 T 3 M 1 NSB0_01491 F 1 ' V 1U 1 W 1 M P E 3 ~ L 3 L 2 L 1 3 / N / P E A C 4 0 0 V , 5 0 H z1 ) G 1 F 3 L 1 L 2 L 3 T 1 T 2 T 3 M 1 NSB0_01492 F 1 V 1U 1 W 1 M P E 3 ~ L 3 L 2 L 1 3 / N / P E A C 4 0 0 V , 5 0 H z1 )
  • 93.
    3RW Soft Starters Projectplanning aids 6/31Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) Permissible values for main and control voltage, see Technical Specifications. 2) Caution. Risk of restarting! The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset command because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a start command is active after the reset command. This applies especially in case of motor protection tripping. For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) in the controller. Main circuit Control circuit Possibility 2: Possibility 2: Inline circuit with main contactor Control of a main contactor and control by means of PLC Q1 L3 L2 L1 G1 K1 F3 L1 L2 L3 T1 T2 T3 M1 NSB0_01495a V1U1 W1 M PE 3~ 1) (optional semiconductor protection) (optional line contactor if floating switching of the motor is planned) 3/N/PE 400 V AC , 50 Hz 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 9896 + T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1 A2 N PE PE G1 K1 NSB0_01496a F2 +24 V DC M L1 1/N/PE AC 230 V , 50 Hz1) Switch-on duration Motorright TripReset PLC outputs PLC inputs Noaction Noaction No action No action Group error PTC type A / Thermoclick (optional line contactor if floating switching of the motor is planned) PS1 ResetStart 2)
  • 94.
    3RW Soft Starters Projectplanning aids 6/32 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 1) Permissible values for main and control voltage, see Technical Specifications. 2) Caution. Risk of restarting! The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset command because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a start command is active after the reset command. This applies espe- cially in case of motor protection tripping. For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) in the controller. 3) If the ramp-down function "Combined braking" is selected, no braking contactor is required. If the ramp-down function "DC braking" is selected, a braking contactor must be used in addition. Type, see Fuse Coordination (inline circuit) on pages 6/21 to 6/23. For applications with large centrifugal masses (JLoad > JMotor) we recommend the function "DC braking". The output 2 must be switched over to "DC braking contactor". 4) Auxiliary relay K4, e.g.: LZX:RT4A4T30 (230 V AC rated control supply voltage), LZX:RT4A4S15 (115 V AC rated control supply voltage). Main circuit Control circuit Possibility 3a: Possibility 3a: Inline circuit with ramp-down function DC braking3) (for device types 3RW44 22 to 3RW44 25) Control of the braking contactor3) Main circuit Control circuit Possibility 3b: Possibility 3b: Inline circuit with ramp-down function DC braking3) (for device types 3RW44 26 to 3RW44 47) Control of the braking contactor3) Q1 L3 L2 G1 F3 T1 T2 T3 M1 NSB0_01501a L1 L2 L3 V1U1 W1 M K2 K2 K2 PE 3~ 1) 2 (optional semi- conductor protection) L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC , 50 Hz 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98 96 + T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1 A2 N PE PE G1 K2 NSB0_01502 Reset M Start Reset +24 V DC K2 F2 1) 2) No action Group error Noaction Noaction On period PLC output PTC type A or Thermoclick L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC , 50 Hz DC braking contactor 3) K2 K3 3 3 G1 F3 T1 T2 T3 M1 NSB0_01503a L1 L2 L3 V1U1 W1 M PE 3~ Q1 L3 L2 1) (optional semi- conductor protection) L1 3/N/PE 400 V AC , 50 Hz 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 98 96 + T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1 A2 N PE PE G1 K4 NSB0_01504 Reset K4 K4 K3 K2 K2 K3 +24 V DC M Start Reset F2 1) 2) 4) PLC output No action Group error Noaction Noaction ON period PTC type A or Thermoclick Motoronright L1 1/N/PE 230 V AC , 50 Hz DC braking contactor 3)
  • 95.
    3RW Soft Starters Projectplanning aids 6/33Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 66 1) Permissible values for main and control voltage, see Technical Specifications. 2) Caution. Risk of restarting! The start command (e.g. from the PLC) must be reset prior to a reset command because a new, automatic restart will take place automatically if a start command is active after the reset command. This applies especially in case of motor protection tripping. For safety reasons we recommend incorporating the group error output (terminals 95 and 96) in the controller. Main circuit Control circuit Possibility 4a: Possibility 4b: Possibility 4: Inside-delta circuit Change of direction of rotation for inside-delta circuit Control by means of PLC M V 1 W 1 U 2 U 1 W 2 V 2 G 1 M 1 NSB0_01497a L 1 L 2 L 3 T 1 T 2 T 3 Q 1 F 3 K 1 P E 3 ~ L 3 L 2 1 )L 1 3 / N / P E A C 4 0 0 V , 5 0 H z L 1 L 2 L 3 T 1 T 2 T 3 M 1 NSB0_01499a M V 1U 1 W 1 U 2W 2 V 2 P E 3 ~ Q 1 L 3 L 2 1 ) G 1 F 3 L 1 3 / N / P E A C 4 0 0 V , 5 0 H z 13 14 23 24 33 34 95 9896 + T1 T2IN4IN3IN2IN1L-L+A1 A2 N PE PE G1 NSB0_01498a +24 V DC M F2 L1 1/N/PE AC 230 V , 50 Hz 1) 2) Reset Switch-on duration No action Group error Noaction Noaction No action PTC type A or Thermoclick Motorright PLC outputs PLC inputs Start Reset
  • 96.
    3RW Soft Starters Notes 6/34Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 6 7
  • 97.
    Siemens LV 1News · 04/2006 Monitoring Relays 3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/2 - Overview 7/2 - Benefits 7/2 - Application 7/2 - Selection and ordering data 7/3 - Accessories Monitoring Relays 3UG Monitoring Relays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/4 - Function 7/6 - Technical specifications 7/7 - Dimensional drawings 7/8 - Schematics Monitoring and Control Devices Catalog Technical Information
  • 98.
    Monitoring Relays 3UG MonitoringRelays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 7 ■Overview The 3UG46 41 power factor and active current monitoring device enables the load monitoring of motors. Whereas power factor monitoring is used above all for monitor- ing no-load operation, the active current monitoring option can be used to observe and evaluate the load factor over the entire torque range. ■Benefits • Can be used world-wide thanks to voltage range from 90 to 690 V • Monitoring of even small single-phase motors with a no-load supply current below 0.5 A • Simple determination of threshold values through direct referencing from measured variable to motor load • Window monitoring and active current measurement are used to detect phase failure as well as a broken cable between the control cabinet and the motor • Power factor or active current can be selected as measurement principle ■Application • No-load monitoring and load shedding, e.g. in the event of a torn V-belt • Underload monitoring in the low rating range, e.g. in the event of pump no-load operation • Monitoring of overload, e.g. due to a dirty filter system • Simple power factor monitoring in networks for control of compensation equipment • Broken cable between control cabinet and motor ■Selection and ordering data Relay for monitoring the power factor and the active current, (p.f. x Ires), overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring, single and three-phase, overall width 22.5 mm Digitally adjustable, with LCD display • Upper and lower threshold value can be adjusted separately • 1 changeover contact each for undershoot/overshoot • Permanent display of actual value and release status Measuring range Hysteresis ON delay OFF delay Rated control supply volt- age Us DT Screw terminal PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. for power factor for active current Ires for power factor for active current Ires AC 50/60 Hz p.f. A p.f. A s s V Order No. Price per PU kg 0.10 ... 0.99 0.2 ... 10.0 0.1 0.1 ... 2.0 0 ... 99 0.1 ... 20.0 90 ... 690 A 3UG46 41-1CS20 1 1 unit 101 0.147 Measuring range Hysteresis ON delay OFF delay Rated control supply voltage Us DT Spring-loaded terminal PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. for power factor for active current Ires for power factor for active current Ires AC 50/60 Hz p.f. A p.f. A s s V Order No. Price per PU kg 0.10 ... 0.99 0.2 ... 10.0 0.1 0.1 ... 2.0 0 ... 99 0.1 ... 20.0 90 ... 690 A 3UG46 41-2CS20 1 1 unit 101 0.147 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 99.
    Monitoring Relays 3UG MonitoringRelays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 77 ■Accessories 1) Computer labeling system for individual labeling of device labeling plates available from: murrplastik Systemtechnik GmbH. Use Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg Blank labeling plates Blank labeling plates, 20 mm x 7 mm, pastel turquoise1) C 3RT19 00-1SB20 100 340 units 101 22.000 Push-in lugs and sealable caps for devices with 1 or 2 CO contacts Plug-in lugs for screw fixing (1 set = 2 units) } 3RP19 03 1 10 units 101 0.002 for devices with 1 or 2 CO contacts Sealable caps for securing against unauthorized adjustment of setting knobs } 3RP19 02 1 5 units 101 0.004 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 100.
    Monitoring Relays 3UG MonitoringRelays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 7 ■Function The 3UG46 41 voltage monitoring relay has an internal power supply and performs single-phase monitoring of the power factor or overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring of the resulting active current, depending on which option is selected. The load to be monitored is connected in front of the IN terminal. The load current flows through the IN and Ly/N terminals. The setting range for the power factor is 0.1 ... 0.99 and for the active current 0.2 ... 10 A. If no load current flows when the supply voltage is switched on, the display indicates I < 0.2 and shows a symbol for overshoot, undershoot or window monitoring. If the current exceeds 0.2 A when the motor is now switched on, the set start-up delay time (onDelay) starts. During this time, an undershooting or overshooting of the set limit values will not lead to a relay response of the changeover contact. If the operational flowing active current and/or the power factor value overshoots or undershoots the corresponding selected threshold value, the fault peak delay time (Delay) starts. When this time has elapsed, the relay changes its switching position. The responsible measured variable for the overshooting or undershooting flashes in the display. The relay works selectably by the open-circuit or closed-circuit principle. If the device is set to Auto-RESET (Memory = No), the relay returns to its original status according to the principle of opera- tion is set and the flashing is ended once the hysteresis threshold is reached. If manual reset is selected in the menu (Memory = Yes), the switching relay remains in its current switching status and the current measured value and the symbol for overshoot or under- shoot continue to flash even when the measured variable adopts a permissible value again. This stored fault status can be reset by simultaneously pressing the UP▲ or DOWN▼ key for 2 seconds or by switching the supply voltage off and on. With the closed-circuit principle selected Indication outside the measurement range limits Overshooting of the active current Undershooting of the active current Window monitoring of the active current NSB0_01658 21/24 21/22 11/14 11/12 < 0,2 A Lx-Ly/N = 0,2 A = 0 onDelay onDelay NSB0_01659 21/24 21/22 11/14 11/12 > res = 0 res DelayonDelay Hysteresis NSB0_01660 21/24 21/22 11/14 11/12 < res = 0 res DelayonDelay Hysteresis NSB0_01661 21/24 21/22 11/14 11/12 < res = 0 > res res res DelayonDelay Delay Hysteresis Hysteresis
  • 101.
    Monitoring Relays 3UG MonitoringRelays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 77 Overshooting of the power factor Undershooting of the power factor Window monitoring of the power factor Legend p.f.: power factor NSB0_01662 21/24 21/22 11/14 11/12 > cos cos = 0 cos p.f. DelayonDelay Hysteresis 0,10 cos = 0 NSB0_01663 21/24 21/22 11/14 11/12 < cos cos p.f. Hysteresis 0,10 DelayonDelay cos = 0 NSB0_01664 21/24 21/22 11/14 11/12 > cos < cos cos cos p.f. Hysteresis 0,10 DelayonDelay Delay
  • 102.
    Monitoring Relays 3UG MonitoringRelays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 7 ■Technical specifications 1) Caution: This is a Class A product. In the household environment this device may cause radio interference. In this case the user must introduce suitable measures. Type 3UG46 41 General data Rated control supply voltage Us V 90 … 690 Rated frequency Hz 50/60 Rated output, typical • At 200 V AC VA 2.0 • At 400 V AC VA 2.7 • At 460 V AC VA 3.1 Width mm 22.5 RESET Automatic/ manual Function principle Closed-circuit principle, open-circuit principle Availability time after application of Us ms 1000 Response time on occurrence of a fault ms 300 Adjustable tripping delay time s 0.1 ... 20 Adjustable ON-delay time s 0 ... 99 Mains buffering time, typical ms 10 Rated insulation voltage Ui Degree of pollution 3 Overvoltage category III acc. to VDE 0110 V 690 Rated impulse withstand voltage kV 6000 Permissible ambient temperature • During operation °C -25 … +60 • During storage °C -40 … +85 EMC tests1) IEC 60947-1/ IEC 61000-6-2 / IEC 61000-6-4 Degree of protection • Enclosure IP40 • Terminals IP20 Vibration resistance acc. to IEC 60068-2-6 Hz/mm 5 ... 25/0.75 Shock resistance acc. to IEC 60068 Part 2-27 g/ ms 15/11 Conductor cross-section • Screw terminal M3 (standard screwdriver size 2 and Pozidriv 2) - Solid mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 4) / 2 x (0.5 ... 2.5) - Finely stranded with end sleeve mm2 1 x (0.5 ... 2.5) / 2 x (0.5 ... 1.5) - AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (20 ... 14) - Tightening torque NM 0.8 … 1.2 • Spring-loaded terminals - Solid mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) - Finely stranded, with end sleeves acc. to DIN 46228 mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) - Finely stranded mm2 2 x (0.25 ... 1.5) - AWG conductors, solid or stranded AWG 2 x (24 ... 16) Measuring circuits Measurable active current Ires A 0.2 ... 10 Max. permissible load current A 10 Peak current < 1 s A 50 Adjustable response value Phase displacement angle 0.1 ... 0.99 DIAZED protection, gL/gG operational class A 16 Measuring accuracy % 10 Repeat accuracy at constant parameters % 1 Accuracy of digital display ± 1 digit Deviations for temperature fluctuations %/°C ± 0.1 Hysteresis Phase angle 0.10 Hysteresis Active current monitoring A 0.1 ... 2.0
  • 103.
    Monitoring Relays 3UG MonitoringRelays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/7Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 77 ■Dimensional drawings 1) For standard mounting rail according to EN 50022. Type 3UG46 41 Control circuit Number of changeover contacts for auxiliary contacts 2 Load capacity of the output relay • Thermal current Ith A 5 Rated operational current Ie at • AC-15/230 V A 3 • DC-13/24 V A 1 • DC-13/110 V A 0.2 • DC-13/230 V A 0.1 Minimum contact load at 17 V DC mA 5 Output relay with DIAZED fuse gL/gG operational class A 4 Electrical endurance AC-15 Million operating cycles 0.1 Mechanical endurance Million operating cycles 10 NSB0_01665 A B C 74 865 36 62 110 15 22,5 82 1) A B C Type 3UG46 41 Removable terminals Spring-loaded terminals 84 94 103 Screw terminal 83 92 102
  • 104.
    Monitoring Relays 3UG MonitoringRelays for Electrical and Additional Measurements Power factor and active current monitoring 7/8 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 7 ■Schematics Position of the connection terminals 1-phase motors 3-phase motors 3-phase motors with transformers for currents > 10 A M 1~ Lx IN 12 14 22 24 N L NSB0_01654 21 Ly/N 11 3UG46 41 cos< > cos> res < res Lx IN 12 14 22 24 L1 NSB0_01655 L2 L3 21 M 3~ 11 Ly/N 3UG46 41 cos< > cos> res < res Lx IN 12 14 22 24 NSB0_01656 21 L1 L2 L3 M 3~K(P1) L(P2) Ly/N 11 K(S1) L(S2) 3UG46 41 cos< > cos> res < res 3UG46 41 NSB0_01657 Lx 12 14 IN 22 21 24 11 Ly/N 7
  • 105.
    Siemens LV 1News · 04/2006 Commanding and Signaling Devices 3SB3 Pushbutton Units and Indicator Lights, 22 mm Components for Actuators and Indicators AS-Interface F adapters for EMERGENCY-STOP control devices 9/2 - Overview 9/2 - Selection and ordering data AS-Interface Enclosures and Front Panel Modules General data 9/3 - Overview 9/3 - Design 9/3 - Function AS-Interface enclosures with standard fittings 9/4 - Overview 9/4 - Selection and ordering data
  • 106.
    3SB3 Pushbutton Unitsand Indicator Lights, 22 mm Components for Actuators and Indicators AS-Interface F adapters for EMERGENCY-STOP control devices 9/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 9 ■Overview The AS-Interface Failsafe adapter is used to connect an EMERGENCY-STOP control device according to ISO 13850 or EN 418 from the 3SB3 series to the AS-Interface bus system. The Failsafe adapter has a safe AS-Interface slave and is snapped from behind onto the EMERGENCY-STOP control device (only actuating element). Depending on the version, screw terminals or spring-loaded ter- minals are used. In the extended version there is an output for controlling an indicator light or an LED. Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or the integrated addressing socket. Safety category 4 (SIL 3) is achieved with the adpater. ■Selection and ordering data Version Connection DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg 3SF5 402-1AB03 AS-Interface F adapters for SIRIUS 3SB3 EMERGENCY-STOP control devices for mounting on front plate • 2I Screw terminals } 3SF5 402-1AA03 1 1 unit 121 0.066 Spring-loaded terminals } 3SF5 402-1AA04 1 1 unit 121 0.066 • 2I/1O, output for LED control Screw terminals } 3SF5 402-1AB03 1 1 unit 121 0.066 Spring-loaded terminals } 3SF5 402-1AB04 1 1 unit 121 0.066 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 107.
    3SB3 Pushbutton Unitsand Indicator Lights, 22 mm AS-Interface Enclosures and Front Panel Modules General data 9/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 99 ■Overview Distributed command devices of the 3SB3 series can be quickly connected to the AS-Interface using AS-Interface enclosures. Using suitable components you can make your own enclosures with integrated AS-Interface or flexibly modify existing enclosures. Enclosure Color of cover of enclosure: 7 Gray, RAL 7035, or 7 Yellow, RAL 1004, for EMERGENCY-STOP. Color of the base of the enclosure: 7 Black, RAL 9005 ■Design Connection One set of links is required in each case to connect a slave to contact blocks, to lampholders and to the connection element. The connection elements are mounted in the front-end cable glands of the enclosure and are used for connection of the AS-Interface or for bringing unused inputs or outputs out of the enclosure. For connection to the AS-Interface bus there is a choice of the following options: 7 Terminal for shaped AS-Interface cable. The cable is contacted by the insulation displacement method and routed past the enclosure on the outside (possible only with plastic enclosure). 7 Cable gland for the shaped AS-Interface cable or round cable. The cable is routed into the enclosure (preferable for metal enclosure). 7 Connection using M12 plug If less than all inputs/outputs of the installed slaves in an enclo- sure are used for connecting the command devices, free inputs and outputs can be routed on request to the outside through an M12 socket on the top or bottom side of the enclosure. To supply inputs with power, the S+ connection of the must be assigned to the socket, for outputs the OUT – connection must be assigned. Addressing is performed using the AS-Interface connections or the integrated addressing socket. An external power supply is not required. ■Function AS-Interface slaves The following slave types are available: 7 Slave in A/B technology with 4 inputs and 3 outputs 7 Slave with 4 inputs and 4 outputs 7 F slave with 2 safe inputs The following table shows the maximum number of equippable slaves: 1) For metal enclosures only 1 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O is possible. Enclosures for Number of slaves for enclosures without EMERGENCY-STOP Number of slaves for enclosures with EMERGENCY-STOP 1 command point Not available 1 × F slave 2 command points 1 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O Not available 3 command points 1 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 1 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 × failsafe slave 4 command points 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O1) 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 × failsafe slave1) 6 command points 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O 2 × slave 4I/4O or 4I/3O + 1 × failsafe slave
  • 108.
    3SB3 Pushbutton Unitsand Indicator Lights, 22 mm AS-Interface Enclosures and Front Panel Modules AS-Interface enclosures with standard fittings 9/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 9 ■Overview Enclosures with standard fittings are available with: 7 1 to 3 command points 7 Operational voltage through AS-Interface (approx. 30 V), 7 Vertical mounting type. 7 Molded-plastic enclosures with actuators and indicators made of plastic, metal enclosures with actuators and indica- tors made of metal. The actuator/indicator is fixed with an enclosure nut. If required it can be disassembled with a 27 mm socket wrench or with a 3SX17 07 ring nut wrench. The enclosures without EMERGENCY-STOP each have one user module with 4I/3O; the enclosures with EMERGENCY-STOP have a safe AS-Interface slave integrated in the enclosure. The EMERGENCY-STOP enclosures have two NC contact blocks which are fitted inside the enclosure and wired to the safe slave. The contact blocks and lampholders (with spring-loaded terminals) of the control devices and the AS-Interface slaves are mounted in the bottom of the enclosure and connected by cables. The molded-plastic versions of the enclosures have a connec- tion for the AS-Interface flat cable (the cable is routed past the enclosure on the outside); in the case of the metal versions the AS-Interface cable is routed into the enclosure. ■Selection and ordering data Equipping options (A, B, C = identification letters of the command points) Number of command points DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg AS-Interface enclosures, molded plastic A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton through AS-Interface adapter, top part of enclosure in yellow 1 A 3SF5 811-0AA08 1 1 unit 121 0.415 A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton through AS-Interface adapter, top part of enclosure in yellow, with protective collar 1 A 3SF5 811-0AB08 1 1 unit 121 0.415 B = Pushbutton green, label "I", A = Pushbutton red, label "O" 2 A 3SF5 812-0DA00 1 1 unit 121 0.352 B = Pushbutton white, label "I", A = Pushbutton black, label "O" 2 A 3SF5 812-0DB00 1 1 unit 121 0.352 C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription, B = Pushbutton green, label "I", A = Pushbutton red, label "O" 3 A 3SF5 813-0DA00 1 1 unit 121 0.415 C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription, B = Pushbutton white, label "I", A = Pushbutton black, label "O" 3 A 3SF5 813-0DC00 1 1 unit 121 0.415 C = Pushbutton black, label "II", B = Pushbutton black, label "I", A = Pushbutton red, label "O" 3 A 3SF5 813-0DB00 1 1 unit 121 0.415 AS-Interface enclosures, metal A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton through AS-Interface adapter, top part of enclosure in yellow 1 A 3SF5 811-2AA08 1 1 unit 121 0.415 A = EMERGENCY-STOP mushroom pushbutton through AS-Interface adapter, top part of enclosure in yellow, with protective collar 1 A 3SF5 811-2AB08 1 1 unit 121 0.415 B = Pushbutton green, label "I", A = Pushbutton red, label "O" 2 A 3SF5 812-2DA00 1 1 unit 121 0.415 B = Pushbutton white, label "I", A = Pushbutton black, label "O" 2 A 3SF5 812-2DB00 1 1 unit 121 0.415 C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription, B = Pushbutton green, label "I", A = Pushbutton red, label "O" 3 A 3SF5 813-2DA00 1 1 unit 121 0.415 C = Indicator light clear, label without inscription, B = Pushbutton white, label "I", A = Pushbutton black, label "O" 3 A 3SF5 813-2DC00 1 1 unit 121 0.415 C = Pushbutton black, label "II", B = Pushbutton black, label "I", A = Pushbutton red, label "O" 3 A 3SF5 813-2DB00 1 1 unit 121 0.415 7 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 109.
    Siemens LV 1News · 04/2006 ES Motor Starter 13/2 - Overview 13/3 - Selection and ordering data ES Soft Starter 13/4 - Overview 13/4 - Selection and ordering data Planning and Configuration with SIRIUS Catalog
  • 110.
    Planning and Configurationwith SIRIUS ES Motor Starter 13/2 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 13 ■Overview ES Motor Starter is used for start-up, parameterization, diagnos- tics, documentation and the preventative maintenance of the High-Feature motor starters of the SIMATIC ET 200S, ET 200pro and ECOFAST product families. Interfacing is performed • Either through the serial device interface (applicable to ET 200S/ET 200pro/ECOFAST) or • With PROFIBUS DP V1 capable motor starters from any point in PROFIBUS (applies for ET 200pro/ECOFAST). Using ES Motor Starter, the communication capable motor start- ers are easily parameterized during start-up, monitored during normal operation and successfully diagnosed for service purposes. Preventative maintenance is supported by a function for reading out diverse statistical data (e.g. operating hours, operating cycles, cut-off currents, etc.). The user is supported during these procedures with comprehensive Help functions and plain text displays. ES Motor Starter can either be used as a stand-alone program or it can be integrated into STEP 7 V5.1 SP3 upwards by means of an object manager. The following components are required for a serial connection: ET 200S motor starters, High Feature: • Control module 2DI DC 24 V COM 3RK1 903-0CH10 • LOGO! PC cable 6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0 ET 200pro motor starters: • RS 232 interface cable 3RK1 922-2BP00 ECOFAST motor starters, High Feature (interface cable): • PC cable 3RK1 911-0BN20
  • 111.
    13 Planning and Configurationwith SIRIUS ES Motor Starter 13/3Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 ■Selection and ordering data Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg ES Motor Starter 2006 Smart single license Comprising: • ES Motor Starter for parameterizing, monitoring, diagnosing and testing the ECOFAST Motor Starters, SIMATIC ET 200S High-Feature Starters and SIMATIC ET 200pro Motor Starters over a serial connection - With Online Help German/English selectable - Operating system: Windows 2000/XP • System requirements: - Cable for serial communication through a serial interface - CD-ROM drive B 3ZS1 310-1CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 121 0.230 ES Motor Starter 2006 Professional single license Comprising: • ES Motor Starter for parameterization, monitoring, diagnostics and testing of the ECOFAST Motor Starters, SIMATIC ET 200S High-Feature Starters and SIMATIC ET 200pro Motor Starters over PROFIBUS DP or a serial connection - With Online Help German/English selectable - Operating system: Windows 2000/XP • STEP7 Object Manager (OM) for integrating the ECOFAST starter as S7 slave in SIMATIC S7 for calling ES Motor Starter from STEP7 B 3ZS1 310-2CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 121 0.230 ES Motor Starter 2006 Professional Upgrade single license Comprising: • Upgrade from Switch ES Motor Starter 2004 or ES Motor Starter Smart 2005 to ES Motor Starter 2006 Professional B 3ZS1 310-2CC10-0YE0 1 1 unit 121 0.230 Accessories for ET 200S motor starters, High-Feature Control module 2DI DC 24 V COM Digital input module with 2 inputs for local motor starter functions for mounting onto the front of motor starters Operational voltage 24 V DC (supplied from U1), short-circuit proof, floating contact with serial interface for connecting to ES Switch Connection through LOGO! PC cable, max. cable length (out and back) 50 m A 3RK1 903-0CH10 1 1 unit 121 0.025 LOGO! PC cables for connecting the High-Feature motor starter with Switch ES interface to a PC A 6ED1 057-1AA00-0BA0 1 1 unit 200 0.159 Accessories for ET 200pro motor starters RS 232 interface cables for serial data connection between an ET 200pro motor starter and a laptop/PC/PG B 3RK1 922-2BP00 1 1 unit 121 0.330 Accessories for ECOFAST motor starters, High-Feature (interface cable) PC cables B 3RK1 911-0BN20 1 1 unit 121 0.162 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 112.
    Planning and Configurationwith SIRIUS ES Soft Starter 13/4 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 13 ■Overview ES Soft Starter 2006 Smart: Soft starter control function ES Soft Starter 2006 Smart: Motor starter control ES Soft Starter 2006 Smart is used for starting up, parameterizing, diagnosing and documenting the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starter range for High-Feature applications. Interfacing is by PC or PG and a special connecting cable through the serial interface provided on the soft starter. Using ES 2006 Soft Starter Smart, the SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters for High-Feature applications are easily parameterized during start-up, monitored during normal operation and successfully diagnosed for service purposes. The device parameters can be conveniently set offline on the PC for user-friendly local transfer into the soft starter during start-up at a later time. The main features of the program include: • Clearly arranged setting of device functions and their parameters (online/offline) • Storage and print-out of the set parameters for data back-up • Clearly arranged diagnostics function of the soft starter and presentation of the most important measured values • Logbook with error and event memory • Oscilloscope function for recording measured values and events • German/English as operating language The following requirements must be met in order to use the software together with the soft starter: • Soft starter requirements: - SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters firmware *E04* and higher Applied to soft starters with delivery date December 2005 and later • PC system requirements: - Operating system: Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional - Processor: ≥ 800 MHz - Free space on hard disk: approx. 150 MByte - CD-ROM drive - Serial interface • Serial connecting cable (PC – soft starter): - Connecting cable: 3UF7 940-0AA00-0. ■Selection and ordering data Version DT Order No. Price per PU PU (UNIT, SET, M) PS* PG Weight per PU approx. kg ES Soft Starter 2006 Smart Parameterization and service software for SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters for parameterizing through the system interface on the device. Executes on PC/PG under Windows 2000/XP Professional. Delivered without PC cable. Type of supply: CD, single license • System requirements: - Operating system: Windows 2000 Professional or Windows XP Professional - Processor: ≥ 800 MHz - Free space on hard disk: approx. 150 MByte - CD-ROM drive - Serial PC cable } 3ZS1 313-1CC10-0YA0 1 1 unit 131 0.230 Accessories PC cables Connecting cable for PC/PG communication with SIRIUS 3RW44 soft starters and for connecting to the serial interface of the PC/PG B 3UF7 940-0AA00-0 1 1 unit 131 0.150 * You can order this quantity or a multiple thereof.
  • 113.
    13 Planning and Configurationwith SIRIUS Notes 13/5Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006
  • 114.
    Planning and Configurationwith SIRIUS Notes 13/6 Siemens LV 1 News · 04/2006 13 7
  • 115.
    Appendix Terms and conditionsof sale and delivery Export regulations ■Terms and conditions of sale and delivery By using this catalog you can acquire hardware and software products described therein from the Siemens AG subject to the following terms. Please note! The scope, the quality and the con- ditions for supplies and services, including software products, by any Siemens entity having a registered office outside of Ger- many, shall be subject exclusively to the General Terms and Conditions of the respective Siemens entity. For customers with a seat or registered office in the Federal Republic of Germany The "General Terms of Payment" as well as the "General Condi- tions for the Supply of Products and Services of the Electrical and Electronics Industry" shall apply. For software products, the "General License Conditions for Soft- ware Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office in Germany" shall apply. For customers with a seat or registered office outside of Germany The "General Terms of Payment" as well as the "General Condi- tions for Supplies of Siemens, Automation and Drives for Cus- tomers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany" shall apply. For software products, the "General License Conditions for Soft- ware Products for Automation and Drives for Customers with a Seat or registered Office outside of Germany" shall apply. General The prices are in € (Euro) ex works, exclusive packaging. The sales tax (value added tax) is not included in the prices. It shall be debited separately at the respective rate according to the applicable legal regulations. In addition to the prices of products which include silver, plump, aluminum and/or copper, surcharges may be calculated if the respective limits of the notes are exceeded. The respective note (e.g. source: German newspaper "Handesblatt" in category "deutsche Edelmetalle" and "Metallverarbeiter") for silver ("verar- beitetes Silber"), plump ("Blei in Kabeln"), aluminum ("Aluminium in Kabeln") and copper ("Elektrolytkupfer", "DEL-Notiz") respec- tively, of the day the order or rather the on call order is received, is decisive for the calculation of the surcharges. Surcharges of copper shall be calculated for Drives at a note ("DEL-Notiz") above EUR 225,00 / 100 Kg and for chokes / trans- formers above EUR 150,00 / 100 kg. Surcharges shall be charged based on the quantities of the ma- terials which are contained in the relevant products. Prices are subject to change without prior notice. We will debit the prices valid at the time of delivery. The dimensions are in mm. Illustrations are not binding. Insofar as there are no remarks on the corresponding pages, - especially with regard to data, dimensions and weights given - these are subject to change without prior notice. Comprehensive Terms and Conditions of Sale and Delivery are available free of charge from your local Siemens business office under the following Order Nos.: • 6ZB5310-0KR30-0BA0 (for customers based in the Federal Republic of Germany) • 6ZB5310-0KS53-0BA0 (for customers based outside of the Federal Republic of Germany) or download them from the Internet http://www.siemens.com/automation/mall (Germany: A&D Mall Online-Help System) ■Export regulations The products listed in this catalog / price list may be subject to European / German and/or US export regulations. Therefore, any export requiring a license is subject to approval by the competent authorities. According to current provisions, the following export regulations must be observed with respect to the products featured in this catalog / price list: Even without a label or with an "AL: N" or "ECCN: N", authoriza- tion may be required due to the final destination and purpose for which the goods are to be used. The deciding factors are the AL or ECCN export authorization indicated on order confirmations, delivery notes and invoices. Errors excepted and subject to change without prior notice. A&D/VuL/De 17.03.05 AL Number of the German Export List. Products marked other than "N" require an export license. In the case of software products, the export des- ignations of the relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to. Goods labeled with an "AL not equal to N" are subject to a European or German export authori- zation when being exported out of the EU. ECCN Export Control Classification Number. Products marked other than "N" are subject to a reexport license to specific countries. In the case of software products, the export designations of the relevant data medium must also be generally adhered to. Goods labeled with an "ECCN not equal to N" are subject to a US re-export authorization.
  • 116.
    lv1_news_U1_U4_200605_en.FH10 Thu May18 13:19:21 2006 Seite 1 www.siemens.com/lowvoltage Siemens AG Automation and Drives Low-Voltage Controls and Distribution Postfach 48 48 90327 NÜRNBERG GERMANY www.siemens.com/automation The information provided in this catalog contains descriptions or characteristics of performance which in case of actual use do not always apply as described or which may change as a result of further development of the products. An obligation to provide the respective characteristics shall only exist if expressly agreed in the terms of contract. Availability and technical specifications are subject to change without notice. All product designations may be trademarks or product names of Siemens AG or supplier companies whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owners. Subjecttochangewithoutpriornotice|Dispo68201|KG050610.E112En/603018|PrintedinGermany|©SiemensAG2006 Order No. E86060-K1002-A141-A1-7600 Token fee: 2.00 €